V 


<r' 


ks 


i 


e 


* 


7>/\  ,2  o  97 
.  A  >¥ 


WWER  LIBRARY:' 

LATIN  PROSE ,  * 

*  !  \  \  \\  ’ 

U»r  '  ? 

THROUGH  ENGLISH  IDIOM. 

Euless  anS  Eictcissees 

ON 

LATIN  PROSE  COMPOSITION 


BY  THE 

REV.  EDWIN  A.  ABBOTT,  D.D., 

HEAD  MASTER  OF  THE  CITY  OF  LONDON  SCHOOL. 


WITH  ADDITIONS  BY 


AUTHOR  OF  “LYRA 
AND  LATIN 


ALS  OF*  ADVANCED  GREEK 
ETC.,  ETC. 

1 "*• 


E.  R.  HUMPHREYS,  A.M.,  LL.D., 

HRI-L^NI^A,’  ALS  OFLA] 

»e  coiii^iT't,cife?^^L 

b  *  'i-  ....  «-• ,  YU  -  Oi 

».  77-  -  •  •  ‘  4  •  •  H.>-  •» 

1-  *  ,  •*■*'  *v 

VjSMph  ^ 

JOHN  ALLYN,  PUBLISHER. 

1876.  _  • 


Copyright ,  1876, 
By  John  Allyn. 


131106 


Cambridge: 

Press  of  John  Wilson  6°  Son. 


PREFATORY  NOTE 


BY  THE  AMERICAN  EDITOR. 

- ♦ - 

In  using  this  excellent  little  Manual  with  my  own 
pupils,  I  have  felt  the  want  of  a  series  of  simpler  in¬ 
troductory  exercises,  illustrative  of  the  “  Rules  and 
Reasons,”  and  more  especially  of  those  applying  to 
the  prepositions  ;  and  I  have  therefore  prepared  the 
additional  exercises  now  inserted.  I  would  suggest 
to  teachers  the  advantage  of  carrying  out  the  same 
plan  to  a  much  fuller  extent  while  using  this  text¬ 
book. 

Much  of  the  difficulty  experienced  by  teachers  in 
communicating,  and  by  pupils  in  acquiring,  a  facility 
in  Latin  and  Greek  Composition  would  be  removed, 
if  the  former  would  discard  both  the  idea  and  the 
expression  so  constantly  applied  to  the  Greek  and 
Roman  tongues,  —  “  the  dead  languages.”  Regard 
them,  as  what  they  are,  and  ever  will  be,  so  long  as 
our  English  tongue  survives,  “  living,”  and  embody¬ 
ing  the  life-essence  of  all  the  best  modern  tongues,  — 
teach  them  on  the  same  common-sense,  practical 
plans  as  you  teach  German,  French,  or  Spanish,  and 


iv 


PREFA  TOR  Y  NO  TE. 


the  duty  will  become  an  easier  one  to  the  teacher,  a 
pleasanter  and  more  profitable  one  to  the  taught. 

From  the  long  and  successful  experience  I  have 
had  in  teaching  Latin  and  Greek  composition,  it  will 
not,  I  trust,  be  deemed  presumptuous  in  me  to  rec¬ 
ommend  —  as  I  did,  several  years  ago,  in  the  Intro¬ 
duction  to  my  Livy  —  as  one  of  the  most  valuable 
aids  to  acquiring  correctness  and  ease  of  composi¬ 
tion,  the  frequent  and  close  analysis  and  written 
translation  of  passages  of  Caesar,  Cicero,  and  Livy, 
in  Latin,  and  of  Xenophon  and  Plato,  in  Greek,  and 
then  the  requiring  the  pupil  on  the  following  day  to 
turn  back  the  translation  thus  made  into  Latin  or 
Greek,  not  insisting  on  a  word-for-word  agreement 
with  the  original,  but  allowing  new  turnings  to  stand, 
if  not  wrong.  This  last  plan  I  have  ever  found  most 
encouraging  to  the  pupil. 

While  the  “  Scheme  of  Latin  Pronunciation  ”  is 
retained  at  the  end  of  the  volume,  I  feel  it  necessary 
to  say  that,  beyond  the  Continental  pronunciation  of 
the  vowels,  which  I  have  advocated  and  used  for 
nearly  twenty  years,  I  dissent  in  theory  —  as  do 
many  scholars  far  more  eminent  than  I  —  from  many 
points  in  that  “  Scheme,”  and  in  the  Syllabus,  on 
which  it  is  founded,  —  a  syllabus  which,  to  use  the 
words  of  one  of  the  professors  who  prepared  it,  “  has 
fallen  still-born  in  England.”  In  practice ,  as  a  tutor 
for  Harvard,  I  am  almost  of  necessity  led  into  its 


PREFATORY  NOTE. 


v 


adoption,  having  to  read  with  pupils  who  have  been 
prepared  on  that  system.  I  earnestly  cherish  the 
hope,  however,  that  the  Professors  of  Harvard,  and 
other  American  Colleges,  will  yet  reconsider  this 
matter  of  Latin  Pronunciation,  and  modify  the  rules 
laid  down  for  the  sounds  of  the  consonants. 


29^  Columbus  Avenue,  Boston, 
July  18,  1876. 


E.  R.  H. 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 

— 4 

The  title  of  this  book,  “  Latin  Prose  through  English 
Idiom ,”  is  not  intended  to  be  a  meaningless  antithesis. 
The  Author’s  object  is  to  prepare  English  students  for 
the  study  and  composition  of  Latin  Prose,  by  calling 
their  attention  first  to  the  peculiarities  of  English 
idiom,  and  then  to  the  methods  of  representing  the 
English  in  the  corresponding  Latin  idiom. 

The  first  part  consists  of  ‘  Rules  and  Reasons.’ 
The  pupil  is  supposed  to  have  gone  through  a 
course  of  Latin  Grammar  and  Latin  Exercises,  and 
to  be  on  the  point  of  writing  continuous  Latin  Prose ; 
and  this  part  is  intended  to  give  a  rapid  summary  of  the 
Rules  of  Latin  Syntax  regarded  fro?n  an  English  point 
of  view.  The  differences  between  English  and  Latin 
are  not  only  brought  prominently  forward,  but  also, 
as  far  as  possible,  explained.  The  pupil’s- attention 
is  called  to  the  points  in  which  English  is  superior 
to  Latin,  to  the  use  of  a  and  the,  to  the  abundance 
of  Tenses,  of  Verbal  Nouns,  and  of  Compound  Pre¬ 
positions,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  to  the  Latin  supe¬ 
riority  in  Moods.  Rules  are  not  despised,  and  are 
frequently  and  prominently  set  forth ;  but  an  attempt 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION.  vii 

is  made  to  prepare  the  pupil  for  them  by  analysing 
the  English  language,  and  by  explaining  the  force  of 
many  English  words  that  were,  until  lately,  seldom 
explained,  e.g.  that,  than,  of. 

A  good  deal  of  space  has  been  given  to  the 
Prepositions.  It  is  hoped  that  the  Dictionary  of 
Prepositions  contained  in  Paragraph  41  may  be  found 
useful,  not  only  in  preventing  a  good  many  common 
blunders  made  by  beginners  in  Latin  Prose,  but  also 
in  training  pupils  habitually  to  connect  and  explain 
the  different  meanings  of  Prepositions  both  English 
and  Latin.  This  seems  a  very  useful  mental  training. 

The  Rules  are  condensed,  collected,  and  numbered 
at  the  beginning  of  the  book,  for  easy  reference. 

One  inconvenience  arising  from  treating  the  subject 
generally  from  an  English,  but  occasionally  from  a 
Latin,  point  of  view,  is  this,  that  it  is  difficult  to 
preserve  any  strictly  logical  order  in  the  arrangement 
of  the  Rules.  This  would  be  a  very  serious  defect 
in  a  book  intended  to  serve  the  purpose  of  a  Gram¬ 
mar  ;  but  in  a  book  of  reference  it  may,  I  hope,  be 
excused,  provided  that  the  Index  at  the  beginning 
is  found  sufficient  to  guide  any  moderately  careless 
boy  to  the  explanation  and  examples  of  each  Rule. 

The  Examples  at  the  end  are  purposely  unarranged, 
or  rather  are  arranged  with  no  other  object  than  that, 
by  the  time  the  pupil  may  be  supposed  to  have  for¬ 
gotten  a  rule  exemplified  some  six  examples  back, 
another  exemplification  may  present  itself  to  him 


viii  PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION1. 

'  when  he  is  off  his  guard.  Connected  examples  are 
very  useful  to  illustrate,  but  very  useless  to  test  a 
pupil’s  knowledge.  A  pupil  that  knows  he  is  “  doing 
ut ”  may  answer  correctly  enough;  but  set  the  same 
boy  on  ut  next  day,  when  he  is  “doing  quum”  and 
his  correctness  will  often  be  lamentably  diminished. 

In  order  to  serve  as  a  better  test,  these  Examples 
have  not,  as  the  Examples  in  the  former  part  of  the 
book  have,  the  English  peculiarities  pointed  out  by 
small  capitals.  The  pupil,  covering  the  Latin  with 
his  hand,  is  intended  to  read  off  the  English  into  Latin 
without  any  help  or  guidance  whatever. 

The  Exercises  are  arranged  on  a  principle  that  I  have 
adopted  for  many  years,  and  that  I  may  call  the  pitfall 
principle.  Each  Exercise  contains  a  number  of  pits  or 
traps.  All  traps  that  prove  fatal  are  repeated  in  the 
following  Exercise,  in  a  disguised  form.  If  the  fatality 
continues,  the  traps  are  repeated,  always  masked  in 
different  expressions,  until  even  the  weakest  pupil  in  the 
class  gains  experience  enough  to  warn  him  of  danger. 
An  instance  will  explain  what  is  meant.  In  the  first 
exercise  of  the  term,  the  teacher  sets,  perhaps,  “  The 
excellent  Balbus  answered  in  haste,  ‘  I  asked  you  to 
come  to  Rome,  and  you  promised  to  do  so/  &c.”  The 
bottom  boy  sends  up,  “  Egregius  Balbus  respondit 
celeritate,  rogavi  te  venire  ad  Romam  et  tu  promi¬ 
sisti  facere  ita.”  The  teacher  points  out  the  correct 
expression  in  each  case  : — (i)  “  Balbus,  vir  egregius” ; 
(2)  “summa  celeritate,”  or  “celeriter”;  (3)  “‘rogavi’ 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION,  fx 

inquit’’;  (4)  “ut  venires”;  (5)  “Romam,”  without 
“ad”;  (6)  “  te  id  facturum  esse.”  Then  he  sets 
something  like  the  following  (only  carefully  dispersing 
the  different  traps  through  different  parts  of  the  new 
exercise) : — I  am  surprised,’  said  (3)  the  passionate 
(1)  queen,  ‘that,  though  I  repeatedly  entreated  you 
(4)  to  come  with  (2)  speed  to  my  assistance,  you  have 
made  a  foolish  promise  to  remain  at  (5)  Carthage.’” 
Here  our  five  old  pitfalls  are  re-introduced,  and  one 
or  two,  not  worth  now  mentioning,  are  introduced  for 
the  first  time.  It  is  needless  to  say  that  the  bottom 
boy  will  fall  into  the  same  pitfall  four  or  five,  or  even, 
on  the  subject  of  Sequence  of  Tenses  and  Oratio 
Obliqua,  ten  times ;  but  at  last  even  the  dullest  avoid 
some  pitfalls,  and  are  found  to  have  been  goaded  or 
wearied  into  something  approximating  to  thought. 

The  Exercises  are  selected  out  of  some  hundreds 
dictated  in  the  course  of  an  experience  of  several 
years.  The  English  will  occasionally  be  found  abrupt, 
disconnected,  and,  it  need  not  be  said,  uninteresting. 
I  hope,  however,  that  the  language  will  be  found  free 
from  the  worst  fault  of  such  exercises — the  fault  of 
blending  English  and  Latin  into  a  Latin-English 
mixture  that  is  no  language  at  all,  and  that  serves  to 
teach  nothing.  The  Exercises  are  meant  rather  as 
specimens  of  the  kind  of  teaching  than  as  models. 
Each  teacher  will  do  well  to  dictate,  or,  still  better 
(if  he  has  time),  to  write,  exercises  of  his  own.  But 
though  apologies  may  be  due  for  the  execution*,  I 


X 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 


believe  the  pitfall  principle  to  be  extremely  useful 
and  stimulating,  and  I  think  the  practice  of  writing 
continuous  Latin  Prose  in  this  way  might  be  ad¬ 
vantageously  taught  much  earlier  than  it  is  taught 
at  present.  Boys  are  wearied  to  death  by  years  o'f 
“  Exercises  on  Rules  ” ;  and  the  monotony  of  the 
exercise  tends  to  suppress  thought. 

Some  of  the  Exercises  consist  of  extracts  from  the 
Percy  Anecdotes,  modified  for  the  purpose  of  exempli¬ 
fying  the  differences  between  Latin  and  English  idiom. 
In  almost  all  of  them  will  be  found  constantly  re¬ 
curring  exemplifications  of  the  more  important  rules 
of  Latin  Prose,  e.g.  the  Sequence  of  Tenses,  the  use  o 
*  ut  ’  for  to,  and,  above  all,  the  rules  of  Oratio  Obliqua. 
To  this  last  I  attach  great  importance,  for  I  am  per¬ 
suaded  that  a  boy  cannot  be  taught  to  master  Oratio 
Obliqua  without  having  been  at  the  same  time  taught, 
in  some  degree,  to  think. 

-  Although  I  fear  that  many  pupils  even  in  Sixth 
Forms  might  consult  parts  of  this  little  book  with 
advantage,  yet  it  is  not  intended  for  them,  and  hardly 
touches  on  style.  It  does  not,  therefore,  cover  the 
same  ground  as  Mr.  Potts’  “  Hints  towards  Latin 
Prose  Composition,”  from  which  many  of  my  pupils 
have  gained  great  help. 

The  ‘  Scheme  of  Latin  Pronunciation,’  at  the  end 
of  the  book,  is  based  on  the  Syllabus  recently  issued 
by  the  Latin  Professors  of  Cambridge  and  Oxford,  at 
the  repeated  request  of  the  Head  Masters  of  Schools. 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 


The  Alphabetical  Index,  the  changes  in  the  headings 
of  the  pages,  the  easier  introductory  exercises,  and  the 
Appendix  on  the  connection  of  sentences,  introduced 
into  this  Edition,  will,  it  is  hoped,  materially  increase 
the  utility  of  the  book. 

The  knowledge  that  the  First  Edition  had  been 
prepared  somewhat  hurriedly  for  the  press  prevented 
me  from  acknowledging  the  kind  help  of  several 
friends,  whose  names  I  was  unwilling  to  connect  with 
a  possible  responsibility  for  mistakes  for  which  I  alone 
was  responsible.  In  issuing  this  corrected  and  revised 
Edition  I  feel  bound  to  express  my  especial  obligations 
to  Mr.  J.  S.  Phillpotts,  one  of  the  Assistant  Masters  of 
Rugby,  for  his  general  supervision  of  the  work  from 
the  first,  and  in  particular  for  the  Appendix  in  this 
edition,  which  is  abridged  from  a  sketch  drawn  out  by 
him  ;  also  to  the  Rev.  J.  H.  Lupton,  Sur-Master 
of  St.  Paul’s  School,  and  to  Mr.  Henry  Lee-Warner, 
one  of  the  Assistant  Masters  of  Rugby,  for  several 
valuable  suggestions  and  corrections.  My  acknow¬ 
ledgments  would  be  incomplete  without  reference  to 
the  help  given  me,  in  the  course  of  preparing  this 
Edition,  by  Mr.  H.  J-Roby — help  that  increases  my 
regret  that  the  second  volume  of  his  Latin  Grammar 
is  still  a  hope  deferred. 


CONTENTS 


- 4 - 

PAGE 

RULES  * . xiii 

RULES  AND  REASONS . I — Io6 

MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS . I07— 130 

GRADUATED  EXERCISES . .  .  I3I — l6l 

SCHEME  OF  LATIN  GENDERS . 1 62 

SCHEME  OF  LATIN  PRONUNCIATION . 1 63 

APPENDIX  ON  THE  CONNECTION  OF  SENTENCES  .  1 64 

ALPHABETICAL  INDEX . 1 66 


*  These  Rules  will  be  found  to  sene  the  purpose  of  a  detailed  Index  to 
pages  1 — 1 06. 


INDEX  OF  RULES. 


These  Rules  are  intended  to  be  committed  to  memory ,  and  are 
therefore  expressed  as  tersely  as  possible ,  without  attempt  at 
illustration.  For  explanations  and  examples ,  the  pupil  is 
referred, ,  by  the  figures  in  brackets ,  to  the  Paragraphs  in  the 

*  Rules  and  Reasons .*  For  instance  Rule  92  simply  states 
the  Latin  use  of  Verbs  of  fearing.  For  the  explanation ,  the 
pupil  is  referred  to  Paragraph  49. 

The  Index  will  also  serve  as  a  detailed  Table  of  Contents  to  the 

*  Rules  and  Reasons .* 


1.  There  is  a  reason  for  every  irregularity.  (1) 

2.  Latin-derived  words  in  English  can  seldom  be  re¬ 
presented  by  their  Latin  originals.  (2) 

3.  Many  English  words,  especially  abstract  Nouns, 
have  no  single  corresponding  words  in  Latin.  (3,  3  a) 

4.  The  English  Passive  should  often  be  rendered  by  the 
Latin  Active. '  (4) 

5.  Do  not  translate  the  redundant  it  nor  that  in 
*  that  of.’  (5) 

6.  1  It  is  the  duty  *  1  must &c.  are  often  rendered  by  the 
Latin  Neuter  Gerundive  with  Dative  of  the  Person.  (5) 

7.  I  have  a  book  =  est  mihi  liber.  (5) 


xiv 


LATIN  PROSE. 


8.  Latin  Verbs  taking  the  Dative  in  the  Active  must  be 
used  impersonally  in  the  Passive,  retaining  the  Dative, 
eg.  1  tibi  a  me  indulgetur/  (6) 

9.  Quisquam  and  ullus  are  used  in  Negative  and  Com¬ 
parative  Sentences,  and  in  Interrogative  Sentences  that 
expect  the  answer  ‘  no/  (7) 

10.  Each  returned  to  his  tent  =  Ad  suum  quisque  ta¬ 
bernaculum  rediere.  (7) 

11.  Distinguish  alter  and  alius,  quis  and  uter.  (7) 

12.  Observe  the  different  meanings  of  ‘  one!  (8) 

13.  Avoid  Pronouns  and  the  repetition  of  Nouns,  as  far 
as  possible,  by  using  the  same  Subject  or  Object  for 
different  sentences.  (9) 

14.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  partitively  ;  nostri 
and  vestri  in  other  cases.  (10) 

14. *  Se,  not  is  nor  ille,  refers  to  the  principal  Subject. 
(10  a ) 

15.  Use  nullius,  nullo,  for  neminis,  nemine,  (io) 

16.  The  English  Passive  Indicative  Present,  eg.  Ms 
caught,  is  ambiguous,  and  must  be  translated,  according 

to  the  sense,  by  the  Latin  Present  or  Perfect.  (11) 

1 

17.  The  English  Imperfect  after  while  is  often  rendered 
by  the  Latin  Present.  (11) 

18.  The  English  Pluperfect  after  till ,  before ,  and  after  is 
often  rendered  by  the  Latin  Perfect.  (11) 

19.  The  English  Present  after  when ,  if  as  long  as, 
unless ,  before ,  and  after,  is  often  to  be  rendered  by  the 
Latin  Future.  (11) 

20.  Be  careful  in  the  use  of  the  English  Auxiliary 
Verbs.  Remember  that  they  are  used  Subjunctively  as 
well  as  Indicatively,  and  that  they  often  have  their  ori¬ 
ginal,  as  well  as  their  Auxiliary,  force.  (12) 


INDEX  OF  RULES. 


xv 


21.  1 1  ought  to,  could,  have  done]  is,  in  Latin,  ‘debui, 
potui,  facere/  (12) 

22.  Do  not  fear  =  ne  tinraeris  ;  not,  ne  timeas.  (12) 

23.  Verbs  of  trusting,  pleasing ,  helping ,  hurting,  yield¬ 
ing  to,  suiting,  resisting,  favouring,  envying,  being  angry 
with,  take  the  Dative.  (13) 

24.  I  threaten  you  with  death  =  minor  tibi  mortem. 

25.  Adjectives  similar  in  meaning  to  the  Verbs  in  Rule 
23,  and  also  Adjectives  expressing  likeness  or  unlikeness 
and  proximity,  take  the  Dative.  (13) 

26.  Verbs  of  fulness,  want ,  &c.  take  the  Ablative.  (13) 

/ 

27.  Pudet,  poenitet,  piget,  miseret,  tsedet  take  the 
Accusative  of  the  Person  feeling,  and  the  Genitive  of  that 
which  causes  the  feeling.  (13«) 

28.  Write  ‘  interest  Tulli’  but  ‘  interest  mea,  tua,  nos¬ 
tra,  &c.’  (13  <z) 

29.  Misereor,  obliviscor,  and  reminiscor  take  the 
Genitive.  (13#) 

30.  Fungor,  fruor,  utor,  vescor,  pascor,  and  potior 

take  the  Ablative.  (13«) 

31.  Doceo,  celo,  rogo,  oro,  and  interrogo  take  two 
Accusatives.  (14) 

32.  So  do  moneo,  admoneo,  and  hortor,  when  the 
Accusative  of  the  thing  is  a  neuter  Pronoun.  (14) 

33.  Transduco  and  transporto  take  two  Accusatives. 
(14) 

34  Verbs  compounded  of  Prepositions,  and  implying 
motion,  take  the  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object,  if  they  are 
used  metaphorically,  eg.  ‘  princeps  imperatori  milites 
detraxit’  (15) 


xvi 


LATIN  PROSE. 


35.  If  literally  used,  they  require  the  repetition  of  the 
Preposition,  e.g.  ‘anulum  de  digito  detraxit/  (15) 

36.  He  flung  himself  at  Caesar’s  feet  =  Caesari  se  ad 
pedes  projecit.  (15) 

57.  Verbs  signifying  preferring  and  the  contrary  take 
the  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object.  (15) 

38.  After  a  verb  of  motion  to,  names  of  towns  and 
small  islands  are  in  the  Accusative  without  a  Preposition. 
So  are  domum,  humum,  and  rus.  (16) 

39.  After  a  verb  of  motion  from ,  the  above-mentioned 
words  are  in  the  Ablative  without  a  Preposition.  (16) 

40.  After  a  verb  of  rest  in,  the  above-mentioned  words 
are,  if  Singular,  in  a  locative  case  ending  in  -i  (but 
Roma-i  is  written  Romoe) :  if  Plural,  in  the  Ablative.  (16) 

41:  Sum,  do,  duco,  tribuo  take  a  double  Dative,  e.g . 
‘  librum  mihi  dono  dedit.’  (i 7) 

42.  The  brave  Balbus  =  Balbus,  vir  fortissimus.  (18) 

43.  Two  or  more  Adjectives  are  not  attached  to  the 
same  Noun  without  et  or  que.  (19) 

44.  This  disgraceful  calamity  =  hsec  tam  foeda  cala¬ 
mitas.  (19) 

45.  The  men  in  t-he  ship  =  qui  erant  in  navi.  (20) 

46.  The  sooner,  the  better  =  quo  citius,  eo  melius.  (21) 

47.  Distinguish  between  a  meaning  any ,  and  a  meaning 
a  certam.  (22) 

48.  No  poet  =  nemo  poeta.  (22) 

49.  Eveiy  one  of  superior  learning  )  _  (  doctissimus 

A  ll  the  most  learned  men  )  ~  X  quisque.  (22) 

50.  Omnis  means  all  and  not  every ,  in  Prose.  (22) 


INDEX  OF  RULES.  xvii 

(tf)  1,000  or  1  —  1  O2)  mille  milites. 

*  *  \b)  10,000  men  )  —  (  (b)  decem  millia  militum. 

52.  More  learning  =  plus  doctrinae. 

53.  Participles  are  freely  used  as  Adjectives  in  English, 
but  not  in  Latin,  e.g.  ‘the  despairing  soldiers,’  ‘milites, 
Jam  desperantes,’  but  not  ‘desperantes  milites.’  (23) 

54.  With  and  in,  denoting  manner ,  must  not  be  trans¬ 
lated  by  the  simple  A  blative  of  a  Noun  unqualified  by  an 
Adjective ,  e.g.  ‘ in  anger,’  ‘ with  fury’  =  iracunde,  or 
N.B.  summa  iracundia.  (24) 

55.  Nunc  refers  to  the  Present,  simply  ;  jam  to  the 
Present  regarded  with  reference  to  the  Past  or  Future. 
(25) 

56.  More ,  when  used  with  Verbs  and  meaning  to  a 
greater  extent,  is  plus  t  when  used  with  Adjectives,  and 
when  meaning  rather ,  it  is  magis.  (26) 

57.  Extension  of  time  or  space  is  expressed  by  the 
Accusative.  (27) 

58.  The  Ablative  denotes  the  time  at  which  or  witlun 
which  anything  is  completed.  (28) 

59.  Definite  price  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative.  (29) 

60.  Tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris  (but  on  the  Other 

hand,  magno,  parvo,  plurimo,  &c.)  are  used  after  Verbs 
of  selling  and  buying .  (29) 

61.  Tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  with  magni,  parvi, 

plurimi  and  minimi,  and  also  nihili,  are  used  after  verbs 
of  estimation ,  and  after  est,  signifying  it  is  worth.  (29) 

62.  Adjectives,  as  well  as  Verbs,  denoting  fulness  and 
emptiness,  are  followed  by  the  Genitive  or  Ablative. 
(30,3  0 

63.  Some  Participles  that  are  used  as  Adjectives  take 
an  Ablative  of  the  quasi-instrument,  e.g.  ‘contentus 
parvo.’  (32) 


b 


« 


xviii  LATIN  PROSE. 

64.  Dignus  and  indignus  take  the  Ablative.  (32) 

65.  Natus,  satus,  and  ortus  take  the  Ablative.  (32) 

66.  An  English  Preposition  between  two  Nouns,  if  it 
denotes  that  the  second  is  the  Object  of  the  first,  is  often 
expressed  by  the  Latin  Genitive,  as  ‘  militiae  vacatio/ 
‘  exemption  from  service.’  (33) 

67.  Present  Participles  used  as  quasi-Nouns,  and  some 
Adjectives  in  -ax,  take  the  Genitive,  eg.  ‘  patiens  laboris,’ 
‘  capax  imperii.’  (34) 

68.  An  English  Preposition  denoting  that  a  Noun  is 
the  Object  of  an  Adjective  is  often  rendered  by  the  Geni¬ 
tive,  as  ‘perfidiae  imperitus.’  (35) 

69.  Verbs  of  condemning,  as  well  as  of  accusing  and 
acquitting ,  take  the  Genitive  of  the  charge.  (36) 

70.  Of  preceding  a  Noun  denoting  a  quality  is  rendered 
by  combining  an  Adjective  and  Noun  in  the  Genitive  or 
Ablative.  (37) 

71.  It  is  the  mark  of  characteristic  of  like ,  &c.  are 
often  expressed  by  the  Genitive.  (38) 

72.  English  Prepositions  denoting  rest  must  often  be 
rendered  by  Latjn  Prepositions  denoting  motion ,  e.g.  ‘  on 
our  journey,’  ‘  ex  itinere.’  (39) 

73.  Do  not  translate  redundant  of  e.g.  ‘the  City  of 
London.’  (40) 

74.  (9/is  often  rendered  in  Latin  by  combining  an  Ad¬ 
jective  or  Participle  with  a  Noun,  e.g.  ‘summus  mons/ 

‘  the  top  of  the  mountain.’  (40) 

The  English  Prepositions  in  Alphabetical  order  are 
arranged ,  with  their  Latin  equivalents ,  on  pages  31 — 57. 

•  (40 


INDEX  OF  RULES. 


xix 


75.  By,  denoting  agency,  requires  a  or  ab  before  the 
Ablative.  Page  57. 

76.  In  when  expressing  direction  literally  or  metaphori¬ 
cally,  is  followed  by  the  Accusative.  Page  44. 

77.  Cum  is  an  enclitic  after  me,  te,  nobis,  vobis,  quo, 
quibus.  Page  56. 

78.  The  measure  of  excess  or  defect  is  expressed  by  the 
Ablative,  eg.  ‘  quinque  pedibus  major.’  (42) 

Idioms  involving  Conjunctions  and  the  Relative  Pro * 
noun,  are  arranged  in  Paragraphs  43  to  72.  • 

79.  Thomas,  John,  and  Henry  =  Thomas,  Johannes, 
Henricus  ;  or  Thomas  et  Johannes  et  Henncus.  (44) 

80.  Autem,  enim,  que,  quidem,  ve  and  vero,  and 
generally  igitur,  cannot  stand  first  in  a  sentence.  (44  a) 

81.  Sed  corrects  or  denies :  autem  (Se)  introduces  some¬ 
thing  not  inconsistent  with  what  has  gone  before  :  at 
introduces  a  clause  abruptly.  (44  a) 

82.  ‘  And  not,’  ‘  and  no  one,’  ‘  and  never,’  ‘if  .  .  .  not/ 
are  neque,  nec  quisquam,  neque  unquam,  nisi.  (45) 

83.  I  say  it  is  not  true  =  Nego  haec  vera  esse.  (45) 

84.  Do  not  say  ‘ne  quidem  Balbus/  but  ‘ne  Balbus 
quidem.’  (45) 

85.  ‘And  he/  ‘  now  this,’  &c. must  often  be  rendered  by 
qui,  quod,  &c.  eg.  ‘  now  when  he  heard  this]  ‘  quae  quum 
audivisset.’  (46) 

86.  ‘He  also  said’  —  ‘idem  dixit.’  (46) 

87.  He  burned  and  left  the  bridge  =  Pontem  incensum 
deseruit."  (47) 


LATIN  PROSE. 


xx 


88.  That  introducing  an  Objective  or  Subjective  clause 
is  generally  to  be  rendered  by  the  Infinitive.  (48) 

89.  Avoid  the  ambiguity  arising  from  the  Double  Accu¬ 
sative  before  and  after  an  Infinitive,  eg.  4  Aio  te  ./Eacida, 
Romanos  vincere  posse/  (48) 

90.  It  seems  that  \  ,  •  i  . 

There  is  no  doubt  that  ( 

j  Videtur  honestus  esse. 

I  Haud  dubium  est  quin  honestus  sit.  (49) 

91.  Xhere  is  no  doubt  that  he  will  be  caught  —  Haud 
dubium  est  quin  futurum  sit  ut  capiatur.  (49) 

92.  I  fear  that  he  will  come  =  Vereor  (timeo  &c.)  ne 
veniat.  I  fear  that  he  will  not  come  =  Vereor  ut  veniat. 
(49) 

93.  I  heard  her  sing  =  audivi  illam  canentem.  (50) 

94.  Whether ,  introducing  a  Subjective  or  Objective 
clause,  is  num  or  ‘utrum  ....  an’:  introducing  a  con¬ 
dition,  it  is  sive.  (51) 

95.  Where  the  Relative  introduces  a  thought ,  and  not  a 
mere  fact ,  it  is  followed  by  the  Latin  Subjunctive.  (52) 

96.  The  Subjunctive  generally  follows ‘sunt  qui/  ‘erant 
qui/  i.e.  ‘there  are,  were,  some  {such)  that l  (52) 

97.  Qui  takes  the  Subjunctive  when  introducing  a  state¬ 
ment  made  by  some  one  distinct  from  the  writer.  (52) 

98.  What  in  Dependent  Interrogatives  must  be  rendered 
by  quid  and  followed  by  the  Subjunctive.  (53) 

99.  When  the  qualifying  an  Antecedent  implies  great 
or  many ,  quantus  or  quot  should  be  used  instead  of  the 
Relative,  eg.  4 1  perceived  the  kindness  with  which,  &c. 
‘intellexi  quanta  benevolentia  me  exciperet/  (53) 


INDEX  OF  RULES. 


XXI 


100.  *  The  most  beautiful  that /  ‘  all  that]  1  the  men  thai] 
must  not  be  translated  literally  in  Latin.  (54) 

100a.  The  Relative  in  Latin  often  precedes  its  Ante¬ 
cedent. 

101.  There  was  no  one  that  (h^dM  not  punish]  =  Nem0 
erat  j  ^ 

(  quem  non  puniret.  (55) 

102.  There  was  not  one  hut  hated  him  =  Nemo  era! 
quin  illum  odisset.  (55) 

103.  The  English  Antecedent,  when  in  apposition  to  a 
preceding  sentence,  is  attracted  into  the  Relative  clause 
in  Latin,  eg.  ‘he  lightened  the  taxes,  an  act  that  endeared 
him  to  the  people/  ‘  quo  beneficio  gratus  in  vulgus  factus 
est/  (56) 

104.  Not  a  day  passes  that  he  does  not  come  =  Dies 
fere  nullus  quin  homo  ventitet.  (57) 

105.  Beware  of  the  English  omitted  Relative  with  Par¬ 
ticiples,  eg.  ‘those  remaining  here/  ‘qui  hic  manent. 
(58) 

106.  Who  would  believe  such  a  man  as,  or,  a  man  like , 
Catiline  ?  =  Quis  Catilinae,  homini  impurissimo,  credat  ? 
(60) 

107.  When  two  words  are  connected  in  the  way  of  com¬ 
parison  by  quam,  and  when  the  Verb  is  the  same  for  each 
member  of  the  sentence  of  Comparison,  the  two  words 
stand  in  the  same  case,  eg.  ‘  Tullius  melior  est  quam 
Balbus/  (61) 

108.  Quam  cannot  be  replaced  by  the  Ablative  of  the 
second  member  of  the  comparison  unless  the  first  member 
of  the  comparison  is  in  the  Nominative  or  Accusative,  eg. 

‘  donum  dedit  specie  majus  quam  re/  not  ‘  majus  re/  (62) 

109.  Take  care  not  to  use  the  Ablative  instead  of  quam, 
where  the  Adjective  does  not  qualify  either  member  of 
the  Comparison,  e.g.  ‘  he  has  a  taller  horse  than  I  ’  is  not 


XXIV 


LA  TIN  PROSE. 


134..  In  Oratio  Recta  leave  the  introductory  sentence 
unfinished,  and  place  inquit  (not  dixit  or  respondit)  after 
the  first  emphatic  word  of  the  speech.  (78) 

135.  In  passing  from  Oratio  Recta  to  Oratio  Obliqua, 
(1)  principal  Verbs  fall  into  the  Infinitive  Mood  and  their 
Subjectu  into  the  Accusative  ;  (2)  the  Tenses  of  the  In¬ 
dicative  are  preserved  in  the  Infinitive;  (3)  where  the 
Future  Infinitive  does  not  exist,  the  form  fore  ut  is  used  ; 

(4)  the  Subjunctive  in  the  Apodosis*  of  a  Conditional 
sentence  is  rendered  by  the  Future  Participle  with  esse 
or  fuisse.  (78  a) 

136.  In  passing  from  Oratio  Recta  to  Oratio  Obliqua 

(5)  Indicatives  following  si,  qui  and  Conjunctions  derived 

from  qui,  are  changed  into  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Sub¬ 
junctives  ;  (6)  Imperatives  become  Imperfect  Subjunctives  ; 
(7)  Questions  in  the  Second  Person  are  rendered  by  the 
Imperfect  Subjunctive ;  (8)  Questions  in  the  First  or  Third 
Person,  by  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive  ;  (9)  me  will  be¬ 
come  se,  Me  will  become  illic,  &c.  (78  b — e) 

137.  To  diminish  the  ambiguity  arising  from  the  use  of 
he  in  English  Oratio  Obliqua,  use  ipse  in  Latin  to  shew 
the  reference  of  se.  (78  f) 

■  138.  In  Oratio  Obliqua  the  introductory  sentence  is 

often  completed.  (78^) 

* 

139.  Metaphors  cannot  be  literally  translated  from 
English  into  Latin.  (79) 

140.  Hyperbole  cannot  always  be  literally  translated, 
e.%.  I  prefer  a  thousand  deaths  =  malo  sexcenties  mori, 
(80) 


•For  the  meaning  of  this  word, -see  page  83. 


LATIN  PROSE 

THROUGH  ENGLISH  IDIOM. 


RULES  AND  REASONS. 

& 

1.  Irregularities.  When  we  find  an  irregularity  in 
Latin  or  in  any  other  language — ‘at  Corinth/  ‘  Corinthi’ 
— we  ought  to  feel  sure  that  there  is  some  reason  for  it. 
Sometimes  we  can  find  a  reason.  For  example,  why  is 
‘at  Carthage’  ‘Carthagini,’*  apparently,  dative;  and  ‘at 
Corinth  ’  ‘  Corinthi,’  genitive  ?  The  explanation  is  said 
to  be  that  the  -i  in  Corinthi,  Carthagini,  Romai  (-se), 
domi  is  an  old  locative  case. 

Sometimes  we  cannot  find  a  reason.  For  example,  why 
do  the  Latins  say  ‘  Nemini  faveo/  but  dislike  to  say  ‘  Ne¬ 
minis  misereor/  preferring  ‘nullius  misereor’?  No  ex¬ 
planation,  that  I  know  of,  has  been  given  of  this.  But, 
whether  we  can  find  out  a  reason  or  not,  we  must  always 
near  in  mind  that : 

Rule — There  is  a  reason  for  every  irregu¬ 
larity. 

2.  Latin-derived  words.  In  almost  all  cases  English 
words  derived  from  Latin  do  not  now  mean  the 

*  The  form  in  -e  is  also  found.  It  has  been  suggested  that  the-i  is  used 
in  familiar  names,  e.g.  Carthagini,  but  -e  in  others,  e.g.  Prseneste. 

B 


2 


ABSTRA  CT  NO  UNS. 


[Par.  3. 


same  as  the  Latin  cognates,  e.g.  oppress  must  not  be  ren¬ 
dered  by  opprimo,  which  means  I  crush  or  surprise. 

Rule — Do  not*  translate  English  words  of 
Latin  derivation  by  Latin  cognates. 

Examples  :  secure ,  honest ,  office ,  occupy ,  obtain ,  observe , 
censure ,  person,  station,  family,  inspiration,  succeed, 
conspire,  cease,  probable ,  expect. 

3.  Complex  thoughts.  It  is  natural  that  the  language 
of  a  modern  civilized  nation  should  contain  many  more 
words  expressing  complex  thoughts,  than  are  found  in 
the  language  of  an  ancient  nation.  Periphrases  must  be 
used  to  express  such  modern  words  in  the  ancient 
language,  e.g.  res  noves  for  a  revolution,  res  adversae  for 
adversity.  Some  metaphors,  e.g.  striking  in  ‘  a  striking 
thought/  cannot  be  literally  translated  into  Latin.  See 
Paragraph  79. 

3a.  Abstract  Nouns  may  be  rendered,  (1)  by  peri¬ 
phrases,  e.g.  theory ,  praecepta  artis,  quod  in  praeceptis 
positum  est,  (2)  by  Verbs,  eg.  ‘  In  pursuit  of  some 
cherished  object,  they  will  undergo  any  hardship,  and 
submit  to  any  degradation /  1  quidvis  perpetiuntur,  cuivis 
deserviunt,  dum  quod  velint  consequantur.’  See  Par.  40. 

Rule — Many  English  words  represent 
complex  thoughts  for  which  there  are  no 
single  words  in  Latin. 

<4.  The  emphatic  subject.  In  English,  if  we  wish  to 
emphasize  the  Subject,  e.g.  John  in  ‘ John  built  this  house/ 
we  have  to  use  redundant  it,  1  It  was  John  that ,’  &c.,  or 
the  Passive  ‘  The  house  was  built  by /  &c.  In  Latin  the 
Subject  can  be  emphasized  by  the  order  of  the  words, 
and  therefore  need  not  be  emphasized  by  construction . 
Hence  : — 

Rule — The  English  Passive  should  often 
be  rendered  by  the  Latin  Active.  Thus 

*  That  is,  do  not  without  verification  or  care. 


Par.  6.] 


THE  ENGLISH  PASSIVE. 


3 


The  soldiers  WERE  SEIZED  Milites  cepit  pavor 

with  a  panic 

5.  The  redundant  ‘it.’  To  avoid  an  unemphatic  ter¬ 
mination,  e.g.  4  That  the  man  committed  suicide  is  said / 
(and  perhaps  to  indicate  the  construction  early  in  the 
sentence)  the  English  insert  a  redundant  it.  The  Latins 
never  use  this  redundancy. 

It  is  said  that  the  man  com -  Ferunt  hominem  j  m0rtem 

mitted  suicide  Homo  fertur  j 

sibi  conscivisse 

‘That*  is  often  used  for  a  previous  Substantive  to 
avoid  repeating  it  before  a  Preposition,  generally  4  of*  e.g. 

4 1  would  rather  abide  by  my  judgment  than  by  that  of 
all  the  rest/  It  is  omitted  in  Latin.  4  Meo  judicio  stare 
malo  quam  (  )  omnium  reliquorum/  Sometimes  the 

Substantive  is  repeated,  4  quam  judicio/  But  never  use 
is  or  ille  to  rep7'esent  the  English  1  that  *  in  4  that  of* 

Rule — Do  not  translate  the  redundant  4  it/ 
nor  4  that  ’  in  4  that  of/ 

Sentences  stating  a  duty  or  necessity,  e.g.  4  it  is  the 
duty  of  Balbus  to  avoid  this,’  are  often  turned  in  Latin  as 
follbws  :  ‘The  avoiding  of  this  is  for  Balbus,’  ‘Balbo  hoc 
vitandum  est/  From  Intransitive  verbs  the  Neuter  of 
the  Gerundive  is  used  impersonally,  e.g.  ‘all  must  die/ 
( omnibus  est  moriendum/  i.e.  4  there  is  to  be  dying  for  all/ 

Rule — 4  It  is  the  duty/  4  must/  &c.,  are 
often  rendered  by  the  Neuter  of  the  Latin 
Gerundive  with  the  Dative  of  the  person 
referred  to.  So  4  I  have  ’  =  4  est  mihi.’ 

6.  The  English  Passive.  If  an  Active  Verb  in  English 
takes  a  Preposition  between  itself  and  its  Objects,  e.g.  4 1 
trust  to  you,’  we  rarely  venture  to  say  in  the  Passive  ‘you 
are  trusted  to/  If  the  Preposition  is  to  be  kept,  we  must 

B  2 


4 


PRONOUNS . 


[Par.  7. 


say  ‘  trust  is  given  to  you.’  So,  in  Latin,  where  Verbs 
in  the  Active  take  the  Dative  of  the  Object,  you  must 
not  place  that  Object  as  the  Subject  of  the  Passive  Verb, 
but  must  retain  the  Dative  and  use  the  Verb  impersonally , 
e.g.'  ‘  Tibi  creditur/  ‘  there  is  trust  given  to  you.’ 

N.B. — Such  verbs  are  very  few,  but  some  of  them  are 
very  common  :  persuadeo,  noceo,  credo,  placeo,  ignosco, 
faveo. 

Rule — Latin  Verbs  taking  the  Dative  must 
be  used  impersonally  in  the  Passive,  retaining 
the  Dative. 


7.  Pronouns.  The  English  anyone  is  ambiguous. 
Distinguish  between  (1)  quisquam*  or  ullus,  (2)  quilibet 
or  quivis  (which  means  anyone  yon  like ),  and  (3)  aliquis 
( someone ,  any  particular  per  so  ii). 

Anyone  can  boast  that  he  is  Cuilibet  promptum  est  glo- 
more  learned  than  ANY  riari  se  doctiorem  esse 

of  his  own  pufils  quam  quemquam  suo¬ 

rum  discipulorum 

Rule — *  Quisquam  *  and  1  ullus  ’  are  used 
in  negative  and  comparative  sentences,  and 
in  interrogative  sentences  expecting  ‘  no.' 

Tliis  is  sometimes  expressed  thus :  where  all  are  excluded  use  ullus  or 
quisquam,  where  all  are  included  use  quivis  or  quilibet. 


The  beginner  must  also  distinguish  between  (1)  alter  the 
other  (of  two),  and  alius  another;  (2)  uter  ?  which  (of  two)  ? 
and  quis  or  qui  ?  which  ?  And  (3)  between  uterque 
each  of  two,  and  quisque  each. 


*  It  ought  to  be  unnecessary  to  warn  the  pupil  against  confounding  quis¬ 
quam  with  quisque  each ,  and  quisquis  whoever.  But  it  imy  be  use¬ 
ful  to  remind  him  of  the  position  of  quisque  immediately  after  SUUS,  the 
Verb  being  in  the  Plural,  in  such  sentences  as  ‘thev  returned  to  their 
several  tents,’  ‘Ad  suum  quisque  tabernaculum  rediere.’ 


Par.  9.] 


PRONOUNS. 


5 


8.  One  in  the  sense  of  people,  we ,  a  man ,  as  in  1  One  sees 
every  day/  &c.,  must  be  translated  by  nos,  omnes,  &c, 
or  by  the  Impersonal  Passive,  eg.  ‘  One  ought  not  to 
fear/  ‘non  est  timendum.’  After  if  use  the  Second 
Person  (not  inserting  tu)  or  qnis,  e.g.  ‘  If  one  does  one’s 
best/  ‘  Si  agis  or  qnis  agit,  pro  viribus/ 

‘  One  .  .  .  another  ’  is  ‘  alius  .  .  .  alius  ’ ;  ‘  the  one  .  .  .  the 
other  ’  is  ‘  alter  .  .  .  alter.’ 

One,  unless  used  as  a  numeral  meaning  07ie  a7id 7iot  77107' e 
tha7i  o7ie ,  is  never  to  be  translated  by  unus.  The  neglect 
of  this  rule  is  as  faulty  as  the  French-English  use  of  one  : 
‘  I  have  07ie  book  ’  for  ‘  I  have  a  book.’ 

Rule — Observe  the  different  meanings  of 
*  one.’ 

9.  One,  when  referring  to  a  preceding  Substantive, 
must  be  left  untranslated  in  Latin,  or  must  be  translated 
by  repeating  the  Substantive,  as  in  ‘a  small  house  is  better 
than  a  large  07ie]  ‘quam  magna  (domus).’  Here  the  Ad¬ 
jective  with  its  inflection  renders  the  repetition  of  the  Sub¬ 
stantive  unnecessary. 

Avoid,  wherever  you  can,  the  repetition  of  the  Substan¬ 
tive  represented  by  07ie.  ‘  I  haven’t  a  horse  of  my  own, 

but  my  brother  lends  me  07ie]  ‘  Equum  equidem  non 
habeo  ;  frater  autem  mihi  commodat.’ 

9a.  Pronouns  are  not  so  often  used  in  Latin  as  in  Eng¬ 
lish.  The  Latin  Participle  facilitates  the  omission  of  Pro¬ 
nouns,  eg.  ‘  I  saw  my  brother  yesterday,  and  gave  hwi  a 
book/  ‘  Fratri,  viso  heri,  librum  dedi.’  The  Latins  also 
omit  Pronominal  Adjectives  often  where  the  context  leaves 
little  room  for  ambiguity,  e.g.  my  is  omitted  in  the  last 
example,  and  so,  ‘  Tell  your  brother,’  ‘  Dic  fratri.’  The 
Latin  use  of  inflections  diminishes  the  ambiguity  arising 
from  such  omissions. 

Rule — Avoid  Pronouns,  and  the  repetition 
of  Nouns,  as  far  as  possible,  by  using  the  same 
Subject  or  Object  for  the  different  parts  of 
the  same  sentence.  See  Paragraph  76. 


6 


PRONOUNS. 


[Par.  io. 


lO.  Pronouns,  anomalies  in. 

The  Latins  have  two  words  to  denote  us  and  you  in  the 
Genitive,  one  nostri,  signifying  21s  and  you  collectively, 
the  other  nostrum,  us  and  you  distributively.  Nostri 
appears  to  be  th'  Genitive  of  the  Adjective  noster  used 
Substantively.  Nostri  means  4  of  our  nature/  4  of  our 
interests/  ‘  of  our  condition.’  Nostrum  is  the  true  plural, 
and  means  simply  ‘  of  us/  ‘  of  our  number.’  Thus,  ‘  none 
of  us  ’  is  ‘  nemo  nostrum  ’  (partitive),  but  4  our  mind  is 
the  best  part  of  us,  i.e.  of  our  nature /  is  4  nostri  melior 
pars  animus  est.’  Roughly  speaking,  we  may  say  : 

Rule — ‘  Nostrum,’  ‘  vestrum  ’  are  used  par- 
titively  ;  otherwise  4  nostri,’  4  vestri.’ 

That  this  rule  is  not  strictly  true  is  seen  from  the  fact  that,  when  omnium 
precedes  the  Genitive  of  nos  or  VOS,  it  is  necessary  (not  merely  allowable) 
to  have  nostrum  or  vestrum,  even  used  Possessively.  ‘  Patria  est 
communis  omnium  nostrum*  parens.’  The  reason  is  that  omnium 
brings  into  prominence  the  multitudinous  or  distributive  side  of  nos. 

No  satisfactory  reason  has  been  given,  as  yet,  of : 

Rule — -4  Nullius’  and  ‘nullo’  are  used  in¬ 
stead  of  4  neminis  ’  and  4  nemine.’ 

lOa.  Him.  In  Early  English,  him  often  refers  to  the 
Subject,  eg.  ‘he  gat  him  home.’  This  is  sometimes  am¬ 
biguous,  so  we  now  add  self  (‘same’),  unless  another 
Subject  intervenes  between  ‘  him  ’  and  the  Subject  to  which 
4 him ’  refers ,  e.g.  ‘he  helped  himself j  but  ‘he  said  that 
Balbus  helped  him .’  The  Latins  generally  (but  see  7 8  f.) 
use  se  to  refer  to  the  principal  Subject,  whether  another 
Subject  intervenes  or  not;  ‘Dixit  Balbum  sibi  subvenisse.’ 

Rule — Se  (not  eum  nor  illum)  refers  to  the 
Principal  Subject. 

11.  English  Tenses  are  superior  to  Latin  in  their  variety. 
There  is  nothing  in  Latin  to  distinguish  between  / 
catch  and  I  am  catching ;  between  I  caught ,  I  have  caughtt 

*  Nostrum  cannot  be  Genitive  dependent  on  omnium» 


Par.  ii.] 


TENSES. 


7 


and  I  have  been  catching.  Sometimes  ‘  I  am  catching 
may  be  rendered  ‘  In  eo  sum  ut  capiam ;  or  ‘jam  capio.’ 

‘  I  have  caught  ten  fish  ’  may  be  sometimes  rendered 
‘decem  pisces  captos  habeo;’  ‘  /  have  been  for  two  days 
catching  fish ‘  biduum  jam  pisces  capio.’  On  the  other 
hand,  the  English  Passive  is  ambiguous  : — 

The  catcher  is  CAUGHT  Captus  est  captor 

You  are  LOVED,  I  am  Tu  quidem  amaris,  mihi 
HATED  autem  invidetur 

Rule — The  ambiguous  Eng.  Pres.  Pass, 
form,  eg.  ‘  are  built,’  must  be  rendered,  accor¬ 
ding  to  the  sense,  by  the  Latin  Pres,  or  Perf. 


Note  the  following  differences  of  idiom  : 

While  this  was  going  on,  Dum  haec  geruntur,  hostes 
the  enemy  fled  terga  dederunt 

Rule — The  English  Incomplete  Past  (Im¬ 
perfect)  after  while  is  graphically  rendered  in 
Latin  by  the  Present  after  ‘  dum.’ 


I  did  not  let  him  go  TILL  he 
HAD  PROMISED  to  re¬ 
frain  from  it  for  the 
future 

After  the  fate  of  the  war 
had  been  decided,  he 
used  often  to  live  at  Rome 


Hominem  non  ante  di¬ 
misi  quam  promisit  se 

ab  his  in  posterum  tem¬ 
peraturum  esse 

Postquam  victoria  consti¬ 
tuta  est,  Romae  erat 
frequens 


Rule — The  English  Complete  Past  (Plu¬ 
perfect)  when  following  the  Conjunctions 
‘Till,’  ‘Before,’  and  ‘After,’  is  often  ren¬ 
dered  by  the  Latin  Perfect  (Aorist). 

When  a  long  interval  is  expressed  or  implied,  postquam  is  sometimes 
followed,  by  the  Pluperfect.  If  quum  is  used,  see  Paragraph  66. 


8 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


[Par.  12. 


In  saying  if  or  when  ‘he  conies /  instead  of  ‘ shall  or 
shall  have  come/  we  speak  idiomatically  but  incorrectly. 

The  Latin  is  more  correct  than  the  English  idiom.  //, 
till  recent  times,  was  followed  by  the  Subjunctive  inflection 
in  English,  but  this  has  died  out. 

He  will  do  it  if  he  IS  ABLE  Faciet,  si  poterit 

I  will  set  out  when  day  Quum  illucescet,  (better 
BREAKS  *  illuxerit)  proficiscar 

In  dependent  sentences  there  are  other  important  dif¬ 
ferences  in  the  use  of  Tenses  :  see  Paragraph  64. 

Rule — The  English  Present  Tense  after 
*  When/  ‘  If/  ‘  As  long  as/  ‘  Unless/  is  often 
to  be  rendered  by  the  Latin  Future. 


12.  The  Auxiliary  Verbs  in  English  require  care  in 
rendering  them  into  Latin. 


For  example,  would  is  the  past  of  will  or  wish  :  and  ‘  he 
would  do  it,  in  spite  of  me/  means  ‘he  wished ’  (Indica¬ 
tive).  But  ‘  he  would  do  it,  if  you  asked  him/  means  ‘  he 
would  wish  ’  (Subjunctive).  So  ‘he  could\  may  mean 
‘he  was  able/  or  ‘he  would  be  able/  Note  the  fol¬ 
lowing  : — 


He  MAY  ( possibly )  come 
You  MAY  come  [if  you  like) 
He  might  help  me  if  he 

WOULD 

He  might  have  helped  me , 
but  he  WOULD  not 


Fieri  potest  ut  veniat 

Licet  tibi  venire 

Posset  mihi  subvenire, 
modo  si  vellet 

Potuit,  sed  noluit,  mihi 
subvenire 


He  might  return  at  any 
moment 


Fieri  potest  ut  quamvis 

subito  redeat 


7  WOULD  pardon  you  if  you 
would  help  'yourself 
(which  you  will  not  do)* 


Si  modo  tibi  ipse  subveni¬ 
res, 'ego  tibi  ignoscerem 


•For  rules  about  the  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive,  see  Paragraph  6g. 


Par.  12.  J 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


9 


After  breakfast  he  would 
(USED  TO)  take  a  walk 

(/)  Would  that  you  knew! 

You  SHOULD  not  do  this 

Should  you  do  this  you 
WOULD  commit  a  fault 
{which  I  am  sure  you 
will  not  do)  * 

/  should  {be  inclined  to) 
think ,  say,  Qr*c. 

He  MUST  hear  me  {nothing 
shall  prevent  it) 

He  mu&t  have  seen  me 

/MUST  have  perished,  if  you 
had  not  helped  me 

You  MUST  come  by  way  of 
Ro7ne  {for  there  is  no 
other  way) 

I  MUST  obey  my  father 

I  MUST  confess  I  was  mis¬ 
taken 

You  MUST  know  Pm  at 
Rome 

You  MUST  not  fancy  you 
are  envied 

Let  him  re-  ({i)  I  beg  you 
turn  [(2)  if  he  likes 


Pransus  ambulabat 


Vellem 

U  tinam 


j  scires  ! 


Non  debes  hoc  facere 


Tu,  si  hoc  faceres,  culpam 
admitteres 


Dixerim,  crediderim,  &C. 


Nibil  obstabit  quominus 
(or  efficiam  ut)  me  audiat 

Non  potuit  me  non  videre 

Perieram, f  nisi  tu  mihi  sub¬ 
venisses 

Necesse  est  per  Romani 

venias 

Oportet  me  patri  parere 
Fatendum  est  me  erravisse 

Scito  me  Romae  esse 

Noli  putare  tibi  invideri 

Permitte  homini  redire 
Redeat,  si  velit 


Rule — The  Auxiliary  Verbs  in  English 
being  used  in  the  Subjunctive  as  well  as  in 
the  Indicative  without  change  of  inflection, 

*  For  rules  about  the  Tenses  ot  the-Subjwnciive,  see  Paragraph  69. 
t  Perieram  =  I  had  [assuredly)  died:  periissem  is  more  regulai 
and  common. 


IO 


PROHIBITIONS. 


[Par.  13. 


and  having,  sometimes,  their  original,  as 
well  as  their  auxiliary  force,  are  full  of  am¬ 
biguities. 

/  OUGHT  (OWED)  to  (  HAVE  Debui  )  ' 

/  COULD  (WAS  ABLE  TO)  (  DONE  this  Potui  ( 

Rule — After  ‘  I  ought,’  ‘  I  could,’  we  use 
the  Complete  Present  Infinitive  to  denote 
that  the  action  is  not  fulfilled.  The  Latins 
use  the  Present  Infinitive. 

The  English  do  is  now  used  in  prohibitions*  in  order  to 
surround  the  Negative  as  it  were  and  annex  it  to  the  Verb, 
eg.  1  Do  not  kill  him.’  The  negative  is  here  connected 
with  the  Verb  more  closely  than  in  the  older  English 
*  kill  him  not!  In  expressing  a  prohibition,  the  Latins 
seem  to  have  thought  more  of  politeness  than  of  directness. 
They  did  not  like  to  say  ‘  do  not  kill/  nor  even,  as  a  rule 
‘  you  will  not  kill/  but  ‘take  care  that  >ou  may  be  found 
hereafter  not  to  have  killed/  ‘  Ne  interfeceris/ 

Rule — In  Latin  prose  a  Prohibition  is  ex¬ 
pressed  by  ‘  ne  ’  with  the  Second  Futuredor 
by  ‘  noli  ’  with  the  Infinitive,  or  £  cave  ne  * 
with  the  Present  Subjunctive. 

Ne  with  the  Present  SuDjunctive  is  found  i?i poetry,  to  signify  prohibition. 

13.  The  English  Object  was  once  represented  by  a 
Dative,  as  well  as  an  Accusative,  Inflection.  In  ‘give 
him  the  book/  him  is  the  Old  English  Dative.  It  would 
be  a  mistake  to  say  that  to  is  omitted  before  him.  This 
Inflection  is  now  lost  in  Nouns  ;  but  after  some  Verbs  its 
place  is  still  occasionally  supplied  by  the  Preposition  to, 
e.g.  ‘  I  trust  (to)  the  man/ 

Some  Verbs  and  Adjectives,  though  not  followed  by  Pre¬ 
positions  in  English,  yet  to  a  Latin  ear  indicated  relation 
to,  rather  than  immediate  action  on,  the  Object,  e.g. : 

*  Perhaps  also  to  preface  the  verb  by  an  indication  of  prohibition  or  inter¬ 
rogation.  ‘  Do  not  c  mie  ’  expresses  the  prohibition  earlier  than  ‘  come  not,* 
and  is  less  ambiguous  than  ‘  not  come.' 

■J-  in  Deponents,  use  Perf.  Subj.  *  ne  aspernatus  sis.’ 


Par.  13a.]  THE  OBJECT  OF  A  VERB . 


XI 


/  ENVY  (LOOK  ASKANCE  Invideo  tibi 
ON  )  you 

He  is  LIKE  (UNTO)  his father  Puer  patri  similis  est 

Rule — Verbs  of  trusting,  pleasing,  helping, 
hurting,  yielding  to,  suiting,  resisting,  favour¬ 
ing,  envying,  being  angry  with,  take  the 
Dative. 

Rule — Adjectives  similar  in  meaning  to 
the  above,  and  also  Adjectives  expressing 
likeness  or  unlikeness,  and  proximity,  also 
take  the  Dative. 

Instances  are  given  in  Grammars  and  in  the  examples  at  the  end  of  the 
book.  Some  words  signifying  nearly  the  same  thing  take  different  cases 
owing  to  a  slight  difference  of  original  meaning.  Thus  medeor  meant  1 
am  a  remedy  to,  and  therefore  takes  a  Dative  ;  sano  means  I  make  healthy, 
and  therefore  takes  an  Accusative.  So  noceo  takes  a  Dative,  Isedo  an 
Accusative  ;  impero  I  give  orders  to,  a  Dative,  and  jubeo  I  order ,  an 
Accusative  followed  by  an  Infinitive. 

Rule — Verbs  signifying  4  I  abound  in,’  4 1 
am  in  need  of,’  4  I  cease,  or  retire,  from,’ 
mostly  take  the  Ablative; 

Examples  :  egeo,  careo,  abundo,  vaco,  desisto,  cedo. 

Indigeo  mostly  takes  the  Genitive.  See  Paragraphs  30,31. 

•  y 

13a.  Old  English  Impersonal  and  Reflexive  Verbs. 

Several  English  Verbs  denoting  feelings  that,  in  old 
times,  seemed  to  come  inexplicably  upon  a  man  from 
without,  e.g.  pity,  repent,  were  once  used  impersonally, 
e.g.  ‘  it  pitied  them/  4  it  repented  him.’  In  the  same 
way  : — 

Rule — Several  Latin  Verbs  denoting  feel¬ 
ings  of  the  mind  are  used  impersonally  and 
govern  the  Genitive  of  the  Object  of  the 
feeling,  e.g.  ‘  I  repent  {it  repents  me)  of  my  anger / 
4  Poenitet  me  iracundiae  meae.’  These  verbs 
are  pudet,  poenitet,  piget,  miseret,  taedet. 


12 


THE  OBJECT  OF  A  VERB .  [Par.  14. 

N  ote  the  following  : — 

It  is  my  interest  that  Balbus,  Mea  interest  Balbum,  Tul- 

it  is  the  interest  of  Tul-  lii  interest  te  judicio 
litis  that you,  should  win  vincere 

the  case 

Rule — ‘Mea/  ‘tua,’  *  sua/  ‘nostra/  ‘ves. 
tra/  are  used  in  the  Feminine  Ablative,* 
sometimes  after  ‘  interest/  and  almost  al¬ 
ways  after  ‘  refert/  to  denote  the  person  to 
whom  a  matter  is  of  importance.  ‘  Interest  ’ 
takes  the  Genitive  of  names. 

Some  Verbs  denoting  feelings  were  once  reflexive  in 
English.,  e.g.  ‘  he  bethought  him  oil  So  in  Latin  misereor, 
I  pity  ( me  of)  ;  obliviscor,  I  forget  {me  of)  ;  reminiscor, 
I  bethink,  O.E.  remember  {myself  of),  take  a  Genitive  of 
the  object. 

He  pities  us  Miseretur  nostri 

Recordor,  /  bear  in  mind ,  always,  and  memini  sometimes  (when 
meaning  /  keep  hi  me?rtory  and  not  I  think  of),  takes  the  Accusative. 

Several  other  Transitive  English  Verbs,  I  enjoy  {enjoy 
myself  with),  discharge  {busy  myself  with),  eat  {feed 
7nyself  with),  I  master  {make  myself  powerful  with ).,  are 
represented  in  Latin  by  Deponent  Verbs  governing  the 
Ablative. 

Rule — ‘  Fungor/  *  fruor/  ‘  utor/  ‘  vescor/ 
‘pascor/  ‘  potior/ f  take  the  AblatiVe. 

14.  The  Indirect  Object  in  English  is  preceded,  after 
all  but  a  very  few  Verbs,  by  a  Preposition.  Give,  ask,  tell , 
teach ,  shew,  &c.  are  exceptions,  e.g.  ‘give  (to)  (see  page 

*  ‘The  origin  of  this  singular  construction  is  unknown.  Perhaps  the 
Pronominal  Adjective  has  a  kind  of  Adverbial  signification,  in  my  direction 
{in  relation  to  me).’ — Madvig.  It  has  been  suggested  that  the  original  con¬ 
struction  was  ‘  re(m)fert  Tullii,  mea(m),’  ‘inter  (rem)  Tullii,  mea(mj  est/ 
ftbridg  d  to  the  present  form. 

t  Potior,  like  potens,  sometimes  takes  the  Genitive. 


Par.  15.] 


THE  INDIRECT  OBJECT. 


13 


10)  me  the  book/  In  Latin  (where  the  cases  do  much  of 
the  work  of  the  English  Prepositions)  the  indirect  Object 
is  denoted  by  its  case. 

He  was  keeping  his  father  Patrem  facinus  celabat 
in  ignorance  of  the  deed 

Rule — ‘  Doceo,’  ‘celo,’  ‘rogo,’  ‘interrogo,’ 
and  ‘  oro,’  are  followed  by  the  Accusative 
of  the  person,  as  the  Direct  Object,  and  also 
by  the  Accusative  of  the  thing  taught,  con¬ 
cealed,  &c.  as  the  Indirect  Object. 

N.B.— Neuter  Pronouns  and  Adjectives  approximate  to 
Adverbs,  and  are  therefore  used  more  freely  than  Mascu¬ 
line  Pronouns  and  Adjectives.  Note  : 

I  advise  you  to  do  this  Hoc  te  moneo 

Rule — ‘Moneo,’  ‘admoneo,’  and  ‘hortor,’ 
take  an  Accusative  of  the  Person  and  an 
Accusative  of  the  thing,  if  the  latter  is  a 
Neuter  Pronoun. 


In  Elizabethan  English,  banish  was  used  with  an  Indirect  Object  governed 
by  an  implied  Preposition,  ‘  I  banish  you  (from)  the  realm.’  Much  more 
naturally  could  the  1  atins  use  the  Indirect  Object  in  the  Accusative  afterthe 
expressed  Preposition  in  transtineo,  ‘milites  Rhenum  transduco.’ 


15.  Verbs  implying  motion.  The  case  of  the  Indirect 

Object  in  Latin  will  be  further  considered  under  the 
head  of  Prepositions.  But  a  few  general  rules  may  be 
laid  down  about  Latin  Verbs  containing  Prepositions 
and  conveying  a  notion  of  motion  to ,  or  motion  from. 
Such  Verbs,  eg.  detraho,  can  be  used  metaphorically  or 
literally.  If  we  say  ‘princeps  detrahit  milites’  we  do  not 
mean  that  the  emperor  literally  himself  draws  away  the 
soldiers  ;  but  in  ‘detrahit  anulum’  the  Verb  is  literally 
used.  Literal  motion  must  be  more  emphatically  expressed l 


OBJECT  AFTER  VERBS  OF  MOTION.  [Par.  16. 


14 


Princeps  detraxit 


(  milites  imperatori 
(  anulum  de  digito  suo 


Rule — Verbs  containing  Prepositions,  and 
conveying  a  notion  of  motion  to  or  from, 
take  the  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object  when 
not  literally  used. 


N.B. — If  literally  used,  they  require  the  Preposition  to 
be  repeated  for  emphasis,  as  above,  detraxit  de.* 

Examples  : — Afferre,  admovere,  auferre,  circumdare, 
circumjicere,  detrahere,  deripere,  eripere,  extorquere, 
imponere,  imprimere,  incurrere,  inesse,  inferre,  injicere, 
objicere,  offerre,  opponere,  praeficere,  subjicere,  subjun¬ 
gere,  supponere,  subtrahere. 


Rule — Verbs  signifying  ‘  preferring  ’  and  the 
contrary  take  the  Dative  of  the  Indirect 
Object,  or  repeat  the  Preposition  before  the 
Indirect  Object. 

Examples : — Anteferre,  anteponere,  praeferre,  prae¬ 
ponere,  posthabere,  postponere. 


16.  The  Object  after  Verbs  of  Motion.  The  Object  after 
a  Verb  of  Motion  to  in  English  sometimes  dispenses 
with  a  Preposition.  ‘  He  went  home /  ‘  I’m  going  (Early 
English  on ,  then  a ’  or  a-)  fishing l  Where  the  Prepo¬ 
sition  is  not  quite  dispensed  with,  the  tendency  is  some¬ 
times  seen,  as  in  *  He  rides  a-fieldl  All  Nouns  that  are 
often  repeated  after  the  same  Preposition  in  English  have 
a  tendency  to  become  Adverbs.  Thus  we  say  ‘  a-bed/  but 
not  ‘a-chair’;  ‘a-foot/ but  not  (now)  ‘a-knee* ;  ‘a-sleep/ 
but  not  ‘  a-slumberd  Now  the  Romans  thought  more  of 
towns,  and  less  of  countries,  than  we  do.  Farmers  used 
at  one  time  to  live  in  the  towns  and  go  out  to  their  work. 
So  as  they  were  co7itinually  going  into  and  out  of  thur 

*  The  Dative  in  ‘  Csesari  ad  pedes  se  projecit  *  is  perhaps  partly  Pos¬ 
sessive,  partly  Dative  of  the  Indirect  Object. 


Par.  17.] 


TOWNS  AND  ISLANDS. 


15 


homes ,  their  fields ,  and  their  towns ,  but  not  so  often  into 
ana  out  of  countries ,  they  omitted  Prepositions  before 
towns  but  retained  them  before  countries.  Small  islands 
are  naturally  regarded  as  mere  towns. 

Rule — After  a  verb  of  ‘  motion  to,’  the 
names  of  towns  and  small  islands  are  used 
in  the  Accusative  without  Prepositions,  as 
also  are  4  domum,’  4  humum,’  and  ‘  rus.’ 

Are  you  going  a-field  to -  Visne  rus  hodie  ire? 

day  ? 

Rule — After  a  verb  of  ‘  motion  from,’  the 
names  of  towns  and  small  islands  are  used 
in  the  Ablative  without  Prepositions.  So  are 
*  domo,’  4  rure,’  ‘  humo.’ 

We  shall  set  out  FROM  Carthagine  proficiscemur 
Carthage 

Rule — After  a  verb  of  4  rest  in,’  the  names 
of  towns  and  small  islands,  if  singular,  are 
in  a  locative  case  ending  in  -se  (which  was 
once  -ai)  or  -i ;  if  plural,  in  the  Ablative  : 
Romae,  Corinthi,  Carthagini  (sometimes  written 
Carthagine)  Athenis. 

The  same  rule  holds  for  domi,  ruri,  humi. 

The  fact  that  domi  and  Cerinthi  are  not  real  Genitives,  explains  some 
seeming  anomalies. 

You  may  write  '  domi  nvese,’  which  is  one  notion,  and  ‘  domi  Cice¬ 
ronis  ’  j  but  not  domi  with  an  ordinary  Adjective  ;  ‘  in  an  excellent  home  ’ 

is  1  in  domo  optima.’ 

Urbs  anJ  oppidum,  when  in  apposition  to  names  in  the  locative  case 
of  the  Genitive  form,  are  placed  in  the  Ablative,  and  generally  (not  always) 
preceded  b>  in.  ‘  He  lived  in  the  once  populous  city  of  Antioch.’  ‘An* 

tiochiae,  (in)  celebri  quondam  urbe  vitam  agebat.’ 

17.  ;  Is  ’  used  relatively.  The  word  4  is*  in  English, 
sometimes  means  4  is  relatively.’  The  Latins  distinguish 


i6 


«  the: 


[Par.  1 8. 


between  ‘  is  ’  in  ‘  the  child  is  (in  the  place  of  )  a  conso¬ 
lation  ’  and  ‘  the  child  is  (actually  and  absolutely)  a  boy/ 
In  the  former  case  they  use  a  Dative  (Representative 
Dative  or  Dative  of  Design)  after  est.  ‘  Puer  est  mihi 
solacio,’  £  Do  hoc  tibi  muneri.’* 

The  same  construction  is  found  after  one  or  two  Latin 
words  of  giving  and  esteeming. 

Rule — Sum,  do,  duco  (I  esteem),  tribuo, 
take  a  double  Dative. 

This  Dative,  having  the  force  of  an  Adjective,  must  not  be  coupled  to  any 
Adjective  but  one  of  Quantity.  '  Est  mihi  ma^no  (not  caro)  solacio/ 
Magno  gives  a  Superlative  force  to  the  Quasi-Adjective  solacio. 

ie.  The  Attribute.  The  unfortunate  absence  of  our 
articles  the  and  a  compels  the  Latins  to  resort  to  all  sorts 
of  substitutes  in  the  use  of  Adjectives.  Thus  they  cannot 
translate  ‘ the  foolish f  Tullia’  by  ‘Tullia  stulta/  for  that 
might,  and  indeed  would,  mean  ‘  Tullia  is  foolish/  or 
‘foolish  Tullia’  (where  foolish  would  be  a  kind  of  name 
like  our  ‘  Simple  Susan/  or  like  the  Latin  ‘  Africanus 
Minor/  ‘  Pompeius  Magnus.’)  Consequently  they  have  to 
find  some  equivalent  for  the  defining  Article.  They 
define,  by  mentioning  fii'st  the  individual,  and  secondly 
the  class  with  the  attribute,  ‘  Tullia,  mulier  stultissima.’ 

Rule — The  Adjective  (after  ‘the’)  quali¬ 
fying  the  name  of  an  individual  in  English, 
often  qualifies  the  name  of  the  class  in  Latin. 

The  TIMID  dove  Columba,  animal  timidissi' 

mum 

The  III  BRAVE  officer  Centurio,  vir  fortissimus 

19.  Tbe  English  use  of  two  Adjectives.  In  English 
we  often  use  two  or  more  Adjectives,  unconnected  by 
Conjunctions,  as  epithets  to  a  Noun,  eg.  ‘a  good ,  brave. 

*  Compare  *  I  have  a  king  here  to  my  flatterer.' — Richard  IT. 

t  1  Foolish'  here  sometimes  =  ‘owing  to  her  folly.’  See  p.  165,  IV. 

t  Ill Qi between  the  Adjective  and  the  Noun,  sometimes  =  the. 


Par.  20.] 


the: 


17 


man.’  In  Latin,  owing  partly  to  the  absence  of  Articles, 
and  partly  perhaps  to  the  allowable  omission  of  est,  4  vir 
bonus  fortis’  is  inadmissible.*  It  might  mean  ‘  a  good 
man  is  brave.’  The  Latins  therefore  insert  a  Conjunc¬ 
tion,  ‘vir  bonus  fortisque.’  In  the  same  way  the  Latins 
do  not  insert  ordinary  Adjectives  between  hie,  and  the 
Noun  qualified  by  hie.  If  any  Adjective  is  inserted,  it 
is  generally  tot  or  tantus,  or  some  Adjective  modified 
by  tam.  Perhaps  the  reason  is  that  these  Adjectives, 
being  of  a  demonstrative  nature,  coalesce  more  easily 
with  hie. 

Do  not  desert  me  in  THIS  Nemeinhac  tanta  (ortam 
SAD  calamity  tristi)  calamitate  dese¬ 

rueris 

Rule — Two  or  more  Adjectives,  whether 
pronominal  or  otherwise,  are  not  attached  to 
the  same  Noun  without  ‘  et  ’  or  ‘  que.’ 

N.B. — me  often  comes  between  an  Adjective  and  its 
Noun,  ‘  magnus  ille  vir,’  ‘  vir  ille  sapientissimus.’ 

20.  ‘  The’  defining  a  phrase.  When  a  Noun  is  pre¬ 
ceded  by  ‘  the  ’  or  ‘  a  ’  and  followed  by  a  Prepositional 
phrase,  the  English  must  not  be  rendered  literally  in 
Latin.  ‘Homines  in  navi  clamabant’  could  not  con¬ 
vey  the  meaning  ‘  the  men  in  the  ship  shouted,’  but 
might  mean  ‘  men,  or  the  men,  shouted  in  the  ship:  We 
must  supply  the  Relative.  But  ‘homines  qui  erant  in 
navi’  might  mean  ‘men  that  were  in.’  It  will  therefore 
be  better  to  put  some  Relative  word  first ,  and  to  say  ‘as 
many  men  as  were  in  the  ship  shouted,’  i.e.  ‘  Quot,  or  qui 
erant  in  navi,’  or  ‘  Quidquid  hominum  erat  in  navi.’ 

Very  often  the  ambiguity  can  be  removed  by  the  inser¬ 
tion  of  a  Participle  or  Adjective.  Thus,  ‘praelium  ad 
Cannas  multa  millia  hominum  absumpsit,’  might  mean 
‘  the  battle  destroyed  many  thousands  of  human  beings  in 

*  Where  an  Adjective  and  a  Noun  form  one  notion,  e^.Etavis  Oneraria, 
another  Adjective,  eg.  maxima,  may  be  added. 


c 


i8 


«  the: 


[Par.  21. 


the  neighbourhood  of  Cannae/  but  in  { praelium  ad  Cannas 
commissum ;  the  ‘ad  Cannas*  is  shown  to  be  connected 
with  commissum,  by  coming  between  the  Participle  and 
the  Noun  qualified  by  the  Participle.* 

Another  way  of  removing  the  ambiguity  is  to  change 
the  Prepositional  phrase  into  an  Adjective,  prselium  Can¬ 
nense.  .  - 

Rule — Prepositional  phrases, where  a  Rela¬ 
tive  is  implied,  require  either  the  expression 
of  the  Relative  in  Latin,  or  the  insertion  of 
an  Adjective  or  Participle,  or  else  the  in¬ 
clusion  of  the  Prepositional  phrase  between 
a  Substantive  and  Adjective  ;  e.g.  *  Qui  erant 
in  navi/  ‘  Praelium  Cannense/  ‘  meum  erga  te 
studium/ 

There  is  an  exception  to  this  rule  in  the  case  of  of.  Where  of  is  used  for 
the  Possessive  Inflection ’s,  it  is  rendered  by  the  Latin  Genitive.  See  also 
Paragraph  33  for  other  exceptions. 


21.  other  uses  of  ‘the*  that  require  notice  (73)  are  : — 

I  am  not  Tmz  man  to  do  thus  Non  is  sum  qui  hoc  faciam 
He  was  THE  first  to  rise  I  lie  primus  surrexit 

The  f  sooner ,  THE  better  Quo  citius,  eo  melius 

The ,  when  meaning  the  great ,  requires  care,  e.g.  1 1 
perceived  the  kindness  with  which  I  was  welcomed  by 
Tullius/  If  you  translate  this  ‘  Intellexi  benevolentiam, 
quacum  me  Tullius  excepit/  the  meaning  is,  ‘  I  perceived 
kindness,  with  which/  &c.  But  the  object  of  perceived  is, 
not  really  kindness ,  but  the  whole  of  the  phrase  defined  by 
‘  the /  This  can  only  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  using  a 
dependent  interrogative  form  that  shall  shew  that  the 


*  Such  expressions  as  prselium  ad  Cannas,  epistola  ad  Bal¬ 
bum  (data),  though  they  sometimes  occur,  are  to  be  avoided. 

t  In  Early  English  thi  was  used  as  the  Ablative  of  the  Demonstrative  and 
of  the  Relative,  quo  .  .  .  eo.  See  Shakespearian  Grammar,  Par.  94. 


* A 


Par.  24.] 


19 


object  of  intellexi  is,  not  benevolentiam,  but  ‘  quanta  me 
benevolentia  Tullius  exciperet/  See  Paragraph  53* 


22.  ‘a/  ‘no/  ‘  every.’  A  is  generally  unexpressed: 
but,  if  it  means  ‘  a  certain'  as  in  la  man  once  said  to 
me/  it  is  sometimes  translated  by  quidam. 

Carefully  distinguish  between,  on  the  one  hand,  a  re¬ 
ferring  to  a  class — ‘  a  high  tree,  arbor  (-es)  alta  (-ce), 
is  more  exposed  to  lightning  than  a  low  one  ’ — and,  on 
the  other  hand,  a  when  referring  to  an  individual  of  that 
class  :  ‘  a  tall  tree  (alta  qusedam  arbor)  stood  in  my 
garden.’  Often,  a  approximates  to  a  kind  of,  e.g.  ‘  a 
curious  torpor/  ‘  mira  qusedam  inertia/ 

No  when  applied  to  persons,  e.g.  ‘  ?io  poet/  must  be 
rendered  by  nemo  (ne  homo)  (not  by  nullus),  e.g.  ‘nemo 
poeta/ i.e.  ‘no  man,  provided  that  he  is  a  poet/ 

Every  must  not  be  rendered  by  omnis  (vvhich  generally 
means  all )  but  by  omnes,  or,  with  Superlatives,  by 
quisque.  The  Superlative,  being  regarded  as  a  Noun 
and  emphatic,  comes  first,  ‘  doctissimus  quisque/ 


23.  English  Present  Participles  are  freely  used  as 
Adjectives.  We  speak  of ‘a  degrading ,  humiliating, per¬ 
plexing,  pleasing,  amusing,  annoying  state  of  things/ 
The  preceding  a  or  the  enables  us  thus  easily  to  convert 
Participles  into  Adjectives.  The  Latins,  not  having  the 
Articles,  have  not  the  same  converting  facility. 

Rule — Present  Participles  must  not  be 
used  as  Adjectives  in  Latin  unless  the  use 
is  established  by  authority,  as  ‘  sapiens.’ 

Adjectives  must  be  used  instead,  eg.  turpis  for  de¬ 
grading  :  or  the  sentence  may  be  turned  so  as  to  use  a 
Verb. 


24.  Adverbs  and  Adverbial  phrases  in  English  are 
very  often  compounded  with  Prepositions,  e.g.  a-footi 

C  2 


20 


ADVERBIAL  PHRASES. 


[Par.  25. 


a-main,  at  home,  hi  haste ,  with  anger ,  by  right ,  of  course. 
In  such  phrases,  with  is  the  most  common  Preposition, 
and  it  is  therefore  useful  to  remember  the  following  : — 

Rule — ‘  With’  must  not  be  translated  by 
the  simple  Ablative  unless  it  denotes  in¬ 
strumentality. 

Eg.  ‘  He  struck  me  with  a  stick/  ‘  Baculo  me  percussit : 
but  4  He  answered  with  impetuosity,  ‘vehementer  re¬ 
spondit  ;  ’  or  ‘  Cum  vehementia  respondit/ 

✓ 

N.B. —  If  an  Adjective  comes  between  with  and  its 
Substantive,  eg.  ‘with  great  impetuosity/  the  Ablative 
may  be  used  :  ‘  summa  vehementia/ 

There  are  all  degrees  of  any  quality,  e.g.  celeritas.  The  Abl,  in 
‘celeritate  adiit  ’  is  felt  not  to  define  the  manner:  for  the  question  arises 
'•with  what  speed?’  But  join  SUmma  to  it,  and  we  get  an  Adverbial 
expression  defining  the  manner.  The  English  ‘with  speed,’ means  ‘  with 
(great)  speed.' 

Rule — ‘  In,’  when  used  metaphorically  in 
English,  must  not  be  rendered  by  ‘  in  ’  in 
Latin. 

E.g.  in  time  meaning  at  last ,  is  tandem,  or,  meaning 
punctuality ,  is  tempori  ;  in  haste  is  celeriter,  or  summa 
celeritate  (but  not  celeritate).  In  my  opinion  is  me 

judice. 

In,  meaning  in  the  case  of,  is  sometimes  found  in  Latin  used  metaphori¬ 
cally  :  in  Themistocle,  in  the  rase  of  Themistocles. 

The  following  Ablatives  are  regarded  as  Adverbs  and  do  not  require  Ad¬ 
jectives.  In  due  coni'se ,  recte  atque  ordine  j  methodically,  Via  et 
ratione  j  in  7 oord:  verbo  j  in  appearance,  specie  |  in  reality,  re,  or 
re  ipsa  •  rightly,  jure;  not  unnaturally,  neque  injuria  j  with  force, 
vi  ;  7vith  craft,  dolo.  There  are  other  exceptions  that  should  not  be  used 
by  beginners. 


25.  Adverbs.  The  following  Adverbs  require  care.  Now 
sometimes  means  at  the  present  moment :  in  that  case  it 
is  in  Latin  nunc.  Sometimes  it  means  by  this  time ,  or 
already :  in  that  case  it  is  jam. 


Par.  25.] 


ADVERBS. 


21 


I  have  been  waning  for  Jam  triduum  expecto 
NOW  three  days 

Can  you  see  ?ne  NOW  ?  Num  me  nunc  videre  potes  ? 

Rule — *  Nunc’  applies  to  the  Present  sim¬ 
ply;  ‘jam’  to  the  Present  considered  with 
reference  to  the  Past  or  Future,  i.e.  after  past 
waiting,  by  this  time ,  or,  before  it  was  expected,  al¬ 
ready. 

Only  sometimes  expresses  something  less  than  was  ex¬ 
pected  :  ‘  he  only  spoke  ;  he  did  nothing.’  In  these  cases 
use  tantum.  Where  only  means  by  himself,  by  itself,  use 
solus  (m).*  *'  N  ot  only  ’  is  almost  always  ‘  non  solum,’  or 

‘non  modo.’  In  ‘if  only,’  ‘provided  only]  the  Latins  use 
modo.  Sometimes  only  is  to  be  expressed  by  nihil  aliud 
quam.  ‘  In  his  old  age,  instead  of  riding  he  only  walked,’ 
‘  Senex,  omissa  equitatione,  nihil  aliud  quam  deambu¬ 
labat.’ 

More,  when  used  with  verbs  and  meaning  to  a  greater 
extent,  is  plus  ;  when  used  with  Adjectives,  and  also  when 
meaning  rather ,  it  is  magis. 

I  love  him  MORE  tha7i  his 
brother 

He  is  MORE  dutiful  to  his 
father  than  you  are 

I  hope  more  (rather)  tha7i 
fear 

With  numbers,  use  supra  as  Preposition  or  amplius 
See  Paragraph  41,  ‘  Above.’ 

Note  the  curious  construction  : 

He  was  more  foolhai'dy  Audacior  erat  quam  fortior 
tha7i  bold 

*  In  this  case,  alone  is  preferable  to  only. 

t  Adjectives  ending  in  -eus,  -ius,  and  others  that  do  not  take  the 
Comparative  in  -ior,  take  magis  instead  of  the  termination. 


Amo  ilium  plus  quam  fra¬ 
trem  ejus 

Ille  magis  est  quam  tu  erga 
patrem  pius  f 

Magis  spero  quam  timeo 


22  PREPOSITIONS .  [Par.  26. 

Once  is  (1)  forte,  once  upon  a  time ;  (2)  semel,  once  for 
all j  (3)  quondam  or  olim,  formerly. 

26.  The  Prepositions  in  English  do  the  work,  not  only 
of  the  Latin  Prepositions,  but  also  of  many  of  the  Latin 
cases,  and  (as  will  be  seen  hereafter)  of  many  of  the  Latin 
Conjunctions.  Consequently,  in  translating  them  into 
Latin,  they  require  especial  care.  Distinguish  always  be¬ 
tween  the  original  local  meaning  of  a  Preposition  and  its 
subsequent  metaphorical  meaning.  Thus  of  or  off  origi¬ 
nally  meant  motion  from  :  in  Early  English  we  find  ‘  the 
leaves  fall  of  (of)  the  treed  Later,  the  purely  local  mean¬ 
ing  of  motion  from  was  used  to  express  an  action  that 
proceeded  from  the  agent,  ‘  we  were  received  of  *  (by)  the 
most  pious  Edward.’  Lastly,  coming  to  mean  connection 
of  any  kind,  of  was  used  of  anything,  not  proceeding  from, 
but  belonging  to ,  anyone,  eg.  ‘  the  misfortunes  of  this 
worthy  man.’ 

It  is  evident  that  the  same  notion,  e.g.  agency  or  price , 
may  be  represented  by  a  different  Preposition  according 
as  the  notion  is  regarded.  Thus,  an  action  may  be  re¬ 
garded  as  coming  out  of  the  agent ;  in  that  case  we  may  use 
of  as  in  Elizabethan  English.  But  it  may  also  be  regarded 
as  near,  i.e.  by  (by  originally  meant  near),  the  agent.  So 
price  may  be  represented  by  at,  denoting  neighbourhood 
and  hence  equivalence,  or  for  denoting  (1 )  standing  before , 
or  in  the  place  of,  and  hence  (2)  equivalence  ;  or  in  certain 
context  you  may  say  ‘  I  bought  it  with  my  last  shilling/ 
treating  it  as  an  ordinary  action  performed  with ,  i.e.  near, 
the  instrument. 

The  differences  in  Prepositions  are  so  slight  that  they 
vary  with  the  slightest  variety  of  context  ;  and  some  Pre¬ 
positions  that  were  in  fashion  during  one  period  pass  out 
of  fashion  in  another.  Thus  we  cannot  now  say  as 
Shakespeare  did,  ‘I  live  with  bread/  ‘he^lied  with  tickling/ 
but  with  after  ‘disagree’  is  not  yet  entirely  supplanted 
by  from. 

This  being  the  case,  before  going  through  all  the  idioms 

*  Mdcbeih.  iii.  6.  27. 


Par.  28.] 


EXTENSION. 


23 


connected  with  the  several  Prepositions,  we  should  go  at 
once  to  the  notio7is  represented  by  the  Prepositions,  and 
consider  how  those  notions  ate  to  be  represented.  In  a 
language  like  the  Latin,  abounding  in  cases,  the  Preposi¬ 
tions  have  not  been  so  much  used  as  in  English,  and  have 
consequently  not  so  often  assumed  metaphorical  meanings. 
They  are  mostly  used  locally  ;  the  metaphorical  English 
Prepositions  are  mostly  represented  by  the  Latin  cases. 


27.  Extension.  For  means  sometimes  as  ait  equivalent 
for  (one  thing  standing  in  the  front  of,  i.e.  in  the  stead  of 
another):  e.g.  ‘  Pro  tantis  tuis  meritis,  quid  tibi  dabo?’ 
sometimes  on  account  of  \  ob  or  propter ;  sometimes,  from 
its  meaning  of  equivalence ,  it  is  used  almost  redundantly 
to  mean  as  much  as  before  time  and  space,  e.g.  ‘  he  walked 
for  five  miles,’  ‘  he  waited  for  ten  minutes.’  The  Latins  do 
not  use  (nor  do  the  English  always)  a  redundant  Prepo¬ 
sition  here,  but  put  the  noun  in  the  Accusative  as  a  kind 
of  Object  after  the  Verb,  eg.  ‘Tridui  iter  processimus/ 
‘  Decem  jam  dies  hic  moramur.’  The  for  is  omitted  with 
the  Adjectives  long ,  broad ,  deep,  high ,  ‘  Hasta  sex  pedes 
longa/  ‘  Fossa  decem  pedes  alta.’ 

Rule — Extension  of  time  ana  space  is  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  Accusative. 

I7or,  before  time,  when  followed  by  a  negative — e.g.  (  For  the  last  ten 
years  he  never  came  ’ — is  not  expressed  by  the  Accusative.  The  notion  of 
extension  seemed  to  gie  Latins  lost,  as  there  was  no  action  going  on  during 
the  time ;  and  the  meaning  seemed  to  be  ‘  within  ten  years.’  The  Latins 
therefore  used  (see  28)  the  Ablative:  ‘Decem  annis  Romam  non 
venit.’  Often  bis,  i.e.  ‘  last,'  is  added :  ‘  Nemo  bis  decem  annis  talia 
ausus  est.’ 


28.  Point  of  time.  At ,  in ,  by  (all  denoting  neighbour¬ 
hood)  are  used  in  English  to  denote  the  time  when  a 
thing  is  done.  In  Latin  the  Ablative  (which  expresses  a 
circumstance  *)  is  naturally  used  to  denote  this. 

*  “  The  Ablative  denotes  in  general  that  a  thing  belongs  to  the  predicate 
as  serving  to  complete  and  define  it  more  accurately  (so  that  it  stands  with 
the  thing  predicated  in  the  relation  of  an  appurtenance  or  circumstance').’  — 
Madvig’s  Latin  Grammar. 


24  POINT  OF  TIME ,  PRICE.  [Par.  29. 

‘  Tertio  anno  urbs  capta  est/  ‘  Saturni  stella  triginta 
fere  annis  cursum  suum  conficit.’ 

Rule — The  Ablative  denotes  the  time  at 
which  or  within  which  anything  is  com¬ 
pleted. 

A  t ,  of  place,  must  be  expressed  by  ad  or  in,  not  by  the  Ablative  by 
itself ;  ‘  ad  hunc  locum,’  ‘  hoc  in  loco  ;  ’  not  ‘  hoc  loco.’ 

Hieme  aestate,  die,  nocte,  luce,  are  also  used  for  the  season 
within  which  anything  is  done — *  in  winter,’  ‘  by  day,’  &c. 


29.  Price  is  expressed  in  English  indefinitely  by  at, 
definitely  by  for  or  (rarely)  by  with.  The  English-  at 
(perhaps  representing  contiguity)  is  expressed  by  the  Latin 
Genitive,  perhaps  the  Genitive  of  quality.*  The  Latins 
do  not  use  pro  to  denote  price.  For  and  with  (in¬ 
strumental)  are  represented  by  the  Latin  Ablative  (denot¬ 
ing  a  circumstance,  see  Paragraph  28,  Note).  It  would 
seem  that  price  when  indefinite  (as  it  is  when  you  ask 
how  much  a  man  will  offer)  is  regarded  by  the  Latins  as 
a  quality,  and  expressed  by  the  Genitive  ;  when  aefinite ,  it 
is  regarded  as  an  instrument  and  expressed  by  the 
Ablative.  ‘At  what  price  did  you  buy  the  rice?’  ‘Gh, 
for  a  small  sum.’  ‘  Quanti  oryza  empta  est  ?’  ‘  Parvo.’ 

Rule — The  price  is  expressed  by  the  Ab¬ 
lative. 

Rule — Tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  .  minoris  (but 
magno,  parvo,  plurimo,  &c.)  are  used  after  verbs 

of  selling  and  buying. 

Rule — Magni,  pluris,  plurimi,  parvi,  mi¬ 
noris,  minimi,  tanxi,  quanti,  and  nihili  are  used 
after  verbs  of  estimation ,  and  after  est  signifying  it  is 
worth. 

This  seems  to  be  a  kind  of  Genitive  of  quality.  The  same  construction, 
after  non  sestimo,  facio,  81c.  is  used  with  assis,  flocci,  &c.  ‘Non 
tc  flocci  facio,’  ‘  I  don’t  value  you  at  a  straw.’ 


*  Madvig  says,  “  This  Genitive  is  nearly  allied  to  the  Descriptive  Genitive.” 


Par.  32.] 


FULNESS  AND  WANT. 


25 


30.  Fulness,  in  English,  is  generally  expressed  by  Verbs 
and  Adjectives  followed  by  of  or  with.  Of  denotes  that 
the  fulness  arises  out  of  something;  with ,  that  the  fulness 
is  connected  with  something.  Of  is  represented  by  the 
Latin  Genitive,  which  in  the  best  authors  follows  plenus. 
With  (or  in,  e.g.  *  abounds  in  ’)  is  represented  by  the  Latin 
Ablative,  which  naturally  follows  Verbs,  e.g.  compleo  and 
impleo,  to  express  the  instrument  by  which  the  state  of 
fulness  denoted  by  the  Verb  is  brought  about. 

Rule — Adjectives,  as  well  as  Verbs,  ex¬ 
pressing  fulness  are  followed  by  the  Geni¬ 
tive  or  Ablative. 

See  Paragraph  13. 


31.  Emptiness  is  generally  expressed  in  English  by  of 
or  from,  1  void  of]  ‘free  from I  Of  denotes  motion  of  {off ) 
and  then  connection,  ‘as  regards’;  frotn  denotes  more 
distinctly  motion  from.  Hence,  in  Latin,  the  Genitive  is 
used  where  connection,  motion  in  search  of  need  of  is 
denoted  ;  and  the  Ablative  (which  represents  an  external 
circumstance  *)  is  used  where  niotio?i  or  absence  from  is 
denoted.  Thus  ‘  I  have  need  of  money  ’  is  ‘  Egeo  pe¬ 
cuniae,’  but  ‘  I  am  destitute  of  i.e.  without  money,’  is 
‘  Careo  pecunia.’ 

Rule — ■  Adjectives  and  Verbs  denoting 
emptiness  are  followed  by  the  Genitive  or 
Ablative. 

(1)  Inops,  pauper,  egenus,  indigus,  and  parcus  take  the 
Genitive.  (?)  Inanis,  nudus,  orbus,  vacuus,  liber,  immunis, 

purus  ( clean  from),  extorris  and  alienus  (which  last  is  generally 
followed  by  ab),  take  the  Ablative  ;  so  also  do  the  verbs  spolio,  absti¬ 
neo,  libero,  solvo,  levo,  exonero,  arceo,  probibeo,  take  the 
Ablative  of  the  thing. 


32.  English  Prepositions  following  Adjectives  may 
often  be  rendered  by  the  Latin  Ablative.  The  reason  for 


*  See  Paragraph  28,  Note. 


26  PREPOSITION  BETWEEN  TWO  NOUNS.  [Par.  33. 


this  is,  that  many  Adjectives,  having  the  force  of  Participles 
and  describing  a  state,  naturally  take  the  Ablative  to  denote 
the  instrument  producing  the  state.  Thus  ‘  relying  on 
your  help;  is  ‘fretus  (supported  by)  tuo  auxilio ’  ;  ‘heavy 
with  gold/  ‘  onustus  (laden  with)  auro/  So  with  praedi¬ 
tus  and  contentus.  In  the  following  rule  the  Adjectives 
have  not  the  force  of  Participles  ;  the  Ablative  rather 
expresses  a  circumstance,  ‘  dignus  mercede/  ‘  worthy  m 
point  of  pay/ 

Rule — 4  Dignus  ’  and  *  indignus  ’  take  the 
Ablative. 

Of  in  ‘  born  of  obscure  parents  ’  has  its  radical 
meaning  off  or  fro?n.  It  is  therefore  naturally  repre¬ 
sented  by  the  Ablative  in  Latin. 

Rule — ‘Natus,’  ‘satus,’  ‘ortus,’  ‘genitus,’ 
‘  editus,’  take  the  Ablative. 


33.  A  Preposition  between  two  Nouns  in  English 
often  denotes  that  the  second  is  the  object  of  an 
action  implied  by  the  first,  e.g.  (1)  ‘hunger  for  gold/  (2) 
i experience  in  warfare/  (3)  ‘incitement  to  danger/  (4) 
‘rules  about  life/  (5)  ‘exemption  from  warfare/  In  a 
great  number  of  these  cases,  the  English  Preposition 
might  be  replaced  by  as  regards.  Now  this  as  regards  is 
one  of  the  radical  meanings  not  only  of  the  English  of 
but  also  of  the  Latin  Genitive.  Consequently  this  Ob¬ 
jective  relation,  as  regards ,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the 
Genitive,  eg.  (1)  ‘  Auri  fames/  (2)  ‘  Rei  militaris  peritia/ 
(3)  ‘  Periculi  incitamentum/  (4)  ‘  Vitse  praecepta/  (5)  ‘  Mi¬ 
litiae  vacatio/ 

This  is  called  the  Objective  Genitive. 

Rule — A  Preposition  (often  ‘of’  or  ‘for’) 
between  two  Nouns,  if  it  denotes  that  the 


*of;  iin: 


Par.  35.] 


27 


second  is  the  Object  of  the  first,  is  often  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  Latin  Genitive. 


TheGenilive  is  hence  sometimes  ambiguous  :  eg.  *  Injuriae  iduorum’ 
may  mean  ‘injuries  done  by,  or  done  to,  the  iEdui.' 


34.  ‘  Of’  after  a  Participial  Adjective,  formed  from  a 
Transitive  Verb,  is  found,  though  not  often,  in  English,  e.g. 
‘  I  spare  my  purse/  ‘  he  is  spai'ing  of  his  purse.'  The  fact 
is,  sparing  is  here  a  kind  of  noun,  and  the  construction  is 
the  same  as*  in  ‘  he  is  a  niggard  of  his  money.'  This  of 
meaning  as  regards,  is  rendered  in  Latin  by  the  Genitive, 
and  such  Participial  Adjectives  often  occur  in  Latin  where 
there  are  no  corresponding  Participial  Adjectives  in 
English. 

Rule — (1)  Latin  Active  Present  Participles 
from  Transitive  Verbs,  when  used  as  Ad¬ 
jectives,  and  (2)  Adjectives  in  -ax,  from 
Transitive  Verbs,  take  the  Genitive,  e.g.  ‘  La¬ 
borum  patiens.' 

So  amans,  capax,  edax,  tenax,  prudens,  insolens, 
potens, f  impotens. 


35.  ‘Of’  and  ‘in’  after  several  other  Adjectives  in 

English  are  used  in  the  sense  of  ‘as  regards.’  These 
Adjectives  suggest  an  object :  e.g.  ‘he  is  greedy  ’  suggests 
the  question  ‘  he  is  greedy  as  regards  what  ? '  Such  Adjec¬ 
tives  mostly  express  desire ,  experience  or  inexperience , 
knowledge  or  ignorance ,  participation ,  guilt ,  innocence, 


*  Unless  it  is  a  result  of  the  genuine  Old  English  (still  preserved  in 
the  slang  of  London  and  perhaps  of  other  places),  *  he  is  a-sparing  (in  or 
on  sparing)  of  his  purse.’  Compare  ‘the  shepherd  blowing  of  his  nails,' 
3  Henry  VI.  ii.  5.  3. — Shakespearian  Grammar,  Paragraph  178. 

t  Many  Genitives  after  Adjectives  may  be  explained  by  saying  that  the 
Adjective  impliesa  Verb  and  Noun,  which  Noun  naturally  governs  the  Geni¬ 
tive.  Thus  potens  means  having  power  of.  Compare 

‘The  sovereign  power  you  have  of  us.’ — Hamlet,  ii.  2.  27. 

So,  in  Greek,  \vn ne  dfiolpog  kan  means  ovk  e\ei  /ioipav  \vm  ng. 


28 


'OF. ’ 


[Par.  36. 

e.g.  1  inexperienced  in  treachery/  1  greedy  of  praise/ 
These  Prepositions  are  rendered  by  the  Latin  Genitive, 
which  naturally  expresses  the  connection  implied  in  as 
regards. 

Rule — An  English  Preposition  between  an 
Adjective  and  a  Noun,  when  denoting  that 
the  Noun  is  the  object  of  the  Adjective,  is 
often  rendered  by  the  Latin  Genitive,  eg. 
‘Avidus  laudis/  ‘  Perfidiae  imperitus/ 

So,  avarus,  cupidus,  conscius,  inscius,  nescius,  rudis, 
gnarus,  ignarus,  peritus,  memor,  immemor,  particeps, 
expers  (also  Abi.),  reus,  insons. 


36.  ‘  Of >  after  the  Verbs  accuse,  acquit,  but  not  after 

condemn ,  is  used  in  English  in  the  sense  of  as  regards , 
about.  In  Latin  the  Genitive,  which  answers  to  this  use 
of  oj, \  is  more  common.  But  as  these  verbs  are  also  used 
with  the  Instrumental  Ablative  crimine  followed  by  the 
Genitive  of  the  charge,  it  is  possible  that  the  Genitive 
depends  on  crimine  understood. 

Rule — *  Accuso/  ‘  incuso/  ‘  insimulo/  ‘  ar¬ 
guo/  ‘  convinco/  ‘  damno/  ‘  condemno/  *  ab¬ 
solvo/  take  the  Genitive  of  the  charge. 


37.  ‘  Of’  preceding  a  Noun  denoting  quality.  Of 

meaning  out  of  is  naturally  placed  before  the  material 
{out)  of  which  anything  is  made,  and  hence  before 
the  qualities  that  go  to  make  up  anything.  This  use  of 
of  is  rendered,  when  referring  to  literal  construction,  by 
an  Adjective,  e.g.  marmoreus,  or  by  de  or  e,  e.g.  4  factum 
de  or  e  marmore ; *  but,  when  metaphorical,  by  the  Latin 
Genitive  of  Quality,  e.g.  ‘  he  is  a  man  of  honour/  ‘  sum¬ 
mae  est  integritatis/  ‘it  is  a  matter  of  difficulty/  ‘res 
est  multi  laboris/  The  Ablative  (denoting  circum- 


PREPOSITIONS. 


Par.  39.] 


29 


stance)  can  also  be  thus  used  :  ‘vir  est  summa  integri¬ 
tate. J 

N.B. — Do  not  omit  the  Adjective ,  e.g.  write  ‘summre 
(-a)  integritatis  (-e),’  not  ‘  integritatis  (-e)  ’  alone. 

The  reason  for  the  insertion  of  the  Adjective  seems  to  be  this:  ‘puer 
naso,  or  oris  est’  contains  no  definition,  as  all  boys  have  noses  and 
Sices;  but  ‘naso  adunco/  ‘oris  pulcri,’  imply  definition.  The  Adjective, 
though  omitted  in  English,  is  really  implied,  ‘  he  is  a  man  of  {great)  ability.' 

Rule — Of  preceding  a  Noun  of  quality  is 
rendered  in  Latin  by  a  Genitive  or  Ab¬ 
lative. 


38.  Of  ( out  of,  that  which  comes  from ,  and  hence  belongs 
to,  anyone)  is  often  preceded  by  ‘  the  mark ’  to  express  a 
characteristic,  e.g.  ‘  it  is  the  mark  of  a  philosopher  to  be 
cautious.’  Sometimes  we  omit  ‘the  mark;’  we  cannot 
however  venture  to  say  ‘it  is  of  a  philosopher,’  but  we 
sometimes,  especially  after  a  negative,  say  ‘  it  is  not  like  a 
philosopher  to  chatter.’  The  Latins  can  use  the  Genitive 
as  a  Predicate  in  all  such  cases,  and  can  say  ‘  PhilosopM 
cavere  est,  or  non  est  garrire.’ 

Rule — It  is  the  mark  of,  It  is  like ,  are  often  ex¬ 
pressed  by  the  Latin  Genitive. 


39.  Prepositions  implying  rest  or  motion.  When  an 
action  or  state  is  described,  the  English  generally  express 
by  Prepositions  the  place  where  the  action  takes  place. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  Latins  (and  Greeks)  usually 


express  the  place  whence 
whither  it  is  directed. 

This  is  ON  my  side 

ON  the  south-west  and 
?ior th- east 

The  fruit  was  hanging  ON 
the  trees 


the  action  originates,  or 

Hoc  a  me  facit 

Ab  occasu  aestivo,  et  ab 
ortu  hiberno 

Pendebat  ex  arboribus  fruc¬ 
tus 


30  REDUNDANT  1  OF.'  [Par.  40. 


He  came  from  {to)  his  home 
AT  Corinth 

On  our  way  we  broke  down 
the  bridge 

But,  On  our  way  the  enemy 
attacked  us 


Corintho  (-um),  domo  (-um.) 
sua  *  (-m)  venit 

Ex  itinere  pontem  exscidi¬ 
mus 

Hostis  nos  in  itinere  op¬ 
pressit  {rare) 


Rule— English  Prepositions  denoting  rest 
must  often  be  rendered  by  Latin  Preposi¬ 
tions  denoting  motion. 

40.  The  redundant  ‘  of.»  Of  (partitive)  is  naturally 
used  in  such  phrases  as  ‘  ten  (out)  of  twenty  ; '  but  it 
has  come  to  be  loosely  used,  by  false  analogy,  after  all ,  in 
‘  all  of  us  ’  and  after  a  number  that  does  not  represent  a 
part  but  a  whole,  e.g.  1  three  hundred  of  us  came/  The 
Latins  do  not  adopt  this  erroneous  construction,  but  say 
‘nos  omnes,  nos  trecenti  venimus/  A  similar  redundant 
of  is  often  used  between  ‘  town '  or  ‘  city/  and  the  par¬ 
ticular  name  of  the  town  or  city,  e.g.  ‘the  city  0/ London/ 
This  is  not  found  in  Latin  :  ‘  urbs  Londinium/ 


Rule — Do  not  translate  into  Latin  the 
redundant  1  of.' 


Of  is  often  used  after  abstract  Nouns,  and  sometimes  ambiguously,  e.g. 
“the  reminiscences  of  Cl  by  or  about)  Balbus.”  The  Latins  dislike  ambiguity 
and  (3  a)  abstract  Nouns.  Hence : — 


The  top  OF  the  mountain 
The  rest  OF  the  ships 


After 

Before 


r the  foundation  OF 
the  city 

the  capture  OF  the 
■s  soldiers 
the  birth  OF  Tul¬ 
lius 
_  sun-rise 


Summus  mons 
Reliquae  naves 


Post 

Ante 


urbem  conditam 
milites  captos 
Tullium  natum 
solem  ortum 


*  The  anomalous  domum,  -i,  &c.  may  be  qualified  by  a  Genitive  or 
by  a  Possessive  Adjective,  but  by  no  other  Adjective.  See  Par.  16. 


Par.  41.] 


PREPOSITIONS. 


31 


Rule — The  Latins  often  avoid  the  ambi¬ 
guous  Genitive  and  the  use  of  abstract 
Nouns,  by  using  an  Adjective  or  Participle 
instead  of  a  Noun  in  the  Genitive,  followed 
by  another  Noun. 

41.  Dictionary  of  Prepositions.  The  following  Pre¬ 
position-idioms  will  serve  to  illustrate  the  difference 
between  the  .  English  and  Latin  Prepositions.  Preposi¬ 
tions  used  as  Conjunctions,  e  g.  1  before  he  could  arrive/ 
and  followed  by  Verbals,  e.g.  ‘  before  leaving/  are  reserved 
for  Paragraphs  66,  75. 

The  student  will  not  fail  to  notice  the  large  number  of 
compound  Prepositions  having  no  corresponding  Preposi¬ 
tions  in  Latin,  and  therefore  requiring  to  be  rendered  in 
some  other  form. 

About  ( external  neighbourhood ;  d-be-out). 

About  noon,  8  A.M.  <2 r*c.  Circiter  )  meridiem,  se- 

Circa  j  eundam  horam 

About  (towards,  coming  Ad,  better  sub,  noctem 

UP  TO,  GETTING  ON 
FOR)  nightfall 

About  (during,  before  De  nocte  surrexit 

THE  END  OF,  TAKING 
A  PART  OUT  OF)  night 

9 

Above  (radical  meaning,  position  over ,  a-be-ove ,  where 
ove  is  connected  with  over  and  up)  ;  (1)  above ,  with 
notion  of  motion,  super;  (2)  with  notion  of  rest,  supra; 
(3)  above ,  figuratively,  supra. 

This  is  ABOVE  my  strength  Hoc  supra  vires  est 

Above  500  men  were  slain  Super  (or  supra)  quingentos 

(or  Quingenti  amplius) 
occisi  sunt. 

He  is  ABOVE  deceit  Honestior  est  quam  qui 

mentiatur 


3* 


'ACCORDING  TO.' 


[Par.  41. 


According  to. 

According  to  Herodotus , 
the  facts  are  somewhat 
differe7it 

They  will  be  rewarded 
according  TO  their 
deeds 


Herodoto  teste  res  aliter 

se  habet 

Suam  quisque  pro  factis 
mercedem  accipient 


After  (aft-er). 

'When  one  event  comes  immediately  after  another,  it 
may  be  regarded  as  coming  out  of  it.  Indeed  after  is 
derived  from  of  ‘  a  comparative  formed  from  of'  (Morris), 
and  may  therefore  naturally  be  rendered  by  07it  of,  which  is 
an  emphatic  way  of  expressing  of  Hence,  beside  the 
more  usual  post : 


Immediately  AFTER  his  C07i- 
sulship  he  left  Rome 

One  thing  after  (on  the 
heels  of)  another 

He  waited  day  AFTER  day 

After  your  letter  they  read 
mine 

After  (following  on, 

BUT  NOT  IMMEDIATELY) 
this  battle 

The  day  after  the  battle 

After  (next  to)  God, you 
are  my  hope 

After  (coming  close  to) 
the  manner  of  a  battle 

After  the  manner  of 
slaves 


Ex  consulatu  Roma  ex¬ 
cessit 

Aliud  ex  alio  me  turbat 

Diem  ex  die  expectabat 

Sub  ( following  from  below') 
tuas  literas,  statim  reci¬ 
tabant  meas 

Secundum  {rare)  hanc  pug¬ 
nam. 

Postridie  pugnam 

Secundum  Deos,  in  te  spem 
pono 

Ad  similitudinem  pugnas 
milites  sese  exercebant 

Ad  modum  servorum 


Against  (i)  when  preceded  by  a  verb  of  motion  is  often 
rendered  by  Latin, in,  eg.  1  Incitare  in  (2)  when  mean- 


) 


Par.  41.] 


*as  to: 


33 


ing  ‘  in  opposition  to/  by  contra,  ‘  Conjurant  contra  rem- 
publicam  (3)  when  meaning  active  hostility,  by  adversus, 
‘  Adversus  te  contendimus.’ 


Agreeably  to  (i.e.  in  agreement  with). 


Are  you  acting  agreeably 
TO  your  orders  in  loiter¬ 
ing  here  ? 

We  ought  to  live  AGREE¬ 
ABLY  TO  nature 

We  will  speak  AS  AGREE¬ 
ABLY  as  possible  to  the 
truth 


Num  ad  {up  to)  praescrip- 
tum  agis,  hic  tempus 
terens  ? 

Naturae  convenienter  vi¬ 
vendum  est 

Dicemus  quam  maxime  ad 
veritatem  accommodate 


Among  {mixed  with).  (1)  Of  nations  and  large  socie¬ 
ties,  apudj  (2)  meaning  in  the  number  of  in  •,  (3)  meaning 
conspicuous  amid,  inter ;  (4)  meaning  selected  from  among, 
e;  (5)  after  a  verb  of  motion,  literal  or  metaphorical, 
sometimes  in. 


Among  the  Germans 

Pain  is  reckoned  AMONG 
the  most  serious  evils 

A  battle  memorable  AMONG 
the  few  defeats  of  the 
Roman  people 

He  was  the  only  one  AMONG 
seven  that  lived  to  ma7i- 
hood 

I  will  divide  the  booty 
AMONG  my  companions 

Around,  see  Round. 


Apud  Germanos 

Dolor  in  maximis  malis 
ducitur 

Pugna  memorata  inter 
paucas  Romanorum 
clades 

Unus  e  septem  togam 
virilem  sumpsit 

Praedam  in  socios  distri¬ 
buam 


As  for,  as  regards,  as  to,  when  at  the  beginning  of  the 
sentence,  may  be  rendered  by  Quantum  (or  quod)  attinet 
ad  j  when  in  the  middle,  by  de  {concerning). 

D 


34 


'AT.' 


[Par.  41. 


At  (neighbourhood). 

At  the  mercy  of  Balbus 

T he  city  is  at  the  mercy  of  fire 

At  (i.e.  close  to  or  fol¬ 
lowing  on)  this 

I  aim- AT,  laugh- AT,  look- 
AT,  you 


In  mann  or  potestate  Balbi 
Urbs  incendiis  est  obnoxia* 
Sub  or  ad  haec 

Te  peto,  rideo,  specto 


N.B. — Not  ‘miror  te/  unless  you  mean  ‘I  admire 
you/  Better  ‘  admirationem  mihi  moves/  if  you  mean 
‘  I  am  surprised  AT  you/ 


At  the  be-  'l 

ginning  OF  >  the  battle 
At  the  end  of  ) 

He  is  at  the  point  of 
death 


Incipiente  1 

Finem  capi-  >  jam  pugna 
ente  ) 

In  eo  est  ut  moriatur 


Before  (in  the  fore  part)  :  (1)  generally  ante,  after  verbs 
both  of  rest  and  motion  ;  (2)  prse  after  verbs  of  motion, 
immediately  in  front  of,  often  used  in  the  phrase  prse  se  ; 
(3)  pro,  rest  in  front  of;  (4)  ob,  motion  to  meet ,  to  the 
face  of ;  (5)  apud,  more  rarely  c.d,  in  the  presence  of  {a 
body  of  people)  ;  (6)  coram,  in  the  presence  of  (an  indh 
vidual),face  to  face  with. 

When  before  is  applied  metaphorically  to  (7)  time,  ante 
is  used ;  when  to  (8)  preference,  ante,  or  (rarely)  prae. 


He  sent  the  cavalry  BEFORE 
him 

He  held  a  dagger  before 
him 

They  were  on  guard  be¬ 
fore  the  gate 

Death  presents  itself  BE¬ 
FORE  our  eyes 


Equitatum  ante  se  misit 
(but,  prsemisit) 

Pugionem  prse  se  tulit 
Pro  portis  in  statione  erant 
Mors  ob  oculos  versatur 


*  Tacitus,  but  not  Cicero. 


Par.  41.] 


‘ BEYOND :  35 


He  was  brought  to  trial 
BEFORE  the  jury 

He  said  this  BEFORE  the 
king 

Ten  years  BEFORE  the  con¬ 
sulship  of  Balbus 

Balbus  was  BEFORE  all  in 
militaiy  distinction 


Apud  judices  reus  factus  est 

Coram  rege  hsec  dixit 

Decimo  anno  ante  Balbum 
Consulem 

Balbus  ante  alios  in  re 
militari  floruit 


Below 

Beneath. 


j  infra,  literally  and  metaphorically. 


This  is  beneath  me  Hoc  est  infra  me 


Below  is  often  to  be  rendered  by  indignus  est,  or 


turpior  est,  eg. : 

He  is  beneath  your  notice 

Beside. 

This  is  beside  the  mark 
He  is  beside  himself 


Turpior  est  quam  ut  debeas 

illi  irasci  (or  quam  cui) 

* 

Hoc  est  nihil  ad  rem,  or 
proposito  alienum 

Non  est  apud  se 


Besides,  when  meaning  in  addition  to ,  praeter;  but 
‘  Besides  this  there  was  &c/  is  often  rendered  ‘  Hue 

accedebat  ut  esset  8ccl 


Beyond:  (i)  of  space  and  time,  ultra;  with  motion, 
sometimes  praeter ;  (2)  outside,  extra ;  (3)  metaphorically, 
exceeding,  supra. 


The  lake  had  swollen  BE' 
YOND  its  limits 

This  is  beyond  belief 

Beyond  question 


Lacus  praeter  modum  cre¬ 
verat 

Hoc  supra  fidem  est 

Sine  ulla  dubitatione 

D  2 


36 


1  but: 


[Par.  41. 


But  (connected  with  out ;  leaving  out),  praeter.  After 
a  negative,  or  a  question  implying  a  negative,  this  Prepo¬ 
sition  is  sometimes  replaced  by  the  Conjunction  nisi. 


What  else  was  history 
then ,  BUT  mere  annal- 
writing  ? 

He  ALL  BUT  (EVERYTHING 
except)  took  the  city 


Quid  tum  erat  historia  nisi 
{if  it  was  not)  annalium 
confectio  ? 

Urbem  tantum  non  ( just 
so  7nuch  as  not )  cepit 


By  (; neighborhood ,  hence  agency,  cause ,  instrumentality). 


I  have  a  garden  BY  the 
Tiber 

I  was  sitting  BY  Balbus 

We  travelled  BY  SEA,  but 
the  journey  is  mostly 
performed  BY  land 

Whenever  he  was  by  him¬ 
self 

He  did  it  by  himself 

I  shall  return  BY  {my  re¬ 
turn  is  fixed  FOR,  so  as 
to  come  i.ip  to)  the  thir¬ 
teenth  of  April 


Ad  (place)  Tiberim  hortum 
habeo 

Apud  (person)  Balbum 
sedebam 

In  navi  vecti  sumus  ;  iter 
autem  plerique  pedibus 
conficiunt 

Quoties  solus  erat 

Ipse,  nullis  adjuvantibus, 

hoc  fecit 

Ad  Idus  Apriles  redibo 


By  signifying  agency  is  rendered  by  a  or  ab  to  denote 
that  the  action  comes  from  the  agent  ;  signifying  instru- 
mejitality ,  by  the  Ablative,  which  denotes  a  circumstance, 
and  therefore,  among  others,  the  instrument ;  signifying 
a  medium ,  a  remote  instrument,  by  per. 

I  was  informed  BY  letter,  Per  literas,  exploratores, 
BY  spies,  dr^c.  certior  factus  sum 

By  stealth,  craft,  degrees  Furtim,  dolo,  paulatin 


Par.  41.] 


'during: 


37 


If  not  BY  fair  means,  then 
BY  foul 

Ireland  is  less  BY  (instru¬ 
mentality)  a  half  than 
Britain 

Day  by  (following  on) 
day ;  one  by  one 

By  {in  the  presence  of ) 
Heaven  / 

By  ( according  to)  what  you 
say,  there  is  no  hope 

By  way  OF  showing"  his 
gratitude,  he  gave  me 
this  present 


Si  possis  recte  ;  sin  minus, 
quocunque  modo 

Hibernia  dimidio  minor  est 
quam  Britannia 

In  dies ;  singuli 

Proh,  deum  atque  homi¬ 
num  fidem  ! 

Hercle  ! 

y 

Haec  si  \-era  dicis,  spes 

nulla  restat  - 

Hoc  mihi  donum  dedit, 
quippe  grati  in  me 
animi  documentum 


Rule — ‘  By  ’  signifying  agency  must  be 
followed  by  ‘  a  *  or  ‘  ab  ’  with  the  Ablative. 


Concerning,  de,  presents  no  difficulty. 


Considering. 

He  was  well  read,  con¬ 
sidering  his  youth,  or 

'  AS  BOYS  GO 

Considering  (in  propor¬ 
tion  to)  our  numbers, 
our  country  is  small 


Multae  erant,  ut  (dicam)  in 
puero  literae,  or  ut  est 

captus  puerorum 

Fines,  pro  multitudine 
nostra,  angustos  habe¬ 
mus 


During:  (i)  all  through ,  in  the  course  of  per;  (2)  in 
the  midst  of,  inter  j  (3)  in,  in  (rare)  ;  (4)  often  rendered 
by  dum,  or  by  an  Absolute  Ablative. 


3« 


* DURING .  [Par.  41. 


During  three  years ,  he 
used  to  read  DURING  his 
dinner 

During  the  night  he  saw  a 
dragon 

During  the  reign  of  Tul¬ 
lius 

He  used  to  walk  DURING 
his  sleep 

Except  (praeter  with  acc.). 

Where  except  is  followed  by  that,  or  by  a  Preposition,  it 
really  governs  a  phrase  and  is  a  Conjunction,  not  a  Pre¬ 
position.  It  is  then  to  be  rendered  by  (1)  praeterquam, 
or  (after  a  negative  expressed  or  implied  in  a  question 
expecting  a  negative  answer),  by  (2)  nisi. 

I  am  charmed  by  7ny  estate,  Praedia  valde  me  delectant, 
except  THAT  it  is  not  nisi  quod  parum  fertilia 
fertile  enough  sunt 

I  sent  no  letter  EXCEPT  TO  Nullas  literas  praeterquam 
you  ^  or  nisi  ad  te  misi 

With  the  exception  of  Excepto  uno  aut  ad  sum- 
07ie  or  at  ?nost  two  mum  altero 


Per  triennum,  inter  coenam 
legebat 

Secundum  or  per  quietem 
(but  also  in  quiete)  visus 
ei  draco 

Tullio  rege 

Dormiens  ambulabat 


Excluding1,  exclusive  of. 

Exclusive  of  (besides) 

his  perso7ial  p7'operty , 
he  has  large  estates 

Exclusive  of  {not  to  speak 
of)  faults,  he  has  com- 
i7iitted  sha7neful  C7'imes 


Praeter  pecunias,  praedia 
magna  habet 

Flagitia,  nedum  or  ne  di¬ 
cam,  culpas  admisit 


For,  radical  meaning  in  fro7it  of:  hence  (1)  in  place 
{stead)  of;  (2)  in  behalf  of ;  (3)  for  the  sake  ofj  (4)  regard 


Par.  41.J 


*  for: 


39 


being  had  to;  (5)  because  of;  (6)  for  the  purpose  of;  (7) 
with  a  view  to  ;  (8)  as  good  as ;  (9)  as  much  {long)  as  ; 
(10)  for  the  price  ofj  (11)  for  what  concerns ;  (12)  about. 


They  use  shells  FOR  (in¬ 
stead  of)  jnoney 

He  exchanges  honour  FOR 
money 

IVe  must  fight  FOR  (IN  BE¬ 
HALF  OF)  our  country 

I  fear  FOR  you ,  not  FOR 
myself 

For  heaved s  sake,  help 
me  1 

The  battle  was  sanguinary 
FOR  (REGARD  BEING 
HAD  to)  the  number  of 
the  combatants 

I  cannot  speak  FOR  (BE¬ 
CAUSE  OF)  joy 

He  took  a  bribe  FOR  deciding 
a  suit 


Pro  nummo  conchis  utun¬ 
tur 

Argentum  fama  mutat,  i.e. 
‘  buys  with  fa7ne  ’ 

Pro  patria  dimicandum  est 

Tibi  non  mihi  timeo  (rare) 

Per  te  deos  oro  ut  mihi 
subvenias 

Praelium  atrocius  erat  quam 
( cequu7n  erat  exfectare ) 
pro  numero  pugnantium 

Prse  gaudio  nequeo  eloqui. 
(After  a  negative.) 

Ob  rem  judicandam  pecu¬ 
niam  accepit 


Also  in  this  last  sense,  propter  and  de. 


He  had  been  selected  for 
(for  the  purpose  of) 
the  contest,  which  had 
been  fixed  for  (with 
a  view  to,  looking 
forward  TO)  the  fol¬ 
lowing  day 

I  will  set  out  FOR  Athejis 

I  will  wait  FOR  THE  PRE¬ 
SENT,  or,  if  you  wish , 
FOR  A  LONGER  TIME 


In  certamen  electus  erat, 
quod  in  posterum  diem 
constitutum  erat.  (After 
a  Verb  of  motion,  real 
or  metaphorical.) 


Athenas  proficiscar 

In  pra,sens  vel,  si  posces, 
diutius  expectabo 


40 

This  'will  serve  for  (as 
good  as)  an  exaniple 
to  us 

He  waited  at  first  FOR  (AS 
much  as)  ten  days ,  then 
FOR  (LONG  DURATION) 
two  whole  years 

For  how  much  did  yoti 
buy  this  ?  For  a  small 
sum 

For  (for  what  con¬ 
cerns)  my  ft  art,  I  shall 
go  away 

We  are  badly  off  FOR  ftro- 
visions 

As  FOR  (for  what  con¬ 
cerns)  the  ftrisoners ,  T 
know  nothing  about 
them 

For  beauty  she  excels  them 
all 


For  (for  what  con¬ 
cerns)  success  he  is 
too  slothful 

He  is  too  hasty  FOR  (FOR 
what  concerns)  me 

He  was  too  late  FOR  the 
DINNER 

There  is  no  cause  FOR  de¬ 
spair 

He  may  die  FOR  (for 
WHAT  CONCERNS)  7fie 


[Par.  41. 

Hoc  nobis  exemplo  erit, 
(See  Par.  17.) 

Homo  primum  decem  dies, 
postea  per  biennium 
expectabat.  (See  Par. 
27.) 

Quanti  hoc  emisti  ?  Parvo. 
(See  Par.  29.) 

Equidem  abibo 


A  re  frumentaria  laboramus 

Quod  attinet  ad  captivos, 
or,  De  captivis,  nihil 
habeo  compertum 

Mulier,  pulcritudine  (Instr.) 
quidem,  or  quantum  ad 
pulcritudinem  facile  est 
princeps 

Ignavior  est  quam  qui  or 
quam  ut  possit  rem 
bene  gerere 

Vehementior  est  quam  qui 

or  quam  ut  possit  mihi 
placere 

Serius  advenit  quam  ut 
posset  e  convivis  esse 

Non  est  cur  desperes 

Per  me  licet  pereat 


'  for: 


Par.  41.] 


• FOR * 


41 


For  (for  what  con¬ 
cerns)  all  1  know 

For  (as  far  as  regards, 

IN  SPITE  OF)  all  you  say , 
you  will  not  persuade 
me 

I  am  FOR  Tullius 

You  are  no  match  FOR  him 

So  much  FOR  (about)  this 
subject 

For  ....  to.  For  was  once  used  before  to  as  a  sign 
of  the  infinitive,  used  in  the  sense  of  purpose,  e.g.  4  What 
went  ye  out  for  to  see  ?’  Hence  sometimes,  where  for  is 
apparently  a  Preposition  governing  a  Noun,  it  is  really 
connected  with  to ,  and  perhaps  should  be  considered  as 
governing  the  whole  of  the  following  clause,  e.g.  4  The 
wind  sits  id\x*  for  news  to  go,  i.e.  for  the  going  of  news ,  to 
Ireland/  4  ad  perferendum  nuntium.’ 

This  use  of  for  is  especially  common  after  too ,  4  He  is 
too  deceitful  for  me  to  believe  him.’  Here  for  is  not  to 
be  taken  with  me,  but  with  me-to-believe ,  i.e.  4  for  the 
purpose  of  making  me  believe,  he  is  too  deceitful.’  This 
the  Latins  render  thus  :  4  he  is  more  deceitful  than  anyone 
that  I  should  believe  :  ’  4  Hic  est  fallacior  quam  cui  equi¬ 
dem  credam.’  (See  Par.  73.) 

Sometimes  there  is  no  notion  of  purpose,  as  in  4  it  is 
rare  for /  4  it  is  common  for ,’  in  which  cases  the  Latins 
would  generally  turn  the  sentence  by  the  Adverbs 
‘raro/  4ssepe,’  sometimes  by  fit  ut. 

It  is  rare  FOR  him  to  com-  Raro  culpam  admittit,  or 
mit  a  fault  Raro  fit  ut  culpam  ad¬ 

mittat 

After  4  it  is  better/  for  is  rendered  by  the  Infinitive. 


Quod  sciam 

Quodcunque  (or  Quamvis 

multa)  dixeris,  non  mihi 
persuadebis 

Equidem  Tullio  studeo 
Scito  te  esse  illi  imparem 
De  hac  re  hactenus 


*  Rickard,  II,  ii.  2.  123. 


[Par.  41. 


42  *  FOR.  ’ 

It  is  better  FOR  one  man  to  Melius  est  civem  unum 
suffer  than  FOR  a  whole  aliquid  incommodi  ac- 

nation  to  perish  cipere  quam  civitatem 

totam  perire 

For  often  connects  two  nouns  in  the  sense  of  about,  as 
in  ‘  a  signal  for  battle/  ‘  grief  for  his  daughter/  ‘  no  room 
for  friendship/  In  this  sense  it  is  often  expressed  by  the 
Latin  Objective  Genitive.  (See  Par.  33.) 

For  in  the  sense  of  about  often  follows  English  Verbs 
signifying  desire,  e.g.  to  ash,  long,  seek ,  fine,  search,  for. 
These  would  be  rendered  by  single  verbs  in  Latin,  rogo, 
cupio,  qusero,  &C. 


From  ( fro-m ,  where  m  is  a  superlative  suffix  ;  cognate 
with  Eng.  fore)  :  (1)  away  fro7n,  a;  (2)  down  from,  de  ; 
(3)  out  of,  e  j  (4)  after  Verb  of  motion,  often  rendered  by 
Latin  Dative,  the  motion  from  being  expressed  by  the 
Verb  of  motion. 


FROM  his  childhood,  youth , 

& ^c. 

From  the  time  when  I  re¬ 
turned 

From  a  slave,  you  became 
a  freedman 

From  his  name  the  city 
was  called  Rome 

I  am  different  Yie.OM.you 


I  am  different  FROM  what 
I  oiice  was 

He  ca77ie  FROM  Carthage 

He  w)'ested  my  kingdo7n 
FROM  7)ie 


Inde  a  parvo,  ab  adolescen¬ 
tia,  &c. 

Ex  quo  tempore  redii 

•S  _  • 

E  servo  libertus  factus  es 

Ex  or  de  ejus  nomine  urbs 
Roma  est  nominata 

Alius  sum  ac  tu,  i.e.  I  a7n 
differ ent  and  you  ( are 
differeiif) 

Alius  sum  atque  olim  fui 

Carthagine  venit  (Par.  1 6) 

Regnum  mihi  eripuit 


*in: 


Par.  41.] 


43 


From  (like  for)  often  follows  a  Noim  or  Adjective  sig¬ 
nifying  freedom  from.  In  this  sense  from  is  often  rendered 
by  the  Latin  Objective  Genitive,  e.g.  1  rest  from  cares/ 
‘requies  curarum.’  (See  Par.  33.) 


In,  generally  rendered  by  Latin  in.  In  is  omitted  be¬ 
fore  loco,  modo,  sestate,  hieme,  which  are  used  adverbi¬ 
ally.  When  used  metaphorically  to  describe  the  manner 
in  which  a  thing  is  done,  as  ‘  in  haste/  it  must  be  translated 
in  Latin  by  an  Adverb  or  by  cum ;  but  if  the  Noun  is  quali¬ 
fied  by  an  Adjective,  the  Ablative  is  allowed  without  any 
Preposition.  (See  Par.  24.) 


JIN  haste 
I N  great  haste 


Cum  celeritate 
or  celeriter 
Summa  celeritate 


re¬ 

spondit 


So  urbe,  civitate,  tota;  but  in  urbe,  in  civitate. 


Late  in  the  night ;  in  the 
third  watch 

Once  in  ten  days 
In  England ;  in  Herodotus 


Multa  de  nocte  ;  de  tertia 
vigilia  (. Before  the  ex¬ 
piration  of) 

Decimo  quoque  die 

Apud  Anglos  ;  apud  Hero¬ 
dotum 


In  Anglia  would  not  be  used  except  literally,  i.e.  for 
geographical  description. 

In  is  very  rarely  used  in  good  English  for  into ,  though 
it  was  so  used  by  Shakespeare,*  and  it  is  still  good  English 
to  say,  ‘  he  fell  in  love.’  The  Latins  often  use  in  in  this 
sense,  with  a  notion  of  direction.  The  Accusative  which 
means  motion  towards ,  naturally  follows  in  thus  used. 

This  plain  is  ten  miles  IN  Campus  decem  millia 
breadth  passuum  in  latitudinem 

patet  (i.e.  extends  in  the 
direction  of) 


*  Shakespearian  Grammar,  Paragraph  159. 


44  'IN.'  [Par.  41. 

He  spoke  IN  this  way  {to  In  or  ad  hunc  modum  ora- 
this  effect)  tionem  habuit 

He  was  put  in  prison  In  vincula  conjectus  est 

Rule — « In,’  when  expressing  direction, *  is 
followed  by  the  Accusative. 


He  did  it  IN  ( influenced  by) 
anger 

t 

In  my  judgment 

Where  IN  the  world  ? 

In  accordance  with  (i.e. 

IN  A  MANNER  NA¬ 
TURALLY  SPRINGING 
OUT  of)  the  letter ,  cus¬ 
tom,  opinion,  &^c. 

In  accordance  with 

{i.e.  IN  A  MANNER  FOL¬ 
LOWING,  AGREEING 
with)  ?iature,  the  law, 
&^c. 

In  addition  to  money 

In  addition  to  this,  he 
had,  &C. 

In  the  case  OF  Themis¬ 
tocles,  skill  was  almost 
cunning 

In  case  of  his  death,  what 
will  you  do  ? 

In  comparison  with 
Balbus  you  are  {excess') 
happy 


Per  iram,  or  iratus  hoc 

fecit 

Me  judice 

Ubinam  gentium  ? 

Ex  literis,  consuetudine, 
sententia,  &  c.  {More 
rarely  de,  down  from) 


Secundum  naturam,  legem, 
&c. 


Prseter  pecuniam 

Huc  accedebat  ut  haberet, 

&c. 

In  Themistocle  peritia  fere 
versutia  fiebat 

Si  mortuus  erit,  quid  facies? 

Prse  {beyond)  Balbo  beatus 
es 


*  It  is  sometimes  said  that  in  after  a  Verb  of  motion  governs  the  Accusa¬ 
tive  :  but  of  course  this  is  not  strictly  true;  ‘he  was  walking  in  a  room’  is 
in  cubiculo  ambulabat/ 


*  in: 


45 


Par.  41.] 

In  comparison  with  Miseres  ad  (if  you  try  to 
Balbus  you  are  (de-  comeuflto)Balb\im.  (Or, 
fec{)  miserable  conferre,  comparare) 

In  compliance  with,  ex,  secundum ;  or  turn  by  obsequi, 
morem  gerere. 

In  consequence  of  ex,  propter,  or  turn  by  a  Verb  or 
Participle. 


In  consequence  of  this 
defeat  the  consul  re¬ 
treated  to  Mutina 

I  was  going  IN  THE  DIREC¬ 
TION  OF  Arpinum 

l  am  IN  FAVOUR  of  you 

This  is  IN  FAVOUR  OF 
Balbus 

He  wishes  to  abdicate  IN 
FAVOUR  OF  his  son 

In  the  midst  of  the 
enemy 

He  spoke  IN  OPPOSITION 
TO  the  proposal 

This  is  IN  OPPOSITION  TO 
that 

In  POINT  OF  numbers 

In  presence  of 

In  quest  (or  search)  of 
truth  we  ought  to  grudge 
no  labour 

In  RESPECT  OF  natural 
ability  and  education  he 
was  no  way  deficie7it 

In  spite  of  all  the  citizens 
could  do 


Qua  clade  coactus  consul 
Mutinam  se  recepit 

Ibam  Arpinum  versus 

A  te  sto 

Hoc  a,  or  cum  Balbo  facit 

Vult  ita  se  regno  abdicare 
ut  succedat  filius 

Mediis  in  hostibus 
Contra  sententiam  dicebat 
Haec  ab  illis  discrepant 


Veritatem  conquirentes 
dedecet  labori  parcere 

Nihil  illi  neque  a  natura 
neque  a  doctrina  defuit 

Civibus  omnia  ne  qui  equam 
tentantibus 


Numero,  or  quod  attinet 
ad  numerum 

(See  Before .) 


j.Par.  41. 


46  ‘ INSTEAD  OJF: 

In  SPITE  OF  my  interces -  Me  frustra  deprecante 

si  on 

* 

Inside  of,  intra.  (See  Within.) 


Instead  of :  (i)  as  a  substitute  for ,  pro  j  (2)  as  good  as, 
loco  (with  Gen.) ;  (3)  in  vicexn  or  vice  is  used  in  later 
Latin  for  as  a  substitute  for. 


Are  you  ready  to  die  IN¬ 
STEAD  OF  your  frietid  ? 

He  was  as  it  were  INSTEAD 
OF  a  brother  to  me 

Bitumen  was  used  IN¬ 
STEAD  OF  mortar 

Instead  of  love  he  gives 
us  hatred 

Including,  inclusive  of.' 

There  are  in  all  two  hun¬ 
dred  of  US,  INCLUDING 
wome?i  and  children 


Num  pro  amico  vis  mori  ? 

Loco  fratris  erat  mihi 

Bitumen  vice  arenae  inter¬ 
stratum 

Odit,  quum  amare  debeat. 
(Par.  75.) 

Omnino  ducenti  sumus,  si 
mulieres  liberosque  an¬ 
numeraveris 


Like  is  irregularly  used  as  a  Preposition  (in  the  same 
way  as  near)  :  ‘  I  write  like  her.’  See  Conjunctions,  As. 

Near:  (i)  prope  with  Acc.  ;  (2)  close  to,  propter; 
(3)  at,  apud  j  (4)  near ,  off,  of  land  and  naval  battles,  ad ; 
(5)  hard  by,  juxta.  Note  the  expression  ‘prope  absum  ab 
aliquo  loco  ’  for  ‘  I  am  near  a  place.’ 

Of  {akin  to  off,  diro,  ab)  ;  (1)  motion  from;  (2)  out  of; 
(3)  in  consequence  of;  (4)  connection  of  any  kindj  (5)  be¬ 
longing  to  ;  (6)  about. 

h'eland  is  on  the  south-  Hibernia  ab  occasu  aestivo 
west  OF  Scotland  ad  Scotiam  spectat 


Par.  41.] 


He  is  within  a  mile  OF  the 
city 

This  comes  OF  laziness 

He  ccmes  OF  good  parent¬ 
age 

A  cup  of  gold 

A  man  OF  Athens 

The  vigour  of  youth 

A  man  of  ability 

But, 

A  man  OF  great  ability 

Three  hundred  OF  ) 

the  citizens  >  survive 

All  OF  us  ) 

The  city  OF  Rome 

The  battle  OF  Cannce 

The  top  OF  the  tree ,  moun- 
tain ,  &•*€. 

Don't  stir  a  finger’s 
breadth,  no  not  a  hair’s 
breadth  from  this  spot 

After  the  consulship  OF 
Tullius 

He  died  (in  consequence) 

»  OF  hunger 


Ab  urbe  minus  mille  passus 
abest 

Hunc  habet  fructum  ig¬ 
navia 

Parentibus  non  humilibus 
ortus  est 

Poculum  es  auro  factum, 
or  simply  aureum 

Civis  Atheniensis  ( not 

Athenarum) 

Vigor  juvenum  or  juve¬ 
nilis 

Vir  ingeniosus  ( not  in¬ 
genii) 

Vir  summi  ingenii  or  sum¬ 
mo  ingenio 

Trecenti  es  civibus  super¬ 
sunt 

Nos  omnes  supersumus 

Urbs  Roma 

Praelium  ad  Cannas  pug¬ 
natum,  or  Cannense 

Summa  arbor,  summus 
mons,  &C. 

Ne  hinc  transversum  digi¬ 
tum,  ne  latum  quide 
unguem  abscesseris 

Post  consulem  Tullium 

Inedia*  periit 


Compare  for  the  use  of  the  Ablative  : 

‘  Which  is  as  bad  as  die  with  tickling.' 

Much  Ado  about  Nothing,  iiL  r.  So. 


48 


of: 


[Par.  41. 


News  OF  (about)  his  death 
has  arrived 

What  will  become  OF  my 
brother  ? 

What  do  you  think  OF 
this  ? 

Swift  OF  foot  (A-FOOT), 
ready  OF  wit 


Fama  de  illius  morte  huc 
adlata  est 

Ouid  de  fratre  fiet  ? 

/V 

Quid  de  his  putas  ? 


Velox  pedibus,  alacer  ani¬ 
mo 


Of  is  used  partitively  in  English  after  eat ,  taste j  but 
an  Accusative  follows  edere,  gustare. 


Of  in  the  sense  of  about ,  de,  is  common  after  inform , 
know ,  think,  glad ,  despair ,  doubt. 


Off,  motion  from,  de  j  then  of  situation  nautically,  some 
way  from  :  this  the  Latins  render  by  contra,  ad,  propter, 
or  by  the  ob  in  objacet,  the  Verb  being  followed  by  the 
Dative. 

The  battle  took  place  OFF  Pugnatum  est  ad  Actium 
Actium 


On  (connected  with  in):  (1)  rest  or  motion  on,  in,  or 
near  something :  (2)  metaphorically,  on  or  in  a  certain 
time  :  (3)  positioji  above,  super  or*  Participle  ;  (4)  meta¬ 
phorically,  resting  on  as  a  basis,  in  consequence  of,  after : 
(5)  metaphorically,  about,  de ;  (6)  metaphorically,  as  an 
Adverbial  Prefix. 

N.B. — On  after  a  verb  of  motion  is  often  rendered  by 
in  with  Acc.,  and,  after  a  compound  Latin  Verb,  by  a 
Dative.  (See  Par.  1 5.) 

Did  you  not  put  him  ON  the  Nonne  eum  in  equuleum 

rack  ?  imposuisti  ? 

*  E.g.  ‘On  his  shield,'  ‘clypeo  exceptum,  or  supposito. 


Par.  41.] 


‘  ON.* 


49 


On  earth  (as  opposed  to 
heaveii) 

On  the  Appian  road 

He  has  a  wreath  ON  his 
head 

London  is  ON  the  Thames 

On  the  north ,  rear,  &r>c. 

On  our  journey 

We  held  a  conference  ON 
horseback 

l  heard  her  play  ON  (with 
THE  INSTRUMENTALITY 
of)  the  lyre ,  harp,  £Ac. 

I  feed  ON  bread 

On  foot ;  ON  our  knees 

On  the  26th  of  October 

On  the  next,  tenth ,  &°c.  day 

On  (in  the  front  part 
of)  the  platfor?n 

They  carried  him  home  ON 
his  own  shield 

On  condition  that  you  pro¬ 
mise 

On  the  completion,  ) 
termination  of  his  > 
consulship  ) 

On  (about)  this  point  1 
have  nothing  to  say 


Apud  mortales  ;  in  hac  vita. 
(Terra  would  mean  by 

land.) 

In  Appia  via 
Coronam  in  capite  habet 

Londinium  ad  Tamesin  si¬ 
tum  est 

A  Septentrione,  tergo,  &c. 
Ex  itinere.  (Par.  39.) 

Ex  equis  collocuti  sumus 

Audivi  illam  lyra,  cithara, 

&c.  canentem 

Pane  vescor 

Pedibus  j  genibus 

Ante  diem  septimum  Ka- 
lendas  Novembres 

Postero,  decimo,  &C.  die 

Pro  suggestu 

Clypeo  suo  (N.B.  not  ejus, 
as  his  own  is  emphatic) 
eum  exceptum  refere- 
'  bant 

Ita  or  Ea  lege  or  ea  condi¬ 
tione  (rarely  sub  ea)  ut 

promittas  ( also  Ita  or 
Ea  lege  si  promiseris) 

Ex  consulatu 

Consiliatu  peracto 

De  hac  re  nihil  habeo  quod 
dicam 


E 


5° 


*  on: 


[Par.  41. 


On  a  sudden ;  ON  purpose 

He  is  on  the  watch  for  a 
fault 

Evils  come  one  ON  another 

Whenhewas  ON  THE  POINT 
OF  death 

I  am  ON  Ccesads  side 

I  am  ON  neither  SIDE 

This  is  ON  our  SIDE 

On  the  side  of  the  Helvetii 
the  country  is  shut  in  by 
mountains 

On  this  side,  on  that 
side,  of  the  Alps 

He  excuses  himself  O'®.  THE 
PLEA  OF  health 


Subito  $  consulto,  de  in¬ 
dustria 

Expectat  durri  pecces 

Calamitates  alia  ex  alia  in¬ 
sequuntur.  (See  After.) 

Quum  in  eo  erat  ut  more¬ 
retur 

Sentio  cum,  pro  Caesare 

Neutrius  partis  sum 

Hoc  a  nobis  facit 

Ab  Helvetiis  montes  re¬ 
gionem  includunt 

Cis,  ultra  Alpes 

Morbi  causa  sese  excusat 
( I  nstrumen  tali  ty) 


On  account  of,  propter;  ob  ;  after  negative,  prse,  per ; 

ergo  with  a  Genitive  after  its  case,  archaic.  Also  : 

It  is  ON  ACCOUNT  OF  my  Equidem  amicorum  vicem 
friends  that  I  grieve  doleo 


Opposite,  (1)  literally  and  metaphorically,  contra: 
(2)  literally,  ex  adverso,  exadversus,  followed  by  Genitive 
or  Dative  ;  (3)  right  over  against ,  e  regione  followed  by 
Genitive  or  Dative  ;  (4)  nautically  used,  off,  rendered  by 

ob  in  objacet  or  oppositum. 


Out  of,  (1)  after  a  Verb  of  motion,  literally,  ex  ;  (2)  out¬ 
side,  beyond, ,  extra;  (3)  metaphorically  as  a  result  of,  on 
account  of,  propter,  per,  or  the  Ablative  with  Participle. 

Out  OF  shot  Extra  teli  jactum 

He  obeys  the  laws  OUT  OF  Legibus  propter  metum,  or 
fear  metu  coactus  paret 


Par.  41.] 


‘ PREVIOUS  to: 


51 


He  did  it  OUT  OF  fun 

He  is  OUT  OF  his  mind 

It  is  OUT  OF  our  power  to 
acquit  one  who  is  guilty 


Per  jocum  id  fecit 

Minus  est  sui  compos 

Non  est  ea  potestas  nostra 

ut  sontem  absolvamus 


Outside  of,  extra. 


Over  (1),  motion  or  rest  over ,  super;  all  over ,  per; 
(2)  across ,  trans ;  (3)  rest  over,  supra;  (4)  metaphorically, 
more  than ,  super  (but  better  amplius)  ;  (5;  metaphori¬ 
cally,  extending  over,  during ,  per,  or  Accusative  of  dura¬ 
tion  ;  (6)  where  over  denotes  superiority  in  authority,  it  is 
generally  represented  by  some  compound  Verb,  eg.  prae¬ 
sum  containing  prae  and  governing  the  Dative.  Over  ana 
above  is  super  or  praeter. 


We  shall  pass  over  the 
Rhine 

The  plague  lasted  over  a 
period  of  ten  years 

He  was  set  over  the  arnty 

Over  against 


Trans  Rhenum  transjicie- 
mus  (the  Preposition 
may  be  omitted) 

Pestis  decem  (or  per  decern) 
annos  durabat 

Exercitui  praefectus  est 

E  regione  (from  the  direc¬ 
tion)  followed  by  Gen. 
or  Dat. 


Owing  to.  Per,  propter, 

It  was  owing  TO  you  that 
I  did  not  succeed 

Pending. 

Pending  the  decision  of 
the  judge ,  the  plaintiff 
disappeared 


ob. 

Per  te  stetit  quominus  res 
mihi  prospere  succede¬ 
ret 


Ante  quam  judicari  posset, 
petitor  subito  abierat 
(or  re  nondum  judicata) 


Previous  to,  ante,  Prep.,  or  antequam,  priusquam,  Conj. 

See  Before,  and  also  Paragraph  66. 


E  2 


[Par.  41. 


52  .  ‘regarding: 

Regarding  (see  With  regard  to). 
Respecting  (see  With  respect  to). 


Relatively  to. 

Our  loss ,  though  great  ab¬ 
solutely ,  is  yet  very  slight 
RELATIVELY  TO  that  of 
the  enemy 


Cladem  re  ipsa  magnam, 
sed  cum  hostium  clade 
comparatam,  levissi¬ 
mam  accepimus 


Round,  Around,  (i)  circum;  (2)  round  about ,  less 

exactly,  circa.  Sometimes  expressed  by  a  compound,  eg. 

circumdare. 

He  built  a  wall  ROUND  the  Urbi  murum  circumdedit 
city 

We  must  send  ambassadors  Legati  circa  vicinas  gentes 

round  TO  the  tieigh-  mittendi 
bouring  nations 


Since  (1)  with  a  notion  of  consequence,  from ,  ex  j 
(2)  dating  back  from  a  starting  point,  with  notion  of  con¬ 
tinuousness,  a,  inde  a ;  (3)  with  negative  as  in  ‘  never  since] 

post. 


Ever  SINCE  the  beginning 
of  the  building  of  the 
bridge 

Since  his  childhood 

Never  since  the  creation  of 
the  world  » 


Ex  eo  tempore  quo  pons 
institui  coeptus  est.  (Do 
not  omit  eo  tempore  in 

prose.) 

Inde  a  puero 

Nunquam  post  homines 
natos 


Through  (akin  to  trans,  Germ,  durch)  (1)  radical 
meaning,  motion  across  and  out  of  through  the  midst  of 
per;  (2)  applied  to  time,  throughout ,  during ,  per;  (3) 
metaphorically,  indirect  agency ,  per  (see  Owing  to),  but 
also  turned  by  opera,  beneficio. 


Par.  41.] 


*ra’ 


53 


It  was  through  me  that 
you  recovered  Tarentum 

Through  his  wealth  he 
rose  to  be  king 


Mea  opera  Tarentum  re¬ 
cepisti 

Divitiarum  beneficio  rex 
exortus  est 


Till  (O.E.  til  —  to),  ad;  usque  ad.  Often  to  be 
turned  by  a  Conjunction  in  Latin.  (See  66.) 


To,*  (1)  meaning  motion  to  or  into ,  ad,  in;  (2)  exten¬ 
sion  of  space  to,  usque  ad,  tenus  ;  (3)  extension  of  time  to, 
ad,  in ;  (4)  extension  of  number  to,  ad ;  (5)  motion  to, 
hence  object,  purpose,  result ,  in,  ad ;  (6)  motion  to,  and 
hence  comparison  with ,  ad;  (7)  relation  to,  conduct  to, 
erga,  in  ;  (8)  loosely  used  for  as  regards. 


He  will  go  first  TO  Athens , 
then  TO  Italy 

His  kingdom  extends  TO 
Taurus 

They  fought  TO  a  late  hour 
in  the  day 

We  lost  TO  the  number  of 
fifty  men;  the  enemy 
were  killed  TO  a  man 

To  what  end  do  you  say 
this  ? 

This  is  TO  the  purpose 

He  spoke  to  this  effect 

Though  he’s  a  good  fellow , 
he’s  nothing  TO  Balbus 

He  was  dutiful  TO  his 
parents ,  and  strictly  loyal 
to  his  kinsr 


Primum  Athenas  ibit,  tum 
in  Italiam.  (Par.  16.) 

Tauro  tenus  regnat 

In  multum  diei  pugnatum 
est 

Nostrorum  ad  quinqua¬ 
ginta,  hostes  ad  unum 
occisi 

Quem  ad  finem  (or  quor¬ 
sum)  haec  dicis  ? 

Haec  in  rem  sunt 

In  hanc  sententiam  dixit 
(or  In  hunc  modum) 

Homo  est,  ut  bonus,  ita  ni¬ 
hil  ad  Balbum 

Pius  erat  in  parentes,  per¬ 
petua  erga  regem  fide 


*  For  io  before  Verbs  see  Paragraph  73. 


54 


«  touching: 


[Par.  41. 


To  my  mind, you  are  wrong 

To  the  best  of  his  power 

I  would  to  God  I  could 
help  him 


f  Peccas,  me  judice 
<  Peccare  mihi  quidem  vi- 
(  deris 

Pro  virili  parte 

Ita  me  Dii  ament,  ut  velim 

ei  subvenire 


Touching:  (i)  as  to ,  quod  attinet  ad,  quod  ad;  (2) 

concerning,  de. 


Toward  :  (1)  motion  in  the 
the  direction  of  (sometimes 
of  time,  sub  with  Accusative 
erga,  in,  with  Accusative. 

They  charged  TOWARD  the 
hill  which  looks  TO¬ 
WARD  the  north 

Toward  night 

He  feels  toward  him  the 
love  of  a  brother 


direction  of,  adversus ;  (2)  in 
without  motion),  ad,  in;  (3) 
;  (4)  in  relation  to  persons, 

Impetum  adversus  collem 
fecerunt,  qui  in  or  ad 
Septentriones  spectat 

Sub  noctem 

Amore  in  eum  fraterno  est 


Under :  literally  and  metaphorically  sub ;  followed  by 
Ablative,  but  after  Verbs  of  motion,  by  Accusative. 

Some  metaphors,  such  as  1  under  a  pretence/  1  under 
this  head/  are  rendered  in  Latin  literally,  and  not  meta¬ 


phorically,  eg.  per  speciem, 
of  a  pretence/  ‘  in  this  class.’ 

This  is  placed  by  Balbus 
UNDER  the  first  head, ’ 
but  seems  to  me  to  come 
UNDER  the  other 

UNDER  pretence  of  friend¬ 
ship,  and  UNDER  a  show 
of  bringing  about  a 
peace 


‘  in  hoc  genere/  by  means 

Hoc  a  Balbo  quidem  in 
primo  genere  ponitur, 
mihi  autem  in  alterum 
videtur  venire 

Per  simulationem  amicitiae, 
et  per  speciem  pacis 
reconciliandae 


55 


Par.  41.]  ‘  WITH.' 


Under  arms 

Under  appearance  of 
favour 

U NDER  your  guidance 

Under  this  condition  that, 

&^c. 

Under  these  circumstances 


In  armis 

Specie  (adv.)  beneficii 

Te  duce 

Ea  lege  ut,  &c. 

Quae  cum  ita  sint 


Until  (see  Till). 


Unto  (see  To). 


With,  radical  meaning  1  from,  against  ’  (MORRIS)  : 
hence,  from  meaning  ‘  opposite/  it  comes  to  have  the 
meanings  of  (1)  neighbourhood ,  re  la  tio  ns  friend ly  or  hostile, 
cum ;  (2)  in  the  ha?ids  of, \  penes  ;  (3)  circumstance ,  cum 
or  Abl.  with  Adjective  ;  (4)  instrument,  Abl.  ;  (5)  circum¬ 
stance  regarded  as  a  cause ,  ‘  considering ,’  pro ;  (6)  in 

adverbial  phrases  to  signify  manner,  Latin  Adverb. 


V/ith  whom  does  the  de¬ 
cision  rest  f 

He  came  WITH  speed 

With  heaven's  aid 

WITH  your  usual  wisdom , 
you  will  be  on  your  guard 

With  pleasure,  reluctance 

They  fight  with  (among) 
one  another  instead  of 
with  (against,  op¬ 
posite  to)  the  enemy 

Having  the  wind  WITH 
him 

With  all  my  heart 


Penes  quem  est  arbitrium  ? 

Cum  celeritate  venit.  (Or 

summa  celeritate.) 

Diis  juvantibus 

Tu,  pro  tua  prudentia 
cavebis 

Libenter,  invitus 

Inter  sese  pugnant  quum 
debeant  pugnare  cum 
hoste 

Ventum  secundum  nactus 

Ex  animo  (i. e.  from  the 
bottom  of  my  heart) 


[Par.  41 


56 


‘  with: 


It  is  all  over  WITH  us  Actum  est  de  nobis 

What  shall  we  do  WITH  (  Quid  de  hoc  faciemus  ? 
it?  \  Quomodo  hoc  utemur  ? 


The  Verbs  I  am  angry  with,  irascor  (tibi) ;  I  go  on 
with ,  i.e.  continue ,  persequor  ;  I  find  f atilt  with,  repre¬ 
hendo  j  1  agree  with ,  assentior  (tibi),  illustrate  the  fact 
that  with  is  often  a  part  of  a  Compound  Transitive  Verb, 
and  is  not  to  be  rendered  by  a  Latin  Preposition. 


I  am  the  same  *  with  you 

I  fear  it  equally  WITH  you 

He  was  at  Rome  at  the 
same  time  WITH  me 

It  would  be  interesting  t< 
sitions  and  other  Pronouns 
lowing  way : — 


Idem  sum  ac  tu,  i.e.  I  am 
the  same  and  you  are 
(the  same) 

Hoc,  seque  ac  tu,  vereor 

Romae,  eodem  tempore  quo 
ego,  vitam  agebat 

>  discover  why  other  Prepo- 
are  not  combined  in  the  fol- 


Rule — ‘  Cum  *  is  used  as  an  enclitic  in 
‘  mecum,’  ‘  tecum,’  ‘  quocum,’  ‘  nobiscum, * 
*  vobiscum,’  and  ‘  quibuscum.’f 


With  reference  to  ) 

With  REGARD  to  |  De ;  quod  attinet  ad ; 

With  respect  to  J 

sometimes  to  be  expressed  by  emphasis,  with  the  ad¬ 
dition  of  quidem. 


With  reference  to 
Tullius ,  I  have  no 
ground  for  asking  your 
consideration j  for  the 
rest  I  should  like  to  say 
a  word 


Tullium  (quidem)  nihil 

habeo  cur  excuses;  pro 
ceteris  velim  pauca 
dicam 


*  This  is  hardly  English,  but  it  corresponds  to  ‘  different  from. 
t  *  Tenus  ’  in  1  hactenus,’  ‘  quatenus. 


Par.  42.]  PREPOSITIONS  OMITTED .  57 

With,  a  view  to  (ad ;  in ;  causa  with  Gen.  ;  or  turn 
by  eo  consilio  ut). 

They  all  act  WITH  a  VIEW  Omnes  sibi  quisque  con- 
TO  their  own  interests  sulunt 


Within:  (i)  of  time,  space,  intra;  (2)  on  this  side  of 

cis,  citra. 


He  was  WITHIN  a  LITTLE  Minimum  abfuit  quin 

of  death  *  periret 


Without :  (1)  wa7it  or  abse7ice1  sine;  (2)  outside ,  extra; 
(3)  turn  by  Participle,  Conjunction,  or  Adverb. 


He  was  C07idei7med  WITH¬ 
OUT  a  hearing 

1  Stro7ig  without  rage  ’ 

He  acted  WITHOUT  discre- 

ti07l 


Inauditus  damnatus  est 

(  Valet,  neque  tamen  furit 
(Ita  valet  ut  non  furat 

Imprudenter  fecit 


4-2.  Ellipse  of  English  Prepositions.  The  Preposition 
by  is  expressed  in  English  to  denote  the  measure  of  excess 
or  defect,  e.g.  ‘  shorter,  taller  by  five  feet.;  But  when  the 
amount  of  excess  or  defect  is  mentioned  before  the  Com¬ 
parative,  the  Preposition  is  omitted,  ‘  (by)  five  feet  taller/ 
where  ‘  five  feet;  is  used,  like  ‘  this  side/ adverbially.  The 
Latins  make  no  difference  whether  the  Comparative  pre¬ 
cede  or  follow. 


(By)  so  7nuch  the  better 
(By)  how  far  he  siuf  asses  / 
Much  worse 
He’s  (by)  a  little  too  late 


Eo  melius 
Quanto  superat  ! 
Multo  pejus 
Paullo  est  tardior 


Rule — The  measure  of  excess  or  defect  is 
expressed  by  the  Ablative,  e.g.  ‘  quinque  pedi¬ 
bus  major.’ 


5» 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


[Par.  43. 


Some  prepositional  phrase,  e.g.  to  the  extent  of  ’  amount 
of ‘  seems  to  be  required  before  high ,  deep ,  broad,  &c. 
The  Latins  express  this  absent  Preposition  mostly  by 
the  Accusative  case,  ‘  Agger  erat  decem  pedes  altus  ;  ’  or 
else,  less  frequently,  by  the  Accusative  after  habebat,  e.g. 
1  decem  pedes  habebat  altus.’ 

43.  Conjunctions,  Coordinate  and  Subordinate.  Co¬ 
ordinate  Conjunctions  are  those  that  conjoin  sentences 
that  are  parallel  and  not  subordinate  the  one  to  the  other. 
Thus  in  1 1  came  and,  but,  so,  the7’efore,  he  returned,’ 
we  have  two  coordinate  sentences  connected  by  and,  &c. 
But  in  ‘  I  came  because  he  returned,’  I  came  is  the  state¬ 
ment  or  principal  sentence,  and  he  returned  is  only 
introduced  as  a  reason,  i.e.  subordinately.  This  may  be 
illustrated  by  a  diagram. 

I  came, 

- > - 

‘  and 

he  returned. 

- > - 

Fig.  t. 


Fig  2. 


Par.  ^a.] 


'AND,*  ‘BUT.' 


59 


In  the  first  diagram  the  two  sentences  are  parallel ;  in 
the  second  diagram,  the  sentence  he  returned  is  (i)  an 
aiding  cause,  or  (2)  a  neutral  circumstance,  or  (3)  an  im¬ 
peding  obstacle,  and,  in  each  of  the  three  cases,  Subor¬ 
dinate. 


4-A.  Conjunctions  Co-ordinate.  And  is  added  in 
English,  illogically  but  usefully,  to  prepare  the  hearer 
for  the  last  of  a  number  of  things  enumerated,  ‘  J  ohn, 
Thomas,  and  ( lastly )  Harry.’-  The  Latins,  not  disliking 
the  abruptness,  or  preferring  logical  symmetry  to  smooth¬ 
ness,  say,  ‘Johannes,  Thomas,  Henricus,’  or  ‘Johannes 
et  Thomas  et  Henricus.’ 

Rule — In  enumerations,  ‘  et  ’  must  be  used 
throughout  or  not  at  all. 


44a.  Enclitic  Conjunctions.  Too  (meaning  also),  e.g. 
‘You  too ,  Brutus  !  ’  must  follow  some  emphatic  word  and 
cannot  stand  first  in  a  sentence.  The  Latins  have  many 
such  Enclitic  Conjunctions. 

Rule — ‘  Autem,’  ‘  enim,’  *  quidem,’  ‘  que,’ 
‘ve,’  ‘vero,’*  and  generally  ‘igitur’  and 
‘tamen,’  cannot  stand  first  in  a  sentence, 
but  must  follow  some  emphatic  word. 

N.B. — Distinguish  between  sed  and  autem.  Sed  (se-d 
by  itself,  something  distinct  from  what  precedes)  qualifies, 
corrects,  or  denies  :  autem  whereas,  while  (Greek  &),  in¬ 
troduces  a  second  statement  not  inconsistent  with  the  first. 
Distinguish  also  between  verum  bitt,. and  vero  truly. 

He  is  a  little  dull;  while  Ille  quidem  tardior  ;  tu 
you  are  clever ,  BUT  un-  autem  ingeniosus,  sed 

stable  in  all  your  actions  in  omni  vita  inconstans 

*  Vero  stands  first  in  replies,^.  ‘Will  you  come?  Yes,  and  gladly* 
‘Vero,  ac  libenter  quidem.' 


6o  'AND  NOT;  1 AND  HE.*  [Par.  45. 

But  introducing  an  objection  abruptly  is  to  be  rendered 
at  enim. 

But  you  were  compelled  At  enim  vi  coactus  fecisti 
to  do  itu YOU  SAY 


45.  Negative  Conjunctions.  In  English  we  do  not 
shrink  from  saying  ‘  and  not/  ‘  and  no  one  ; 5  but  and 
means  +  ,  while  not  often  means  — ,  and  the  Latins  felt  the 
impropriety  of  saying  ‘  et  non  ’  ‘  —  /  where  the  positive 

and  negative  are  equally  emphatic.  They  preferred  to 
bring  the  negative  to  the  front ,  and  had  at  command 
the  unemphatic  form  of  and,  que.  They  therefore  pre¬ 
ferred  to  say  neque,  and  also  nec  quisquam.  So  neve, 
nisi.  For  a  similar  reason  the  Latins  dislike  non 
valde,  and  prefer  non  ita.  They  also  prefer  nego  to 
1  dico  ....  non.’ 

Rule — ‘  And  not,*  ‘  and  no  one,’  ‘  if  not,*  are 
to  be  rendered  by  4  neque,’  ‘  nec  quisquam,’ 
i  nisi/  So  also  ‘  neque  unquam,’  ‘  usquam,’ 
&c. 

We  say  ‘not  even  Balbus but,  in  Latin,  quidem,  being 
an  enclitic  (44a.)  must  come  after  the  word  that  it  quali¬ 
fies.  Note  therefore  the  following  : — 

Rule — Do  not  say  £  ne  quidem  Balbus,’  but 
‘  ne  Balbus  quidem.’ 

4-6.  ‘  And  he/  1  now  he.’  The  Latins,  greatly  disliking 
ille  and  is  to  represent  a  previous  Subject,  prefer  qui,  to 
denote  the  Subject  with  the  notio7i  of  connection. 

Rule — '  And  he,’  ‘  now  he,’  &c.  must  often 
be  rendered  by  ‘  qui.’ 

I  called  07i  the  7nan  AND  HE  Conveni  hominem,  qui  me 
told  me,  6r>c.  certiorem  fecit,  &c. 


Par.  47.]  ‘  AND , 

N  OW  since  THIS  is  so 
Now  when  he  heard  THIS  . . 

He  also  is  often  idem. 

Epicurus  denied  this  :  HE 
ALSO  maintained  that 
pain  is  tlu  greatest  pos¬ 
sible  evil 


<  but:  61 

Qua  quum  ita  sint 
Quibus  auditis  .  . . 

Epicurus  hoc  negabat. 
Idem  dictitabat  sum- 
mum  malum  esse  dolo¬ 
rem 


47.  ‘  And  ’  and  ‘  but  ’  omitted.  The  Latins  dislike  a 
long  string  of  coordinate  clauses,  and  avoid  them  by  using 
sometimes  Participles,  sometimes  Conjunctions.  In  Eng¬ 
lish  the  power  of  converting  almost  any  Participle  into  an 
Adjective,  e.g.  ‘  the  burned  cake/  prevents  us  from  using 
the  Participle  in  the  same  way  in  which  the  Latins  use  it. 
We  could  not  say  ‘he  left  the  bunted  bridge’  for  ‘he 
burned  and  left  the  bridge.’  The  Latins  greatly  prefer  the 
Participial  construction. 

Rule — ‘  He  burned  and  left  the  bridge  *  = 
‘  Pontem  incensum  deseruit.’ 

But  is  also  sometimes  omitted  in  the  same  way : 

I  asked  hint  what  he  Interroganti  mihi  quid 
watited,  BUT  he  made  vellet  nihil  respondit 

no  reply 

* 

1  But]  ‘  while ,’  should  be  omitted  where  two  state¬ 
ments,  or  questions  implying  statements,  are  combined  for 
the  purpose  of  bringing  out  the  absurdity  of  the  combina¬ 
tion.  The  Latins  are  fond  of  occasional  abruptness. 

How !  are  we  to  suppose  Quid  igitur  !  Hoc  pueri 

that  this  is  possible  for  possunt,  viri  non  pos- 
boys,  but  impossible  for  sunt  ? 

men  ? 

But  used  for  that  not,  see  Paragraph  55. 


62 


SUBORDINATE  CONJUNCTIONS.  [Par.  48. 

48.  Subordinate  Conjunctions.  We  will  first  consider 
those  that  introduce  a  Subjective  or  Objective  clause. 

That.  Take  the  sentence  ‘he  is  honest.'  If  this  is  to 
be  made  the  Object  of  a  Transitive  Verb,  e.g.  ‘I  know/ 
we  can  say  ‘  I  know  him  to  be  honest /  where  the  Object 
of  know  is  not  him ,  but  him  to  be  honest.  So  the  Latins 
say  ‘  certo  scio  illum  probum  esse.'  But,  whether  it  be 
that  we  dislike  the  juxtaposition  of  the  Transitive  Verb, 
e.g.  know ,  with  a  Pronoun,  e.g.  him ,  that  is  not  really  the 
Object  of  that  Verb,  or  whatever  be  the  reason,  we  cannot 
use  this  construction  in  many  cases.  For  example,  we 
cannot  now  say  ‘  I  hear  or  read  him  to  be  honest /  nor  can 
we  say  ‘  it  is  certain  /zzV;z  to  be  ho7iesth  The  Latins,  more 
consistently,  use  this  construction  wherever  a  clause  is 
introduced  either  as  Subject  or  Object.  ‘Audio  (Obj.) 
illum  probum  esse/  ‘  Certum  est  (Subj.)  illum  probum 
esse.' 

In  such  cases  we  generally  connect  the  Subject  or 
Object  with  the  principal  Verb  by  that  {how  that)  :  ‘  I 
hear  (Object)  {how)  that  he  is  honest.'  Compare  in  Greek 
\eyco  on,  in  Low  Latin  ‘dico  quod/  in  French  ‘je  dis  que.' 
So,  ‘  that  he  is  honest  (Subject)  is  certain.' 

Rule — Do  not  translate  ‘that*  by  ‘ut* 
where  it  introduces  an  Objective  or  Sub¬ 
jective  Clause,  but  by  the  Infinitive,  eg.  ‘I  am 
persuaded  (I  know)  that  it  is  true/  ‘  Persuasum  est 
mihi  haec  vera  esse/ 

In  order  to  prepare  the  way  for  the  Object  sentence,  the  Latins  often 
insert  an  Object  pronoun,  or  an  Adverb  before  the  Accusative  and  Infini¬ 
tive,  ‘  Sic  a  majoribus  accepimus,  injurias  non  ferendas  esse.’  ‘  Quum  sibi 
ita  persuasisset  ipse,  &c.’  Sometimes  ita  is  followed  by  ut  with  the  Sub¬ 
junctive.  ‘  Ita  a  patribus  didicimus  ut  virtute  magis  quam  dolo  conten¬ 
damus.* 

N.B. — When  the  Infinitive  has  a  Subject  and  also  an 
Object,  both  in  the  Accusative,  great  care  is  necessary  to 
avoid  ambiguity.  Thus,  what  is  the  meaning  of — 

‘  Aio  te,  /Eacida,  Romanos  vincere  posse  ’  ? 

The  meaning  would  be  clear  if  the  oracle  had  said  ‘  Aio, 


Par.  49-]  *7 'HAT.'  63 

Pyrrhe,  te  a  Romanis  vinci  posse/  using  the  Passive , 
instead  of  the  Active . 

Rule — Avoid  the  Ambiguity  arising  from 
the  Accusative  before  and  after  the  Infini¬ 
tive. 


49.  Exceptions — With  1  it  seems  that /  ‘it  is  said  that / 
the  Latins  use  the  Nominative  and  Infinitive. 


It  seems  that  Balbus  has 
departed 

It  is  said  that  Balbus  lived 
to  be  an  old  man 


Videtur  Balbus  abiisse. 

(. Balbus  seems,  &^c.) 

Fertur  (dicitur)  Balbus 
usque  ad  senectutem 
vixisse 


Quin  is  qui  ne,  by  which  not.  The  Latins  regarding 
doubt  as  prevetitive ,  say,  instead  of  ‘  there  is  no  doubt 
that  this  is  true/  ‘  There  is  no  doubt  by  which  this  should 
not  be  true/  ‘  Haud  dubium  est  quin  haec  vera  sint/  where 
quin  is  qui-ne,  by  which  ?iot.  Hence  : 

Rule — ‘  That  ’  after  ‘  there  is  no  doubt/  is 
rendered  by  ‘  quin  *  in  Latin. 


A  similar  kind  of  construction  is  common  in  Elizabethan  English :  *  I 
doubt  not  but  to  ride  as  fast  as  he,’  i.e.  '  I  have  no  doubt  (fear)  about  being 
prevented  from  riding.’ — Shakespearian  Grammar ,  Paragraph  122. 

N.B. — Note  the  Periphrasis  necessary  to  express  a 
Future  passive  after  quin. 

Therds  no  doubt  that  Haud  dubium  est  quin 
Europe  will  soon  be  futurum  sit  ut  Europa 

divided  into  more  parts  mox  in  plures  partes 

distribuatur 


That  is  used  in  English  after  I  fear ,  as  after  I  hope , 
think ,  &C.  to  precede  the  Object  of  fear  /‘  I  fear  (What?) 
that  he  will  cornel  The  Latins  render  I  fear  by  vereor, 
I  watch  anxiously,  which  contains  a  notion  of  purpose. 


64  'THAT.'  [Par.  50. 

Consequently  vereor  is  followed  by  ne  and  the  Sub¬ 
junctive. 


I  am  afraid  THAT  he  will 
come 


I  was  afraid  THAT  he  would 
noj  cojne 


Vereor  ne*  veniat,  i.e.  Iam 
anxiously  taking  mea¬ 
sures  that  he  may  not 
come 

Veritus  sum  ut  *  veniret,  i.e. 
I  was  taking  measures 
that  he  might  come 


Rule — ‘  That  ’  after  ‘  I  fear  ’  is  rendered  by 
*  ne,’  and  ‘  that  not  ’  by  4  ut  ’  ;  in  both  cases 
followed  by  the  Subjunctive. 


50.  That  is  often  omitted,  eg.  ’  I  see  (that)  you  under¬ 
stand/  ‘  I  told  him  (that)  it  was  so/  The  beginner  must 
be  very  careful  to  detect  such  omissions  and  to  represent 
the  Objective  Clause  by  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive. 

N.B. — Distinguish  most  carefully  the  above  cases  of 
omitted  that  from  the  following,  ‘  I  heard  you  sing/  No 
doubt  this  sentence  might  occasionally  be  used  for  ‘  I 
heard  (that)  you  sing,’  eg.  ‘  I  heard,  from  my  brother,  you 
sing  better  than  ever  ’ :  but,  as  a  rule,  it  would  mean  ‘  I 
heard  you  singing l  The  ambiguity  arises  from  the  fact 
that  you  has  no  inflection  (to  distinguish  Nom.  ‘that  you 
sing’  from  Acc.  4  I  heard  you  singing’),  and  from  the  loss 
of  the  Old  Eng.  Inf.  Inflection  -en.  As  the  Acc.  and  Inf. 
are  used  to  represent  that ,  the  Latin  rule  is  : — 

Rule — Translate  ‘  I  heard  her  sing1  by  ‘audivi 
illam  canentem/ 


Note  the  greater  richness  of  English  in  : 

I  hear  that  she  sings  =  Audio  illam  canere 

f  SI  NG  =\ 

I  heard  her  <  (in  the  act  of)  _  [Audivi  illam  canentem 

(  SINGING  j 


I 

*  See  Sequence  of  Tenses,  64. 


Par.  52.] 


‘  whether;  the  relative. 


65 


51.  ‘  Whether/ and  (  if,’  when  introducing  an  Objective 
or  Subjective  clause,  ‘  He  asked  whether ,  or  if.  this  was 
true /  are  rendered  by  (1)  utrum,  followed  by  an  or  ne, 
(2)  num,  in  both  cases  followed  by  the  Subjunctive. 

N.B.  Distinguish  between  whether  thus  introducing  a 
dependent  clause,  and  whether  used  to  express  a  con¬ 
dition,  sive. 


He  asked  whether  this 
was  true  or  not 

Whether  this  is  Hue  or 
false,  I  am  not  troubled 
by  it 


Rogavit  utrum  hasc  vera 
essent  *  annon 

Haec,  sive  vera  sunt  seu 
falsa,  nullo  modo  me 
movent 


52.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  often  equivalent  to  a  De¬ 
monstrative  Pronoun  combined  with  some  Conjunction 
either  Coordinate  or  Subordinate.  Sometimes,  as  will  be 
seen  below,  it  introduces  a'  coordinate,  sometimes  a  sub¬ 
ordinate  clause.  The  English  Relative,  whether  expressed 
by  who  or  that ,  is  rendered  by  qui.  In  English  the 
distinction  between  who  and  that  is  as  follows  :  Who 
introduces  a  new  fact  about,  while  that  introduces  some¬ 
thing  essential  to  the  complete  meaning  of,  the  antecedent. 

‘  They  succeeded  in  capturing  the  soldiers  ( not  all,  but 
only  those)  that  wTere  wounded,  and  also  the  children,  who 
{for  they)  were  left  behind  as  an  encumbrance.’ 

Now,  wherever  who  introduces  simply  a  new  fact,  with¬ 
out  any  notion  of  cause ,  purpose ,  obstacle ,  Q^c.,  and 
wherever  that  introduces  simply  something  essential  to 
the  completion  of  the  Antecedent,  without  any  notion  of 
such  a  kind  that ,  the  Latins,  like  ourselves,  use  the 
Relative  with  the  Indicative.  But  in  the  exceptional 
cases  above  mentioned,  where  not  a  fact  merely  but  a 
thought  is  introduced,  the  Latins,  whose  language  is  - 
richer  than  ours  in  Moods,  use  the  Subjunctive  Mood  to 
express  the  thought,  as  distinguished  from  the  fact ,  the 
fact  being  expressed  by  thelndicative. 

*  See  Sequence  of  Tenses,  64 

F 


66  THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN.  [Par.  52, 

Rule — Wherever  the  Relative  introduces  a 
thought,  and  not  merely  a  fact,  it  is  followed 
by  the  Latin  Subjunctive. 


Some  THAT  had  heard  it  Qui  ex  ipso  audivissent 
from  his  own  lips  certiorem  me  fecerunt 

brought  me  word  of  it 


Here  the  Subjunctive  denotes  not  a  simple  fact,  but 
a  thought ,  that  the  evidence  of  the  class  of  witnesses 
here  described  is  peculiarly  convincing. 

Rule  —  Since  classification  implies  *  a 
thought,’  the  Subjunctive  follows  ‘  sunt, 
erant,  qui,’  ‘  there  are  some  (such)  that.’ 


There  are  some  THAT  say 
this  is  not  true 

Caius  Ligarius  doth  bear 
C cesar  hard,  who  *  (be¬ 
cause  he)  rated  him 
for  speaking  well  of 
Pompey 

Balbus  is  one  that  (SUCH 
THAT)  has  always  con¬ 
sulted  the  interests  of  his 
country  rather  than  his 
own 

As  for  you,  who  (since 
you)  have  not  slept  for 
th}'ee  nights,  you  are  in¬ 
deed  to  be  pitied 


Sunt  qui  negent  haec  vera 
esse  {so  sceptical  that ) 

Caius  Ligarius  succenset 
Caesari  qui  se  culpaverit 
quod  Pompeium  lauda¬ 
verit  {so  criiical  that) 

~y 

Balbus  is  est  qui  semper  rei- 
publicae  potius  quam  sibi 
consuluerit  {so  patriotic 
that) 

Tu  quidem  miserrimus, 
qui  tertiam  jam  noctem 
non  dormieris  {so  much 
troubled  that) 


*  Not  a  common  use  in  modern  English.  See  Shakespearian  Grammar 
Paragraph  263. 


Par.  53.  ]  DEPENDENT  INTERE 0 GA  TIVE. 


67 


There  is  not  a  soldier , 
WHO  (provided  that 
he)  is  also  a  man , 
THAT  would  not  I'ecoil 
with  horror  from  such 
a  plan 


Miles  est  nemo,  qui  modo 
sit  homo,  qui*  non  hsec 
perhorrescat  (so  hard¬ 
hearted  that) 


Qui  takes  the  Subjunctive,  even  when  introducing  a 
mere  defining  sentence,  if  that  sentence  is  a  part  of  a 
statement  or  opinion  of  some  one  distinct  from  the  winter. 
This  is  a  distinction  that  cannot  be  tersely  expressed  in 
English  : 

Socrates  used  to  execrate 
the  man  THAT  was  the 
frst  to  separate  (as 
Socrates  said)  expe¬ 
diency  from  right 

Qui  also  takes  the  Subjunctive,  where  the  previous  construction  is  such 
as  to  convey  the  notion  that  the  Relative  Clause  does  not  introduce  a  fact 
i.e.  insubordinate  Propositions  dependent  on  clauses  con¬ 
taining  Infinitives  or  Subjunctives.  The  following  are  examples : 


Socrates  exsecrari  eum 
solebat,  qui  primus  uti¬ 
litatem  a  jure  sejunxis¬ 
set 


It  is  natural  for  power  to 
be  arbitrary  (do  what  it 
likes) 

It  is  easy  for  you  to  advise 
me  to  keep  myself  in 
health  SO  far  as  I  can 


Potentis  est  facere  quod 
velit 

Facile  me  admones  ut  me 
salvum,  quoad  possim, 
servem 


53.  The  Dependent  Interrogative.  What  requires 
care.  Where  it  means  that  which ,  it  is  to  be  rendered  by 
quod  or  id  quod,  e.g.  ‘  What  you  say  is  true/  ‘  Quod  dicis, 
verum  est.’  But  interrogatively,  what  ?  is  rendered  by 
quid  ?  1  quid  dicis  ?  }  And  the  Latins,  with  their  habitual 
distinction  between  fact  and  not  fact ,  not  only  change  quod 
into  quid,  but  also  change  the  Indicative  into  a  Subjunc¬ 
tive,  in  a  dependent  Interrogative  : 

*  When  nemo  is  at  some  distance  from  the  Relative,  quin  is  sometimes 
replaced  by  qui  non.  See  Paragraph  55. 


F  2 


63  DEPENDENT  INTERROGATIVE.  [Par.  54. 

Rule — In  dependent  interrogatives,  e.g.  ‘I 
ask  what  you  say,’  ‘  quid  ’  must  be  used,  and  the 
Verb  must  be  in  the  Subjunctive,  e.g.  ‘Rogo 
quid  dicas.’ 


The  Latins  in  many  cases  prefer  the  Dependent  Inter¬ 
rogative  form  to  the  ordinary  Relative. 


I  perceived  the  great  kind¬ 
ness  with  WHICH  I  was 
received  by  my  host 

Do  you  forget  the  many 
victories  THAT  you  have 
gained  ? 


Intellexi  quanta  benevo¬ 
lentia  hospes  me  exci¬ 
peret 

m 

Num  obliviscimini  quotvic- 
torias  reportaveritis  ? 


N.B. — Do  not  make  the  mistake  cf  writing  vic¬ 
toriarum,  as  though  the  Noun  were  governed  by  oblivis¬ 
cor.  The  Object  of  obliviscor  is,  not  victorias,  but  the 
whole  of  the  following  sentence. 

Very  often  the,  qualifying  the  Antecedent,  implies  great , 
e.g.  ‘  I  perceived  the  kindness  with  which.’  In  all  such 
cases  quantus  should  be  used.  See  Paragraph  21. 

Rule — When  *  the,’  qualifying  an  Ante¬ 
cedent,  implies  ‘great  ’  or  ‘  many,’  ‘  quantus  ’ 
or  ‘  quot  ’  should  be  used  instead  of  the 
Relative,  and  should  be  followed  by  the 
Subjunctive. 


54.  ‘That’  after  Superlatives.*  The  English  often  use 
a  Superlative  preceded  by  the  before  the  Relative  :  thus 
‘  He  sent  me  the  niost  beautiful  flowers  (of  the  flowers) 
tha,t  he  had.’  But  in  Latin,  ‘  Misit  ad  me  pulcerrimos 
flores  quos  habuit  ’  might  mean  ‘  He  sent  me  some  very 
beautiful  flowers  that  he  had.’  To  avoid  this,  the  Latins 
place  the  Superlative  in  the  Relative  clause,  ‘  Whatever 
(flowers)  he  had  most  beautiful,  those  flowers  he  sent/ 
‘Quos  flores  habuit  pulcerrimos,  eos  ad  me  misit/  or 


‘  THAT .  .  . 


not: 


Par  55-] 


69 


‘Misit  ad  me  flores,  quos  habuit  pulcerrimos/  All  is 
transposed  in  the  same  wav  : 


All  THAT  were  captured 
were  put  to  death 


Qui  capti  sunt,  ii  omnes 
interfecti 


The  men  THAT  were  in  the 
ship 


Ii  qui 
Si  qui 
Qui 


in  navi  erant. 


Not  homines  qui,  which  might  mean  some  men ,  who . 


There  are  other  ways  of  rendering  all  .  .  .  that : 

They  will  give  up  ALL  the  Quidquid  )  divitiarum  su- 

wealth  THAT  they  have  Si  quid  j  perest,  id  omne 

remaining  tradent 


Note  cases  where  the  Relative  is  implied  in  English,  e.g. 
*  The  vigour  of  youth/  by  itself,  may  be  rendered  vigor 
juvenilis  ;  but  l 


I  have  lost  ALL  THE  vigour  Quern  quondam  juvenis  vi- 
of  youth  gorem  habui,  eum  om¬ 

nem  perdidi 

Rule — Transpose  the  Relative  in  ‘  the  best 
that/  ‘  all  that/  ‘  the  men  that.’ 


N.B. — The  Relative  where  used  with  the  Indicative  to 
define,  often  precedes  its  Antecedent.  This  may  be  a  trace 
of  its  interrogative  origin.  ( Shakesp .  Gram.  Par.  251.) 


55.  ‘  That  .  .  .  not/  ‘but.’  When  that  has  for  its  Ante¬ 
cedent  no  one  or  nothing,  and  is  followed  by  not,  that  not 
are  often  combined  in  Latin  and  rendered  by  quin  (qui-ne). 

There  was  NO  ONE  that  Nemo  erat  quin  fleret 
did  NOT  weep 

When  that  is  the  Object  of  a  Verb,  1  quern  ....  non* 
is  preferable  to  ‘  quin  ....  eum.’ 

There  was  no  one  that  Nemo  erat  quern  Tullius 
Tullius  did  NOT  love  non  amaret 


70 


that: 


[Par.  56. 

N.B.-  -But  meaning  except  is  often  used  for  ‘that  .  .  . 
not,’  ‘  There  was  no  one  but  wept/  i.e.  strictly,  ‘  there  was 
no  one  except  those  that  wept/  But  seems  loosely  used  as 
a  negative  Relative,  just  as  as  is  used  as  a  positive  Rela¬ 
tive  in  ‘  Such  flowers  as*  I  have,  I  will  give/  In  Latin, 
but  is  rendered  by  quin  or  qui  .  .  .  non. 

There  is  no  one  BUT  hates  Nemo  est  quin  me  oderit 
me 


56.  ‘That’  after  repeated  Antecedent.  When  the 
English  Antecedent  is  repeated,  or  stands,  loosely,  in  ap¬ 
position  to  a  previous  sentence,  it  is  attracted,  in  Latin, 
into  the  Relative  clause  : 


He  answered  me  with  the 
greatest  courtesy  —  A 
COURTESY  THAT  I  shall 
never  forget 

He  lightened  the  taxes ,  A 
KINDNESS  THAT  secured 
him  the  favour  of  his 
country7?ien 


Summa  comitate  mihi  re¬ 
spondit:  cujus  comita¬ 
tis  equidem  nunquam 
obliviscar 

V ectiganum  onera  levabat : 
quo  beneficio  cives  con¬ 
ciliabat 


N.B. — You  may  turn  sentences  of  this  kind  in  some 
other  way :  but  you  must  never  render  theyn  literally . 

.  •  -  -S  .  . 


57.  ‘  That  ’  for  ‘  when/  That ,  after  an  Antecedent  of 
Time,  is  used  for  ‘on  that/  i.e.  ‘on  which/  and  is  there¬ 
fore  equivalent  to  when. 

On  the  day  THAT  (on  Quo  die  hoc  gustaveris 
WHICH,  when)  thou 
.  eatest  thereof 

When  a  Negative  precedes  that  thus  used,  the  Relative 
and  Negative  are  often  combined  and  rendered  by  quin 
(qui,  old  Abl. ;  ne) : 


*  Shakespeare  writes  sometimes  ‘such  which.'  See  page  72,  note. 


Par.  59.]  RELATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS.  71 

Not  a  day  passes  that  he  Dies  fere  nullus  quin  hue 
does  not  come  here  ventitet 


58.  Omission  of  the  Relative.  The  Relative  is  often 
omitted  in  English,  when  it  would  come  as  an  Object,  just 
between  the  Antecedent  and  a  following  Subject,  e.g.  ‘A 
man  (that)  I  saw  yesterday  said,  &c.’  The  pupils  must 
remember  that  the  Relative  is  never  omitted  in  Latin 
either  in  such  a  sentence  as  the  above,  or  with  Participles , 
as  in  the  following  : — 

The  soldiers  (that  were) 
shut  UP  in  the  castle 
conspired  with  those 
(that  were)  remain¬ 
ing  outside  the  town 


Quidquid  militum  in  castello 
clausum  erat,  cum  iis 
conjurabat  militibus  qui 
extra  oppidum  mane¬ 
bant 


Milites  clausi  might  mean  i  the  soldiers ,  or  some  soldiers , 
being  shut  up  :  ’  ‘  iis  manentibus  ’  would  mean  ‘  them , 
while  remaining /  or  1  those  mentioned ,  who  were  re¬ 
maining l 


59.  Relatival  Conjunctions.  As  (in  the  way ,  degree 
in  which),  quam  :  sometimes  demonstrative,  in  that  degree , 

tarn.* 

Balbus  is  AS  (in  THAT  DE-  Balbus  est  tam  sapiens 
GREE)  wise  AS  (IN  quam  ego 

which  degree)  I  am 

Sentences  like  these  might  be  turned  by  ‘equally/^. 
‘  Balbus  and  I  are  equally  grieved/  or,  less  logically, 
‘  Balbus  is  equally  grieved  and  I  (am  equally  grieved)/ 

‘  Balbus  seque  dolet  atque  ego.’ 


*  In  *  as  good  as'  the  first  as  —  so.  In  Elizabethan  English  so  ...  as  was 
often  used  where  we  use  as  ...  as. 

‘  So  well  thy  words  become  thee  as  thy  wounds.’ 

Macbeth,  i.  2.  43. 

This  similarity  between  Demonstratives  and  Relatives  is  illustrated  by  the 
double  use  of  that. 


[Par.  60. 


'like: 


72 

You  ought  to  have  respected 
him  AS  ( you  ought  to 
have  respected )  a  father 

This  is  the  same  thing  AS 
asking  a  question  op  a 
deaf  man 


Illum  seque  (colere  debuisti) 
ac  patrem  colere  debu¬ 
isti 

Hoc  est  idem  ac  (idem  sit) 
si  surdum  interroges  (i.e. 
and  it  would  be  the  same) 

also  rendered  by  ut  with  the 


As  (in  the  way  in  which)  is 
Indicative,  or  by  eodem  modo  quo. 


As  you  sow ,  so  you  must  ut  seres,  ita  metes 
reap 

As  you  please  Ut  libet 

I  shall  answer  AS  you  did  Ego  respondebo  eodem 

modo  quo  tu  respondisti 

As  in  English  is  sometimes  used  as  a  Subject  or  Object, 
like  the  Relative  Pronoun,  e.g.  in  the  two  next  examples  : 


He  said  the  same  AS  before 

Such  help  AS  *  /  can  give 
you  I  will 

(Being,  or  though  I  am+) 
Old  AS  I  am  I  will 
resist 


Eadem  quse  antea,  dixit 

Quod  auxilium  potero  dare, 
dabo 

Quamvis  (to  whatever  de¬ 
gree)  senex,  resistam 


60.  ‘  As/  ( like/  superlative  notion  of.  As  and  like  are 
often  used,  without  any  notion  of  comparison ,  to  give  a 
Superlative  meaning,  just  as  little  boys  say,  ‘  I  have  such 
a  beautiful  toy.’  The  Latins,  more  logically,  express 
this  Superlative  notion  by  a  Superlative  Adjective,  or,  if 
the  meaning  is  clear  without  it,  they  sometimes  omit  the 
Superlative  : 

Who  could  disbelieve  a  man  Quis  Catoni,  viro  sanctis- 
LIKE  Cato  ?  simo,  fidem  non  tribuat? 

*  4  Such  I  will  have  whom  I  am  sure  he  knows  not.’ 

All's  Well  that  Ends  Well,  iii.  6.  14. 

t  4  As  near  the  dawning,  provost,  as  it  is.' 

Measure  for  Measure,  iv.  2.  97. 


Par.  62.] 


than: 


It  would  be  moiistrous  that 
such  men  AS  the  Grac¬ 
chi  should  complain  of 
unconstitutional  con¬ 
duct  / 

A  man  like  you  will  al¬ 
ways  spare  the  conquered 

We  must  not  desert  such  a 
brave  fellow  as  Richard 


73 

Quis  Gracchos,  de  seditione 
querentes,  tulerit  ? 


Tu,  cujus  es  misericordiae, 

semper  victis  parces 

Ricardus,  vir  fortissimus, 

nullo  modo  est  deseren¬ 
dus 


Rule — ‘  Such  .  .  .  as/  ‘  a  man  like/  must 
often  be  rendered  by  the  Latin  Superlative. 


61.  ‘Than’  expressed  by  ‘quam.’  ‘Tullius  is  wiser 
than  I/  is  to  be  explained  as  follows  :  Than  is  a  form 
of  the ,  the  old  Relative,  meaning  in  what  way ,  so  that 
the  above  sentence  means  ‘  In  what  way  {whereas')  I  am 
wise,  Tullius  is  wiser/  So,  ‘  In  what  way  ( whereas )  you 
helped  me,  you  helped  no  one  more/  The  Latin  equiva¬ 
lent  for  in  what  way  is  quam.  Hence  : 

You  helped  no  one  more  Nemini  plus  quam  mihi 
THAN  me  subvenisti 


His  gift  was  greater  in  Donum  dedit  specie  quam 
appearance  THAN  in  re  majus 

reality 


Rule — When  two  words  are  connected  in 
the  way  of  comparison  by  ‘  quam/  and  when 
the  Verb  is  the  same  in  each  member  of  the 
sentence  of  Comparison,  the  two  words 
stand  in  the  same  case. 


62.  ‘Than ’  expressed  by  the  Ablative.  Comparison 
may  be  differently  expressed.  ‘  Tallness  ;  is  relative;  a 
man  that  is  not  ‘talR  (as  compared  with  average  men) 
may  be  made  to  appear  ‘  taller }  by  the  presence  of 


74 


‘  than: 


[Par.  63. 


Balbus.  Hence  Balbus  may  be  considered  as  the  instru¬ 
ment  that  makes  Tullius  ‘  tall  ’ ;  and  the  sentence  may  be 
expressed,  ‘Tullius  is  made  taller  by  Balbus ,’  ‘Tullius 
procerior  est  Balbo.’  But  the  construction  is  liable  to 
ambiguity,  when  the  first  member  of  the  comparison  is 
expressed  by  a  Noun  that  is  not  in  the  Nominative  or 
Accusative,  e.g.  ‘  Donum  dedit  specie  majus  re,’  i.e. 
‘  greater  than  a  thing]  or,  ‘  greater  than  in  reality l 
Hence  : 

Rule — *  Quam  ’  cannot  be  replaced  by  the 
Ablative  of  the  second  member  of  the  com¬ 
parison  unless  the  first  member  of  the  com¬ 
parison  is  in  the  Nominative  or  Accusative. 

63.  ‘Than,’  followed  by  a  new  Verb.  If  the  second 
Noun  is  connected  with  a  different  Verb  from  the  first, 
the  new  Verb  is  generally  inserted,  and  the  second  Noun 
put  in  the  necessary  case. 

Such  conduct  would  have  Talia  sapientiori  placuis- 
pleased  a  wiser  man  sent  homini  quam  tunc 

THAN  Balbus  was  then  erat  Balbus 

When  the  first  Noun  is  in  the  Accusative,  the  new  Verb  is  sometimes 
omitted,  and  the  second  Noun  is  attracted  into  the  same  case  as  the  first, 
e.g.  ‘  Ego  hominem  callidiorem  vidi  neminem  quam  Balbum.’ 


If  the  instrumental  force  of  the  Ablative  is  kept  in  mind, 
the  reason  for  the  following  caution  will  be  evident  : 

N.B. — Take  care  not  to  use  the  Ablative  instead  of 
‘quam’  where  the  Adjective  does  not  qualify  either 
member  of  the  comparison,  e.g.  ‘  He  has  a  taller  horse 
than  I.’  Here  ‘7’  cannot  be  regarded  as  the  instrument 
'  of  comparison  ;  it:  is  not  ‘  /,’  but  ‘  my  horse  ’  that  makes 
his  horse  appear  taller.  Hence  : 


Par.  64.] 


SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES. 


75 


*  More  than  a  hundred *  might  be  rendered  by  ‘  a  hun¬ 
dred  and  more.’  This  construction  is  common  in  Latin, 
and  in  it  the  comparison  does  not  affect  the  case  of  the 
Numeral  Adjective.  Plus  in  plusquam  (as  well  as  am¬ 
plius)  is  thus  adverbially  used. 


More  than  two  hwidred 
were  captured 

I  see  the  names  of  MORE 
THAN  five  hundred  of 
my  countrymen 


Ducenti  (et)  amplius  capti 
sunt 

Nomina  video  plus  quam 
quingentorum  civium 


64-.  Sequence  of  Tenses.  Before  entering  on  the  other 
Subordinate  Conjunctions,  it  will  be  well  to  explain  the 
rule  that  will  regulate  the  Tenses  following  these  Con¬ 
junctions.  In  subordinate  sentences  the  Tense  of  the 
subordinate  Latin  Verb  is  dependent  on  the  Tense  of  the 
principal  Verb,  e.g. : 

'  am  making 
7nake 

have  made 


Rogo 


/ 


have  *  been  making  ) 
shall ,  will  be  making  ) 
shall ,  will  make  j 

shall  have  made 

a  request  that  HE  MAY 
BE  PARDONED 

was  making 
made 
had  made 
had *  been  making 

that  he  MIGHT  BE  PAR¬ 
DONED 


Rogavi 


Rogabo 


'Ut  illi 


Rogavero 
ignoscatur 


a  request 


Rogabam 
Rogavi 

Rogaveram 
ignosceretur 


ut  illi 


So  far,  the  Rule  in  Latin  is  evident.  Like  follows  Like. 
The  Future  and  Present  Tenses  (for  rogavi,  when  mean¬ 
ing  ‘  I  have  asked/  means  ‘  I  have  something  asked/  and 
is  therefore  a  Complete  Present  Tense)  are  followed  by 


*  See  Paragraph  n. 


76 


SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES. 


[Par.  64. 


the  Present  Subjunctive,  and  the  Past  Tenses  by  the 
Past  Subjunctive.  Of  course,  in  an  English  dependent 
sentence,  eg.  in  a  sentence  following  ‘  I  ask  whether/  we 
use,  according  to  the  sense,  is,  was,  or  has  been.  But  now 
note  the  Latin  equivalent  : 


am  asking  \ 

ask  \ 

Rogo 

have  asked 
<  have  been  askmg 

Rogavi 

shall  be  asking 
shall  ask 

►  Rogabo 

^  shall  have  asked 

Rogavero 

utrum 


whether  he 


is  present 
was  preseiit 
has  been  present 


adsit 

adfuerit  N.B. 


(  was  asking 
j  1  asked 
\  had  asked 
(  had  been  asking 


I 


Rogabam 

Rogavi 

Rogaveram 


utrum 


(  ?s  present  (now)  )  adesset 

whether  he  <  was  present  ( yesterday )  ) 

(  had  been  present  adfuisset 


N.B. —  Note  that  above,  ‘  whether  he  was  present ’  and 
*  whether  he  has  been  present /  are  both  expressed  in  Latin 
by  ‘  utrum  adfuerit.’  This  is  a  necessary  and  inconvenient 
consequence  of  the  Latin  Law  of  Sequence,  which  is 
so  strict  that  it  sometimes  produces  great  ambiguity. 
Thus  : 


I  have  asked  whether  he  Rogavi  utrum  venerit 
CAME 

Here  it  is  impossible  to  tell  from  the  Latin,  whether  he 
came ,  or  he  has  come ,  is  the  correct  translation.  But 
the  Latins  cannot  help  this.  If  they  had  written  veniret 
above,  ‘  rogavi  utrum  veniret/  then,  since  rogavi  means 
both  /  asked  and  /  have  asked,  we  should  naturally  render 


77 


Par.  66.]  SUBORDINATE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

the  sentence,  not  ‘  I  have  asked  whether  he  came/  but  4 1 
asked  whether  he  came.'  This  is  a  serious  deficiency  arising 
from  the  poverty  of  the  Latin  language  in  respect  of  Tenses  : 
for  they  have  nothing  but  rogavi  to  render  our  two  tenses, 
asked  and  have  asked. 

I  will  ask  why  he  CAME  Interrogabo  cur  venerit 

Don't  you  know  the  esteem  in  Nescisne  quanto  inhonore 

which  HE  WAS  HELD  ?  fuerit  ? 

Apparent  exception  to  Sequence  pf  Tenses.  In  aconditional 
sentence  ‘if  I  had  come,  what  would  you  have  done?’  the  Pluperfect  Sub¬ 
junctive  is  used  in  both  cases  ;  and,  even  when  the  sentence  depends  upon  a 
Present  Tense  ‘  I  know,’  the  Pluperfect  in  the  Protasis  ‘si  venissem’  is 
retained.  For  the  Tense  depends  upon  the  nature  of  the  condition,  and  not 
on  the  tense  of  the  Principal  Verb.  But  the  Pluperfect  in  the  Apodosis  is 
changed,  according  to  the  Rule  of  Sequence,  ‘  Scio  quid  facturus  tueris 
si  venissem,’  ‘  I  know  what  you  would  have  done,  if  I  had  come,’  where  the 
condition  is  expressed  by  the  Filture  Participle. 


65.  Subordinate  Conjunctions,  (i)  time  :  after  (that), 
before  (that),  now  that,  since ,  until,  when,  while ;  (2)  cir¬ 
cumstance  :  whereas,  while ;  (3)  reason:  as,  in  that , 
because,  inasmuch  as,  seeing  that ;  (4)  condition  :  if,  pro¬ 
vided  that,  supposing,  whether ,  although,  however,  unless  ; 

(5)  result  :  so  as,  so  that,  in  such  a  way,  manner,  &~>c.  that ; 

(6)  purpose  :  in  order  that ,  so  that,  to  the  intent  that,  lest. 
The  above  list  includes  only  those  of  the  Prepositional 

Conjunctions  that  are  followed  by  a  Subject  and  a  Tense 
of  the  Verb,  e.g.  ‘  before  he  came/  But  practically  many 
other  Prepositions  are  Conjunctions  though  only  used 
with  Verbals  or  (in  the  case  of  to)  with  an  Infinitive : 
(1)  circumstance  :  besides ,  instead  of,  without ;  (2)  instru¬ 
ment  :  by,  of;  (3)  reason,  cause  :  for,  on;  (4)  condition  , 
in  spite  of;  (5)  purpose  :  to,  from. 

66.  Time.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  Latins  are  forced  to 
supply  their  weakness  in  Prepositional  and  other  Con¬ 
junctions,  and  also  in  Verbals,  by  using  their  strength  in 
Moods.  In  this  way  the  same  Conjunction,  e.g.  quum, 
may  be  used,  (1)  to  denote  time  with  th.e  Indicative,  (2) 


78 


CONJUNCTIONS  OF  TIME. 


[Par.  6 6 


to  denote  thought  (whether  it  be  (i)  cause,  ‘since/  or  (2)  suc¬ 
cession,  with  notion  of  consequence  ‘  upon/  or  (3)  contrast, 
‘  though/  ‘  whereas  ’)  with  the  Subjunctive. 


Since  this  is  so,  what  in 
the  world  will  you  do  f 

When  I  used  to  live  at 
Athens ,  Fused  to  attend 
Balbus*  lectures 


Quae  quum  ita  sint,  quid- 

nam  facies  ? 

Quum  Athenis  agebam, 
Balbum  audiebam 


N.B. — In  narrating  the  past,  when  we  mention  one 
event  as  occurring  simultaneously  with  the  occurrence  or 
completion  of  another  event,  we  generally  imply  some 
further  connection  than  at  the  tune  when,  e.g.  ‘  when  he 
heard  this,  he  fled.’  Here  there  is  a  thoiight,  viz.  that 
the  flight  was  a  consequence  of  hearing.  Such  a  sentence 
would  be  rendered  in  Latin  ‘  Quae  quum  audivisset/ 

Rule — ‘  Quum  ’  with  the  Imperfect  and 
Pluperfect  generally  takes  the  Subjunctive. 


After  (that),  postquam.  In  English  when  we  use  after 
for  when,  we  generally  desire  to  express  that  the  first 
action  is  completed  before  the  second  begins,  e.g.  ‘  when 
he  heard  me/  but  ‘  after  he  had  heard  me/  The  Latins, 
on  the  contrary,  generally  use,  in  this  sense,  the  Pluperf. 
Subj.  with  quum,  and  the  Perf.  Ind.  with  postquam. 

Rule — ‘  Postquam  *  takes  the  Perfect,  un¬ 
less  the  interval  is  expressed  or  emphatically 
implied. 


After  the  rebellion  had 
been  put  down  he  re¬ 
turned  to  Ro7ne 

Ten  years  after  the  rebel¬ 
lion  HAD  BEEN  put 
down ,  he  &*c. 


Postquam  seditio  compres¬ 
sa  est  Romam  rediit 

Decimo  anno  postquam  se¬ 
ditio  compressa  erat, 

&c. 


As  (1)  postquam  is  generally  used  of  time  without  ex¬ 
pressing  thought,  it  is  followed  by  the  Indicative.  Else,  use 


Par.  66.] 


CONJUNCTIONS  OF  TIME. 


79 


(2)  quum  with  Subjunctive,  or  (3)  the  Ablative  Absolute,* 
‘seditione  compressa/  or  (4)  post  governing  a  Noun 
qualified  by  a  Participle  or  by  some  word  used  as  a 
Participle,  ‘post  seditionem  compressam,’  ‘post  Tullium 
consulem.’ 

Before  (that),  antequam,  priusquam,  donec  (like  post¬ 
quam)  take  the  Perfect  where  we  often  use  the  Pluperfect. 
But  they  differ  from  postquam  in  that  they  are  often  used 
with  the  Subjunctive  to  imply  ‘  thought  ’  as  well  as  se¬ 
quence. 

Rule — ‘  Antequam/  ‘  priusquam/  ‘  dum/ 
*  donec/  and  ‘  quoad/  are  followed  by  the 
Subjunctive  when  design  is  implied,  or  when 
an  action  is  referred  to  that  has  not  actually 
commenced. 

• 

They  retired  ( On  purpose)  Ante  sese  receperunt  quam 
BEFORE  the  city  was  urbs  caperetur 

( could  be)  captured 

Note  also  the  logical  use  of  the  Future  in  Latin 
(see  Paragraph  11)  : 

BEFORE  I  see  you  Antequam  te  videbo  or  vi¬ 

dero 

Before  is  sometimes  expressed  by  an  Ablative  Absolute 
with  nondum,  e.g.  ‘  nondum  urbe  condita,’  or  by  ante 
governing  a  Noun  qualified  by  a  Participle,  ‘  ante  urbem 
conditam.’  The  following  sentences  illustrate  the  Latin 
rendering  of  English  Conjunctions  of  time : — 

Now  THAT  he  had  arrived  Tum  vero  adolescens,  quum 
at  Rome  the  young  man  Romam  venisset,  omnia 

felt  sure  of  success  spe  praesumebat  (Notion 

of  cause) 


*  The  Ablative,  denoting  some  circumstance ,  something  with  which  an 
action  takes  place,  seems  naturally  used  in  this  way. 


8o 


CONJUNCTIONS  OF  TIME. 


[Par.  66. 


SINCE  we  began  our  jour¬ 
ney  we  have  not  seen 
a  man 

Since  we  began  our  jour¬ 
ney  we  have  seen  two 
hundred  meti 

Until  /  (fact)  came  to 
Rome ,  I  thought  every 
Roman  a  knave  • 

'Until  /  (possibility)  am 
deceived ,  I  shall  treat 
hint  as  though  he  were 
honest 

I  shall  NOT  believe  you 
UNTIL  you  keep  your 
word 


Ex  quo  tempore  profecti 
sumus  ne  unum  quidem 
hominem  vidimus 

Postquam  profecti  sumus, 
homines  ducentos  vidi¬ 
mus 

Donec  ( or  antequam)  Ro¬ 
mam  veni,  Romanos 
omnes  veteratores  esse 
duxi 

Hominem,  donec  me  dece¬ 
perit,  tanquam  probum 
habebo 

Quum  promissa  servabis, 
tum  demum  tibi  *credam 


When,  see  the  beginning  of  the  Paragraph. 

Dum  haec  geruntur  (not 
gerebantur)  hostes  ter¬ 
ga  dederunt  (Par.  n) 

Dum  pugnam  princeps 
ciet,  occidit.  (Or  ciens 
rarely  ;  but  never  dum 
ciens.  See  Par.  yo.) 

The  sequence  of  events  is  sometimes  expressed  in 
English  by  the  Present  Participle  of  the  Verb  have. 
4  Having  finished  this,  i.e.  having  this  finished,  I  shall 
return.’  This  is  rendered  in  Latin  by  the  Pass.  Part. 
Abl.  Absolute,  4  his  auditis,’  or  by  a  Conjunction. 

N.B. — With  Intransitive  Verbs,  the  Ablative  Absolute 
cannot  be  used  :  4  Having  now  settled  here,  I  don’t  in¬ 
tend  to  move.’  4  Quoniam  hic  jam  consedi,  migrare 
nolo.’ 


While  this  was  gohig  on, 
the  enemy  jled 

While  heading  a  charge , 
he  fell 


Par.  68.]  CONJUNCTIONS  OF  REASON. 


81 


None  but  the  Deponent  Participles  can  render  the 
English  Participle  with  having ,  e.g.  ‘  having  said  this  he 
departed,’  ‘  haec  locutus  abiit.’ 

Examples :  Adeptus,  amplexus,  arbitratus,  ausus,  exper¬ 
tus,  functus,  hortatus,  mortuus,  nactus, .oblitus,  ortus, 
passus,  questus,  ratus,  solitus,  testatus,  ultus,  usus. 


67.  Conjunctions  of  circumstance. 

.  We  say  virtue  is  the  chief  Virtutem  nos  quidem,  vos 
object  of  life ,  whereas  autem  voluptatem  sum- 

or  WHILE  you  say  plea-  mum  bonum  esse  dicitis 

sure  is 

N.B. — Distinguish  this  use  of'  while  from  the  temporal 
use.  Autem  is  often  omitted. 


It  is  unjust  that  this  should  Injustum  est  hoc  vobis  con- 
be  granted  to  you  WHILE  cedi,  negari  nobis 

it  is  refused  to  us 


68.  Conjunctions  of  reason  are  followed  by  the  In¬ 
dicative,  if  prominence  is  given  to  the  truth  of  the  fact 
on  which  some  statement  is  based. 


As  you  have  promised,  you 
must  keep  your  word 

In  that  you  did  it  know- 
ingly,  your  crime  is 
worse  than  that  of  the 
rest 


Tu,  quoniam  promisisti, 
fidem  praestare  debes 

Quod  (or  Tu  qui)  sciens 
fecisti,  gravius  quam 
ceteri,  peccavisti 


N.B. — When  we  put  not  before  because ,  the  Verb 
following  not  because  very  often  expresses  something  that 
is  not  a  fact.  Hence  : 

I  do  this ,  not  because  ids  Hoc  facio,  non  quod  ju- 

pleasant ,  but  BECAUSE  cundum  sit,  sed  quia 

ids  right  honestum  est 

But,  even  where  fact  is  expressed,  the  Subjunctive  is 
used,  if  there  is  a  thought ,  e.g.  of  cause  : 


Q 


82  CONJUNCTIONS  OF  CONDITION.  [Par.  69. 


Inasmuch  as  (seeing 

THAT,  SINCE)  you  do 
not  pity  US' yon  cannot 
expect  us  to  pity  you 

I  ought  to  be  grateful  INAS¬ 
MUCH  AS  I  have  re¬ 
ceived  many  benefits 
from  him 

Since  this  is  so,  why  do  we 
delay  f 


Tu,  quum  ( or  qui)  nostri 
non  miserearis,  non 
sperare  debes  fore  ut 
tui  misereamur. 

Debeo  gratus  esse,  ut  qui 
multa  ab  illo  beneficia 
acceperim 

Quae  quum  ita  sint,  cur 
moramur  ? 


69.  Conjunctions  of  condition. 

In  a  language  that,  like  Latin,  has  distinct  Moods 
to  denote  fact  and  not  fact,  si,  when  followed  by  the 
Present  or  Past  Tense  of  the  Indicative,  loses  the  exact 
notion  of  condition,  and  must  mean  either  (1)  when,  as  in 
£  si  quando  vidit  ’  or  (2)  1  assuming,  for  a  moment,  as  a 
fact,’  eg.  ‘  Si  nihil  aliud  fecerunt,  satis  praemii  habent.’ 
So  ‘  si  Deus  mundum  creavit/  ‘  assuming  that  God  created 
the  world.’ 


This  (2)  use  of  the  Indicative  leaves  it  an  open  question 
whether,  in  the  writer’s  opinion ,  the  Verb  expresses  a  fact 
or  not.  The  Subjunctive  distinctly  expresses  what  is  not 
fact ,  though  it  may  be  hereafter  fact :  that  is  to  say,  the 
Subjunctive  after  si  expresses  what  is  genuinely,  and  the 
Indicative  Past  and  Present  after  si  what  is  fictitiously, 
conditional. 

The  following  are  genuine  conditional  sentences  : — 


IF*  /  {shall  find  that  I) 
HAVE  anything,  I  will 
give  it 

Should  I  have  (or,  if  I  were 
to  have,  or,  if  I  had, 
which  is  possible )  any¬ 
thing,  I  would  give  it 


Si  quid  habebo,  dabo.  (Note 
the  English  weakness, 
have  being  used  both 
for  Future  and  Present) 

Si  quid  habeam,  dem 


*  If  in.  ‘  I  don’t  know  if '  means  whether.  See  53. 


Pan  69.]  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 


83 


IF  I  had  anything  ( which  Si  quid  haberem,  darem 

I  have  not ,  and  cannot 
have)  I  would  give  it 

IF  /  had  had  anything ,  /  Si  quid  habuissem,  dedis- 
would  have  given  it  sem.  (Or,  graphically, 

dederam) 

Rule — In  conditional  sentences,  ‘  si’  with 
the  Past  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  is  used 
to  denote  an  impossible,  ‘  si  ’  with  the  Pre¬ 
sent  Tenses,  to  denote  a  possible,  condition. 

Sometimes  the  thought  is  changed  from  sequence  to 
consequence ,  in  which  case  the  Verb  is  changed  in  the 
Apodosis,*  from  the  Future  to  the  Present  Subjunctive, 
eg.  ‘  Si  quid  habebo,  dem/  ‘  if  I  have  anything,  I  will , 
or  rather ,  I  would,  give  it  ’  But  this  is  not  common  ex¬ 
cept  in  silver  Latin.  And  : 

Rule — The  Subjunctives  in  the  Protasis 
and  the  Apodosis,  must  be  both  Present  or 
both  Past.t 


If  not  :  see  Paragraph  70. 

Rem  perficies  dummodo  (or 
modo  si  or  modo)  pro 
virili  agas 

Fac  me  sicam  habere;  non 
sum  continuo  sicarius 
(or  Etiam  si  sicam  ha¬ 
beo,  assuming'  it  as  a 
fact) 

A  condition  can  also  be  expressed  by  a  Participle  or 
Ablative  Absolute,  provided  there  is  no  ambiguity. 

*  The  ‘  if’  clause  is  called  the  Antecedent  or  Protasis  ;  the  clause  contain¬ 
ing  the  consequen.  e  is  called  the  Consequent  or  Apodosis. 

t  The  Impel tect  may  correspond  to  the  Pluperfect),  eg.  ‘  tu,  si  mihi 
paruisses,  non  nunc  Romae  esses  but  you  could  not  have  ‘pareas, 
esses,’ ‘pareres,  sis.’ 

G  2 


You  will  succeed,  provi¬ 
ded  THAT  you  do  your 
best 

Supposing  I  have  a  dagger, 
it  does  not  follow  that 
Pm  an  assassin 


84  ‘  THOUGH:  [Par.  69. 

If  you  take  the  city  in  three  Quid  igitur  deinde  facies, 
months ,  what  will  you  urbe  tribus  his  mensibus 

do  then  ?  capta  ? 

But  if  ‘tribus  his  mensibus  ’  were  removed,  the  mean¬ 
ing  might  be  ‘  since  you  have  taken  the  city.’ 

Though  (O.E.  theali )  is  connected  with’  the ,  that ;  and 
calls  attention  to  a  condition  or  circumstance  *  even  in 
the  (case  that)/  The  close  connection  between  the 
Demonstrative  and  Relative  ( the  was  once  the  English 
Relative,  as  that  now  is)  makes  it  not  surprising  that 
though ,  i.e.  in- the ,  or  al- though ,  i.e.  even  in  the ,  should  be 
rendered  in  Latin  by  quanquam  (quam-quam),  or  quam¬ 
vis,  both  emphatic  forms  of  quam,  in  the  way  in  which ,  or 
in  what  way.  Quanquam  often  refers  to  facts,  ‘  quanquam 
iratus  est/  1  although  he  is  angry  quamvis  (in  the  best 
prose)  means  however  much,  and  does  not  refer  to  a 
definite  fact.  Hence  ; 

Rule — ‘  Quanquam  ’  generally  takes  the 
Indicative,  ‘  quamvis  *  never  (in  good  Prose). 

Rule — ‘  Quamvis  ’  is  often  used  with  Adr 
jectives,  without  a  Verb  : 

Pray  be  silent ,  however  Quamvis  iratus,  cura  ut 

angry  you  may  be  taceas 

Though  often  implies  that  something  does  not  exist  in 
the  way  in  which  it  might  be  expected  to.  Hence  : 

THOUGH  he  is  brave ,  he’s  Homo  est,  ut  fortis,  ita  non 
not  very  clever  admodum  acutus  (In 

*  the  way  wherein ,  or 

whereas ,  he’s  brave ,  Q^c ) 

The  same  sentence  might  be  expressed  thus,  ‘  He  is 
brave,  but  in  such  a  way  that  he’s  not  elever/  ‘  Ita  fortis 
est  ut  tamen  non  acutus  sit/ 

Though  this  is  useful, ,  it  is  Hoc  est  ita  utile  ut  hones¬ 
ti?/  right  turn  nbn  sit 


Par.  69.]  «  UNLESS,’  ‘  WHETHER.’  85 

Though ,  used  parenthetically  for  yet,  but ,  is  quanquam. 

Though,  why  do  I  waste  Quanquam,  cur  querendo 
time  in  complaining  ?  tempus  tero  ? 

Unless ,  if ...  .  not ,  nisi :  rarely  si  non,  unless  the  si 
and  non  are  separated.  Nisi  follows  the  same  rule  as  si. 
See  above. 


1  Not  ....  unless  ’  is  sometimes  represented  in  Latin 
by  ‘  ita  ....  si,’  i.e.  ‘  only  on  this  condition  .  ...  if 


I  shall  not  forgive  you  UN¬ 
LESS  you  forgive  him 

Unless  you  agree  in  your 
wishes ,  you  cannot  be 
friends 


Ego,  hac  lege  (or  ita)  tibi, 
si  tu  illi,  ignoveris 

Quod  si  eadem  velitis,  tum 
demum  amicitiam  possi¬ 
tis  conjungere.  (Then 
and  not  till  then ) 


Whether  (which  of  two)  is  often  equivalent  in  English 
to  if  on  the  one  hand.  ‘  Whether  (i.e.  whichever  of  two 
things  we  do)  we  rejoice  or  sorrow,  we  shall  always  re¬ 
member  you.’  This  is  rendered  in  Latin  by  sive,  if  either, 
‘  Nos,  sive  gaudebimus,  sive  (or  seu)  dolebimus,  tui 
nunquam  obliviscemur.’ 


N.B. — Carefully  distinguish  between  whether  meaning 
whichever  of  two  things ,  sive,  and  whether  following  a 
Verb,  eg.  1  he  asked/  and  meaning  which  of  two  things, 
i.e.  utrum.  (See  Paragraph  51.) 


The  principal  danger  of  confusing  the  two  meanings  of  whether  is,  when 
whether  means  sive,  but  is  placed  after  the  principal  sentence,  e.g.  ‘I  am 
not  much  annoyed,  whether  this  be  true  or  false.’ 

N.B. — Note  here  that,  though  in  English  we  sometimes 
use  be  after  whether ,  the  Larins,  as  in  the  last  example, 
use  the  Indicative.  The  reason  is  that  nothing  is  implied 
as  to  the  possible  incorrectness  of  the  suppositions :  the 
meaning  is  ‘  assuming  it  to  be  true,  or  assuming  it  to  be 
false,  and  I’m  not  just  now  concerned  with  the  question 
whether  it  is  true  or  false.’ 


86 


‘  WHEN  A  BOY? 


[Par.  70. 


70.  English  Ellipsis  of  Verb  after  Conjunctions.  We 

have  seen  that  quamvis  can  be  used  Adverbially  to 
qualify  an  Adjective  or  Participle.  In  English  a  great 
number  of  Conjunctions  are  thus  used, 1  while  walking ;  for 
‘  while  he  was  walking/  So,  ‘  when  young/  ‘  though 
hot-tempered/  ‘ if  true/  This  ellipsis  is  rare  in  Latin. 
Insert  the  Verb,  eg.  ‘when  he  was  young/  or  turn  the 
sentence  by  an  appositional  Noun,  or  by  a  qualifying 
Participle,  or  otherwise : 

While  walking  he  fell 

When  A  boy  Balbus  was 
se7it  to  A  thens 

He  is  frivolous,  IF  NOT 
immoral 

71.  Conjunctions  of  result.  Even  in  English  we  some¬ 
times  express  result  (even  though  it  is  a  fact)  not  as  a  fact \ 
but  as  a  consequence ,  in  the  Infinitive.  ‘  The  walls  were 
so  battered  as  to  be  no  longer  tenable/  The  Latins, 
having  their  Subjunctive,  express  a  result  by  that  Mood, 
preceded  by  ut,  in  which  way ,  quut,  quo(d),  old  Abl.  of 
qui.  Sometimes  ut  is  preceded  by  ita,  in  that  way. 

N.B.— This  construction*  is  used  even  after  verbs  of 
happening,  the  notion  perhaps  being  ‘  things  happened  in 
such  a  way  that ,  <fW/  eg.  ‘  It  happened  once  that  the 
house  was  set  on  fire/  ‘  Forte  accidit  ut  aedes  incen¬ 
derentur/ 

72.  Conjunctions  of  purpose.  Purpose  is  expressed  in 
Latin  by  (1)  ut  with  the  Subjunctive,  (2)  ad  with  the 
Gerund  or  Gerundive,  and,  more  rarely,  (3)  causa  pre¬ 
ceded  by  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive,  and  (4)  the  Fut. 
Part.  Active;  also,  after  Verbs  of  Motion  by  (5)  the 
Supine,  eg.  ‘  venio  visum  urbem/  where  visum  is  really 
a  Verbal  Noun  placed  in  the  Acc.  after  venio  (like 
rus,  domum),  and  itself  governing  an  Accusative. 

*  When  using  it,  observe  the  Sequence  of  Tenses,  64. 


Ambulans,  dum  ambulat, 

cecidit 

Balbus  puer  Athenas  mis¬ 
sus  est 

Homo  levis  est,  nedum  ( or 
ne  dicam)  improbus 


Par.  73.]  CONJUNCTIONS  OF  PURPOSE.  87 

N.B. — In  Construction  (1),  which  is  by  far  the  most 
common,  be  careful  to  observe  the  Sequence  of  Tenses. 

I  have  come  THAT  I  may  Veni  (1)  ut  capiam,  (2)  ad 

take  the  city  capiendam,  (3)  capiendi 

-  causa,  (4)  capturus, 
(5)  captum,  urbem 

We  have  seen  above  (Paragraph  45)  that  the  Latins 
like  to  give  prominence  to  a  Negative,  eg.  nisi  for  if .  .  . 
not.  In  the  same  way  : 

Rule — ‘  That  .  .  .  not  ’  denoting  purpose  is 
generally  represented  by  ‘ne,’  or  more  rarely 
‘  ut  .  .  .  ne  ’  :  and  so,  instead  of  ‘  ut  nemo,’ 
you  should  write  ‘  ne  quis  ’ ;  instead  of  ‘  ut 
nunquam/  ‘ne  quando.’* 

O  that!  is  rendered  in  Latin  by  utinam,  ‘(I  desire) 
that  indeed ,  &c/  eg.  ‘utinam  veniat/ ‘  (I  desire)  that  he 
may  indeed  come.’  Wishes  about  the  past  are  useless. 
Hence  1 

Rule — ‘  Utinam  ’  with  the  Present  Sub¬ 
junctive  introduces  wishes  that  can  be,  with 
the  Past  Subjunctive,  wishes  that  cannot  be, 
realized. 

73.  ‘To/  various  meanings  of.  To  presents  many 
difficulties  to  the  beginner.  Take  for  example,  ‘  I  eat  to 
live/  Here  ‘  toTive  ’  is  not  a  Present  Infinitive  by  deri¬ 
vation.  It  used  to  be  ‘  to  livcne/ where  to  meant  toward , 
and  livene  ( living )  was  a  Gerund,  eg.  ‘  I  eat  to  Live  ’  = 
‘  I  eat  toward  living /  Hence  : 

Rule — Whenever  ‘  to  ’  before  a  verb  de¬ 
notes  purpose,  it  is  not  to  be  translated  by 
the  Latin  Infinitive. 


*  This  applies  only  to  that  followed  by  may,  might,  and  denoting  purpose. 


88 


'to: 


[Par.  73. 


vivendi  causa 


I  eat  TO  LIVE 


Vescor  <  ut  vivam 

(  ad  vivendum 


J  come  TO  SEE 


Venio 


visum 

visurus 


When  therefore  is  to  live  to  be  rendered  vivere  ?  Only 
when  *  to  live  is  really  a  Noun  and  means  living ,  as  : 


Velim  vivere 
Vivere  jucundum  est 


I  should  like  TO  LIVE 
To  live  is  pleasant 


Now  take  ‘  I  promise  to  cornel  That  means  ‘  I  promise 
comingl  Yes,  but  the  coming  is  future  ;  and  though  we 
have  no  Future  Participle,  the  Latins  have,  and  can  say 
e  I  promise  myself  to  be  about  to  cornel 

Rule — After  1 1  hope,’  ‘  I  promise,’  turn 
*  to  ’  by  the  Latin  Future  Participle  Active. 

I  promise ,  hope ,  to  come  Promitto,  spero,  me  ven¬ 


turum 


Statuo,  in  animo  mihi  est, 
venire 


I  determine ,  propose ,  to 
come 


t  also ,  Constituo  me 

venturum 


N.B. — 1 1  hope  that  it  is  so  ’  =  ‘  spero  rem  ita  se  habere.’ 

Sometimes,  where  to  conveys  to  our  ears  no  distinct 
notion  of  purpose,  nor  of  consequence,  the  Latins  seem  to 
find  the  notion  : 

I  determine  TO  (in  SUCH  A  Constituo  ut  veniam 
WAY  that  I  may)  come 

*  Here  the  to  is  redundant,  improperly  added  the  sign  of  the  Inf.  To, 
in  Early  English,  was  used  like  ad  in  Latin,  before  the  Gerund.  1'he  simi¬ 
larity  of  the  Inf.  liven  to  the  Gerund  livene  (which  was  a  Dative  form) 
caused  the  two  to  be  confused  ;  and,  inflections  being  lost,  the  to  was  impro¬ 
perly  transferred  to  the  Inf.,  even  when  there  was  no  notion  of  purpose. 


rar.  73.] 


4  to: 


89 


The  best  kind  of  worship  is 
TO  worship  ( such  that 
we  worship')  God  with 
purity  of  mind 

It  is  the  way  with  men  TO 
envy  their  superiors 


Cultus  deorum  optimus  est 
ut  eos  pura  mente  vene¬ 
remur 

Mos  est  hominum  ut 
superioribus  invideant. 
(Their  custom  is  such 
that ,  &*c.) 


* 1  happened  to  see  him  ’  seems  to  be  a  confusion  be¬ 
tween  ‘  I  happened,  happed ,  or  lighted  on  seeing  him/  and 
‘  it  happened  to  me  to  see  him.’  The  Latins  use  the  latter 
construction  with  ut,  ‘contigit  mihi  ut  hominem  viderem/ 

Rule — Use  ‘ut’  after  ‘contingit,’  ‘accidit,’ 
*  evenit,’  ‘  fit,’  &c. 


N.B. — After  verbs  of  asking,  commanding ,  advising , 
and  striving ,  to  is  rendered  by  ut  with  the  Subjunc¬ 
tive.  It  is  easy  to  see  that,  in  ‘  I  command  you  to  go/  to 
go  may  be  regarded  as  independent  of  what  precedes,  and 
as  equivalent  to  ‘  in  order  that  you  may  go/  ‘  impero  tibi 
ut  eas  ’ ;  or  els e  yau-to-go  may  be  regarded  as  an  Objec-_ 
tive  clause,  ‘  your  going /  after  ‘  /  command/  ‘jubeo  te 
ire.’  Hence: 

Rule — 

With  ask,  command,  advise  and  strive, 

By  ut  translate  Infinitive  ; 

But  not  so  after  jubeo,  nor 
After  the  Verb  Deponent  conor. 

To  after  an  Adjective  modified  by  enough,  e.g.  not 
good  enough ,  or  after  fit,  worthy,  conveys  a  notion  of 
purpose  or  result,  and  may  therefore  be  rendered  by  ut 
or  by  qui  ( i.e .  ut  is)  with  the  Subjunctive. 

He  is  not  fit  for  you  TO  Non  dignus  est  quo  cum 
converse  with  (i.e.  ut  cum  eo)  collo¬ 

quaris 


90 


#  to: 


[Par.  73. 


The  Adjective  is  sometimes  implied  in  the  : 

I  am  not  the  (suitable)  ?nan  Non  is  sum  qui  (ut  ego) 

TO  commit  such  a  fault  hanc  culpam  admittam 

To  denoting  purpose  and  following  the  Object*  of  a 
Transitive  Verb,  is  often  rendered  by  the  Relative  fol¬ 
lowed  by  the  Subjunctive. 

I  sent  men  TO  ask  for  Misi  (homines)  qui  {i.e.  ut 
peace  ii)  pacem  peterent 

To  after  too  is  expressed,  in  Latin,  by  a  periphrasis. 
‘He  is  too  kind  to  hate’  means  ‘ for  the  purpose  of 
hating,  he  is  too  kind/  But  the  expression  is  slovenly 
and  liable  to  ambiguity.  What  is  the  meaning  of : 

‘  Too  fond  to  rule  alone  ’  ? — PoPE.t 

It  might  mean -‘too  foolishly  affectionate  torule  alone/ 
but  it  is  intended  to  mean  ‘too  fond  of  ruling.’  To 
avoid  the  ambiguity  that  might  attend  such  sentences 
as  ‘nimis  clemens  est  ut  irascatur  or  ad  irascendum/  the 
Latins  say,  ‘  he  is  kinder  than  that  he  could  (or,  than  a 
man  that  could)  be  angry/  ‘  dementior  est  quam  ut  or 
quam  qui  possit  odisse/ 

They  came  too  late  TO  be  of  Serius  advenere  quam  qui 
any  use  possent  prodesse 

To  often  means  ‘  as  regards' X  in  (1)  ‘He  was  the  first 
to,'  (2)  ‘  I  am  glad  to /  ‘  1  am  sorry  to /  &c.  In  (1)  is,  was, 
&c.  is  inserted  for  emphasis  in  English,  but  is  not  required 
in  Latin.  In  (2)  to  is  rendered  by  quod,  or  sometimes,  as 

*  The  Object  is  sometimes  understood  in  Latin, 
t  Compare 

*  but,  for  a  calm  unfit, 

Would  steer  too  nigh  the  sands  to  boast  his  wit.* 

Dryden. 

J  *  To  sue  to  live,  I  find  I  seek  to  die, 

And  seeking  death  find  life.' 

Measure  for  Measure ,  iii.  i.  43. 

Here,  to  sue  means  in  suing,  and  corresponds  to  seeking.—  Shakespearian 
Grammar,  Paragraph  357. 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 


91 


Pax.  74.  J 


in  (1),  the  English  Infinitive 
Verb. 

Cato  was  the  first  TO  speak 

I  was  glad  TO  find  that 
you  were  i?i  good 
health 


becomes  the  Latin  principal 

Cato  primus  dixit 

Gaudebam  quod  te  intellexi 
bene  valere,  or ,  libenter 
intellexi 


To  also  means  as  regards  or  in,  after  shameful ,  wonder¬ 
ful ,  incredible,  easy,  pleasant ,  honourable ,  and  is  sometimes 
rendered  by  the  so-called  Passive  Supine,  e.g.  ‘  mirabile 
dictu,’  ‘  wonderful  zzz-the-saying.’ 

Dictu,  factu,  gustatu,  auditu,  cognitu,  visu,  inventu, 

and  others  are  thus  used. 


74.  The  English  Present  Participle  often  expresses 
more  than  mere  simultaneousness,  and  therefore  can¬ 
not  often  be  rendered  by  the  Latin  Present  Participle. 
It  often  implies  some  Conjunction  ;  but  what  Conjunction 
is  implied,  it  is  not  always  easy  to  determine.  The  loose 
and  ambiguous  use  of  the  Present  Participle  is  a  defect  in 
English. 

N.B. — The  meaning  of  the  Participle  must  be  deter¬ 
mined  by  the  context.  When  the  Principal  Verb  is  in 
the  Past  or  Present  Tense,  the  Participle  often  means 
'  although  ’  or  ‘  since  * ;  when  the  Principal  Verb  is  in  the 
Future  Tense,  the  Participle  often  means  ‘if.’  This  also 
applies  to  Verbals  preceded  by  Prepositions  :  see  Par.  75. 


Knowing  (since  you 
know)  this,  why  do  you 
ask  more  questiojis  ? 

Knowing  (although  he 
knew)  that  it  had  been 
forbidden ,  he  neverthe¬ 
less  ventured  to  come 
Finding  (as  soon  as,  or, 
IF  he  finds )  that  he  is 
unwelcome,  he  will 
return 


Quae  quum  scias  cur  plura 

quaeris  ? 

Quamvis  sciret  id  vetitum 
esse,  ausus  est  tamen 
venire 

Hic  simul  atque  (or  si 
modo)  intellexerit  se 
haud  expectatum  venire, 
redibit 


92  VERBALS.  [Par.  75. 

Sciens  would  mean  simply  *  in  the  state  of  knowing/  or 
1  at  the  time  of  knowing/ 

The  Relative  is  often  to  be  supplied  before  a  Participle 
in  English,  e.g.  1  the  soldiers  (that  were)  remaining  in  the 
town,  as  well  as  those  (that  were)  e7icamped  outside/  This 
Relative  must  be  expressed  in  Latin.  (See  Par.  58.) 

75.  Tbe  English.  Verbal  gives  great  flexibility  to  our 
language.  It  is  a  great  advantage  to  be  able,  by  merely 
affixing  -ing,  to  construct  an  abstract  Noun  out  of  any 
Verb.  The  English  Verbals  have  very  few  corresp07iding 
Latin  Verbals,  e.g.  tactus,  touching ;  auditus,  equitatio 
(Pliny). 

When  the  English  Verbal  is  the  Subject  or  Object,  it 
is  often  equivalent  to  an  Infinitive  : 

Walking  is  healthier j  but  Quamvis  ambulare  mihi 

I p7'efer  RIDING  plus  prosit,  malo  tamen 

equitare 

We  cannot  say  (though  Shakespeare  could),  ‘  the  taking 
a  city/  Why  not  ?  Because  the,  to  our  ears,  converts  the 
Verbal  into  a  mere  Noun,  requiring  of  after  it.  In  the 
same  way  the  Latins  could  not  say  ‘  venio  ad  visum  urbem/ 
because  the  ad  made  visum  too  much  like  a  Noun.  They 
therefore  omitted  ad.  For  the  same  reason  they  did  not 
like  to  say  ‘  ad  videndum  urbem/  But  in  this  case,  instead 
of  omitting  ad  to  retain  the  Verbal  force  of  videndum, 
they  retain  ad  and  change  videndum  into  the  Adjective 
videndam. 

When  the  Gerund  is  governed,  not  by  a  Preposition, 
but  by  a  Noun,  eg.  ‘consilium  videndi/  the  Genitive 
(which  may  be  either  Possessive  or  Objective)  does  not, 
like  a  Preposition,  Nounify  the  Gerund  so  as  to  prevent 
it  from  having  its  Verbal  force.  We  can  therefore  write 
either  ‘  urbem  videndi,  or  urbis  videndce  consilium/ 

Rule — After  Prepositions,  if  the  Verb  has 
an  Object,  use  the  Gerundive  and  not  the 
Gerund,  e.g.  1  in  victore  (not  -em)  laudando/ 


Par.  75.] 


VERBALS. 


93 


The  Gerund  (or  Gerundive,  if  combined  with  a  Substan¬ 
tive)  follows  ad,  for j  de,  concerning ;  in,  in  ;  ob,  on  ac¬ 
count  of ;  rarely  inter,  and  other  ^Prepositions . 

Note  the  different  renderings  of  the  same  Preposition 
and  Verbal,  varying  with  the  difference  of  Tense  in  the 
principal  Verb. 


Verbals  after  Prepositions. 

I  have  no  doubt  about  your 
RECOVERING 

Write  to  him  about  par¬ 
doning  the  prisoners 

As  TO  FORGIVING  him,  I 
shall  do  710  such  thing 

I  am  s7iiprised  AT  your 
OBJECTING 

Hds  clever  AT  FINDING 
weak  points 

Besides  singing  she  ca7i 
dance 

What  do  you  mean  BY 
THREATENING  7)ie  t 

BY  breaking  down  the 
bridge,  he  cut  off  the 
supplies  of  the  enemy 

By  Getting  up  early,  I  ex¬ 
pect  to  f,7iish  my  work 

One  gains  style  by  reading 
speeches  and  poems 

By  persevering  he  won 

During,  the  building  of 
the  bridge 


Non  dubito  quin  futurum 
sit  ut  convalescas 

Fac  scribas  homini  de  venia 
captivis  danda 

Quod  me  rogas  (rogant)  ut 
ignoscam  homini,  omni¬ 
no  non  faciam 

Miror  quod  adversaris 

Satis  acutus  est  in  investi¬ 
gandis  erroribus 

Mulier  non  solum  canit  sed 
edam  saltare  didicit 

Quid  vis  quod  mihi  haec 
minaris  ? 

Ponte  rescisso  hostem  a 
commeatu  interclusit 

Si  prima  luce  surrexero, 

spero  me  opus  perfectu¬ 
rum 

Elegantia  loquendi  legen¬ 
dis  oratoribus  et  poetis 
augetur 

Perseverando  vicit 

Inter  faciendum  pontem 


94  VERBALS.  [Par.  75. 


/  shall  punish  you  for 
doing  this 

Socrates  was  condemned 
FOR  CORRUPTING,  SO 
people  said,  the  young 
meti 

You  have  no  cause  FOR 
COMPLAINING 

The  ram  was  useful  FOR 
battering  down  the 
wall 

It’s  a  shame  to  take  money 
FOR  GIVING  a  verdict 

I  was  detei'red  by  him  FROM 
COMING 

From  equivocating  you 
will  come  TO  LYING 

Hoping  is  very  different 

FROM  BELIEVING 

In  keeping  your  word  you 
will  be  consulting  your 
brother’s  interests 

You  are  late  in  coming 

In  doing  this  I  have  no 
object  but  the  good  of 
the  country 

Vh'tue  is  manifested  IN 
despising  pleasure 

In  blaming  him  you  blame 
me 

I  am  IN  FAVOUR  OF  RE* 
TREATING 


Te,  qui  hoc  feceris,  poena 
afficiam 

Socrates  damnatus  est  quod 
juventutem  corrumperet 
(Subjunctive  expresses 
‘  so  people  said  ’) 

Non  habes  cur  querzCris 

Aries  utilis  erat  ad  muros 

conquassandos 

Turpe  est  pecuniam  ob  rem 
judicandam  accipere 

Hic  me  quominus  venirem 

deterruit 

Tergiversatus^  mox  men¬ 
tieris 

Tergiversatio  mendacii 
parens 

Sperare  aliud,  aliud  et  dis¬ 
simillimum  est  credere 

Si  fidem  praestiteris  \  fratri 
Fidem  praestando  \  con¬ 
sules 

Sero  venis 

Quod  autem  hoc  facio  nul¬ 
lam.  habeo  causam  prae¬ 
ter  rei-publicae  commo¬ 
dum 

In  contemnenda  voluptate 

virtus  cernitur 

Quum  illum  culpas,  me 
quoque  culpas 

Equidem  recedendum  esse 
censeo 


Par.  75.] 


VERBALS. 


95 


Instead  of  crying  you 
laugh 


r  Tantum  abest  ut  lacrime- 

1  ris,  ut  rideas 
I  Rides  quum  debeas  iacri- 
[  mari 


Instead  of  crying,  work 

This  comes  OF  helping 
you 

I  am  tired  OF  HEARING 
the  same  thing  a  thou- 
sand  times 

The  idea  OF  your  ever  im¬ 
proving  ! 

I  despair  OF  finding  it 

On  hearing  this  he 
blushed 

IVhat  will  you  do  ON 
HEARING  this  ? 

He  is  bent  ON  MAKING 
money 

Since  hearing  from  you 
I  found  that  I  was  mis¬ 
taken 


Age,  omissis  lacrymis,  ten¬ 
ta  quid  possis 

Quod  tibi  subvenire  volui 

hunc  habeo  fructum 

Taedet  me  eadem  milliens 

audire 


Tu  ut  unquam  te  corrigas  ! 
(i.  e.  io  suppose  that ,  &*c.) 

Despero  me  id  reperturum 
esse 


His  auditis  /  ertl- 

Quse  quum  audivisset  )  buit 


Quse  si  intellex¬ 
eris 

Simul  atque  bsec 
intellexeris 


tan- 

fa- 


Attentus  est  ad  divitias 
accumulandas 


Postquam  tuas  literas  acce¬ 
pi,  intellexi  me  errorem 
fecisse 


Since  setting  out  from 
home  f  have  not  received 
one  letter 

He  failed  THROUGH  at¬ 
tempting  too  much 

No  one.  ever  sees  him  with¬ 
out  calling  him  a  trai¬ 
tor 


Litteras,  ex  quo  tempore 
domo  profectus  sum, 

ne  singulas  quidem  ac¬ 
cepi 

Ne  modica  quidem  tenuit, 
quia  ad  altiora  tendebat 

Nemo  illum  unquam  adspi- 
cit  quin  proditorem 
compellet 


[Par.  76. 


VERBALS. 


96 

He  speaks  well  WITHOUT 
PERSUADING  anybody 

You  will  make  mischief 
WITHOUT  meaning  it 

I  should  not  have  come  here 
without  obtaining  a 
safe  conduct 

He  was  condemned  WITH¬ 
OUT  BEING  heard 

Without  openly  accusing 
him  you  insinuate  char¬ 
ges  against  him 

We  returned  without  EF¬ 
FECTING  anything 


Bene  loquitur,  neque  tamen 
cuiquam  persuadet 

Quamvis  imprudens,  certa¬ 
mina  seres 

Quod  nisi  mihi  hostis  fidem 
dedisset  tuto  me  reditu¬ 
rum,  nunquam  huc  ve¬ 
nissem 

inauditus  damnatus  est 

Ita  hominem  non  accusas 
ut  tamen  operte  insimu¬ 
les 

Re  infecta,  rediimus 


N.B. — The  Gerundive,  e.g.  ferendum,  means,  in  Cicero, 
‘  that  which  is  to  be,  ought  to  be,  borne.’  In  later  writers, 
it  sometimes  means  ‘  that  which  may  be,  can  be,  borne.’ 
But,  when  preceded  by  non  or  vix,  ferendum  is  used  even 
by  Cicero,  to  mean  bearable ,  tolerable . 


76.  The  Subject  of  the  principal  Verb,  in  a  sentence 
containing  a  subordinate  sentence,  should  often  come  first 
in  Latin,  where  it  does  not  come  first  in  English  : 


When  Themistocles  had 
secured,  the  safety  of 
Greece  by  the  destruction 
of  the  Persian  fleet,  he 
wrote  a  letter  to  Xerxes 


Themistocles,  postquam, 

Persarum  classe  deleta, 
Graeciam  servavit,  epis¬ 
tolam  ad  Xerxen  misit 


Thus  the  clumsy  repetition  of  he  is  avoided. 


77.  Parentheses.  The  introduction  of  a  Pronoun  may 
sometimes  be  avoided,  and  the  unity  of  the  sentence  and 
prominence  of  the  principal  Subject  may  still  be  preserved, 
by  the  use  of  a  parenthesis.  This  is  very  commonly  used 


Par.  78a.]  ORATIO  OBLIQUA.  97 


to  describe  some  minute  circumstance  connected  with 
the  principal  Subject  or  Object  : 


He  accordingly  gave  orders 
to  the  whole  army  to 
march  to  Nuceria. 

IT  was  about  ten  miles 

off. 

If  the  clause  had  not  been 
immediately  after  Nuceria,  so 
of  ambiguity,  ilia  or  oppidum 
sity  inserted. 


Itaque  suis  imperavit  ut 
Nuceriam — aberat  au¬ 
tem  fere  decem  millia 
passuum— cum  omnibus 
copiis  contenderent. 

introduced  parenthetically, 
as  to  avoid  the  possibility 
would  have  been  of  neces- 


78.  In  Oratio  Recta  the  words  of  the  speaker  are  used. 

The  usual  method  of  introducing  a  speech  in  Oratio 
Recta  is  to  leave  the  previous  sentence  unfinished,  sup¬ 
plying  the  verb  inquit  (not  dixit  nor  respondebat)  after 
the  first  emphatic  word  of  the  speech. 

Then  Crassus  SAID  1 1  for  Tum  Crassus  ‘Equidem’ 
my  part  don’t  believe  inquit  ‘  non  credo  ’ 

it ’ 

Why  not  f  ’  /  answered  Cui  ego  ‘Quare’  inquam 

‘  non  credis  ?’ 

Sometimes  inquit  is  omitted,  the  previous  sentence 
being  still  left  incomplete.  ‘ Tum  Crassus  “Equidem  non 
credo.”’ 

78a.  in  Oratio  Obliqua,  that  must  be  placed  before  the 
English  words  of  the  speaker,  which  are  consequently 
changed  in  person  and  tense.  Crassus  said  that  he  did 
not  believe  it. 

The  following  changes  take  place  in  Latin.  The  first 
is  so  obviously  necessary  that  it  requires  no  reason  : 

(a)  Rule — All  principal  Verbs  (that  is, 
Verbs  directly  making  a  statement)  are  trans¬ 
formed  from  the  Indicative  to  the  Infinitive, 
retaining  their  original  Tenses. 


H 


98  ORATIO  OBLIQUA.  [Par.  78a. 

(Ile  said)  *  I  don’t  be-  (Dixit)  e  se  neque  *  credere 
LIEVE  it,  I  never  DID  neque  credidisse  neque 

believe  it,  and  I  7iever  unquam  crediturum  ’ 

SHALL  believe  it ’ 

Notice  that  there  is  no  change  in  Latin  to  correspond 
to  the  English  change  from  the  Present  in  Oratio  Recta 
to  the  Past  in  Oratio  Obliqua,  1 1  do  not  believe,’  ‘  He 
said  that  he  did  not  believe.’  In  Latin  the  Verbs, 
though  changed  in  Mood,  retam  their  original  Tenses. 
The  Latin  language  has  not  the  English  power  of  re¬ 
presenting  the  Simple  Past  after  dixit.  ‘  Negavit  se  cre¬ 
didisse  ’  would  mean  ‘  He  said  that  he  had  not  believed, ,’ 
i.e.  in  Oratio  Recta  1 1  have  not  believed.’  Remember 
therefore  to  translate  :  1  He  said  that  he  DID  not  believe  ’  by 
‘  Negavit  se  credere.’ 

The  Future  Infinitive  dees  not  exist  in  all  Latin  Verbs, 
e.g.  not  in  most  Inceptives,  such  as  mitesco,  crebresco, 
cresco.  We  must  therefore  use  a  periphrasis 

He  said  that  (it  WOULD  Dixit  fore  ut  urbs  cresceret 
COME  TO  PASS  THAT) 
the  city  would  increase 

Remember  that  the  Passive  Future  Infinitive,  captum 
iri,  means  ‘  that  there  is  a  going  to  capture,’  captum  being 
an  indeclinable  Supine.  Consequently  captum  cannot 
agree  with  urbem  in  : 

He  said  that  the  city  WOULD  Dixit  urbem  captum  iri 
BE  TAKEN 

Conditional  Tenses  of  the  Apodosis  (page  83,  note)  that 
are  in  the  Subjunctive  in  O.  Recta,  are  rendered  by  the 
Fut.  Partic.  with  esse  or  fuisse  in  O.  Obliqua; 

*  These  words  are  supposed  to  come  in  the  middle  of  a  speech  at  a  dis¬ 
tance  from  dixit :  if  they  were  close  to  dixit,  you  would  have  negavit 
for  dixit  neque. 


Par.  78a.] 


ORATIO  OBLIQUA. 


99 


Oratio  Recta. 

Ad  haec  Caesar  :  ‘  Si ’  in¬ 
quit  ‘intra  decimum  diem 
urbem  tradidissetis  e- 
quidem  ab  oppugnandis 
muris  temperavissem  ’ 

Si  modo  ’  inquit  ‘  frater 
mihi  adesset,  gauderem’ 

'  Si  quid  ’  inquit  ‘  habeam, 
dem’ 


Oratio  Obliqua. 

Ad  haec  Caesar  respondit : 
‘  Se,  si  intra  decimum 
diem  urbem  tradidis¬ 
sent,  ab  oppugnandis 
muris  n  temperaturum 
fuisse  ’ 

‘  Si  frater  sibi  adesset,  se 
gavisurum  fuisse.’  (Un¬ 
fulfilled  condition) 

‘  Se,  si  quid  baberet  datu¬ 
rum  esse.’  (Fulfilment 
of  condition  possible) 


{0)  In  the  Oratio  Obliqua,  the  writer  does  not  guarantee 
any  statement  of  the  speaker  as  a  fact ,  and  therefore  has 
no  right  to  use  the  Indicative.  Note  therefore  the  fol¬ 


lowing  changes  : — 

Oratio  Recta. 

Turn  alter  ‘  Misi  ’  inquit 
‘servos  quos  babui  fide¬ 
lissimos  ’ 

Cui  Balbus  ‘Veniam’  inquit 
‘  si  potero,  quanquam 
hodi-e  aegroto;  sin  mi¬ 
nus,  veniet  frater,  qui 
decem  tantum  millia 
passuum  abest  ’ 

Ille  respondens  ‘Si’  in¬ 
quit  ‘Cicero  occisus 
erit,  omnes  moriemur’ 

Rule — Subordinate 
Indicatives  following 
1  quanquam,’  ‘  quum,’ 
Recta,  are  changed 
Oratio  Obliqua. 


Oratio  Obliqua. 

‘  Se  misisse  servos  quos 
{in  Jus  opinion )  fidelissi¬ 
mos  baberet  ’ 

‘  Se  venturum,  si  posset, 
quanquam  illo  die 
aegrotaret;  sin  minus, 
venturum  fratrem,  qui 
decem  tantum  millia 
passuum  abesset’ 

‘  Si  Cicero  occisus  esset, 
se  omnes  morituros 
esse  ’ 

Indicatives,  that  is, 
‘  qui,’  ‘  quia,’  ‘  quam,’ 
‘  etsi,’  ‘  si,’  in  Oratio 
into  Subjunctives  in 


h  2 


100 


ORATIO  OBLIQUA. 


[Par.  78a. 


Where  quiret  is,  nam  is,  it  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  Infinitive 
in  Oratio  Obliqua:  thus  ‘  qui  abest’ in  the  la- 1  example  but  mie,  above,  might 
have  been  rendered  in  Oratio  Obliqua  by  ‘  quem  (nam  6um)  abesse.' 
Beginners  had  better  not  use  this  licence. 


(c)  Put  he  said  that ,  before  an  Imperative,  e.g.  run^ 
licet  curras,  fac  curras.  Run  will  then  have  to  be 
changed  into  he  ought  to  run ,  currendum  esse,  or  he 
might,  should,  run  (licere  ut)  curreret,  (faciendum  esse 
ut)  curreret.  Hence  : 

The  general  cried,  1  Press  on,  do  not  give  ground! 

Oratio  Recta.  Oratio  Obliqua. 

Imperator  ‘  Instate ’  inquit,  Imperator  milites  hortatur 
‘  nolite  pedem  referre  ’  {Hist.  Pres.) ‘  Instarent, 

nollent  pedem  referre,’ 
i.e.  ‘  let  them  press  on/ 

Rule — Imperatives  in  Oratio  Recta  are  to 
be  turned  into  Imperfect  Subjunctives  in 
Oratio  Obliqua. 


(d)  A  question  in  the  Second  Person,  e.g.  1  What  are 
you  doing?’  may  naturally  become  a  Dependent  Inter¬ 
rogative,  when  preceded  by  he  said ,  which  implies  he 
asked.  Thus : 

‘  Why  are  you  advancing  !  1  Cur  progrederentur?  Cur 

Why  did  you  not  sound  non  receptui  cecinis- 
the  retreat  P  sent  ?  ’ 

Rule — Questions  in  the  Second  Person 
•are  to  be  rendered  in  the  Oratio  Obliqua  by 
the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 


Questions,  being  asked  about  oneself,  or  about  an  absent  person,  are  very 
often  not  asked  for  information,  but  to  express  emotion.  They  are  then 
called  questions  of  appeal.  If  ‘  Why  do  I  delay  ?’  were  rendered  in 
Oratio  Obliqua  ‘  (Interrogavit)  cur  moraretur,’  it  would  seem  toa  formal  and 
frigid,  as  though  it  were  a  question  really  asked  for  information  Hence  the 
Latins  prefer  to  render  such  passionate  questions  by  the  Infinitive.  ‘  He  said 
he  was  delaying  there—  (and)  why  ?’  ‘  Cur  se  morari  ? 


Par.  78a.] 


ORATIO  OBLIQUA . 


101 


*  Why  are  we  lingering  ‘  Cur  se  ibi  morari  ?  Cur 

here  ?  Why  is  our  abesse  imperatorem  ?  ’ 

general  absent  ?  ’ 

The  Future  Indicative  must  be  rendered  by  the  Future 
Infinitive  : 

i  WILL  the  enemy  DELAY  ?’  ‘  Num  hostem  moraturum 

esse  ? ’ 

Rule — Questions  in  the  First  and  Third 
Person  are  to  be  rendered  in  the  Cratio 
Obliqua  by  the  Accusative  of  the  Person, 
and  the  Infinitive  of  the  Verb. 

(e)  Pronouns,  Personal  and  Demonstrative,  together 
with  their  derived  Adverbs,  will  usually  be  changed. 

Of  course  ego,  tu,  nos,  and  vos  cannot  possibly  find  a 
place  in  Oratio  Obliqua ;  me  must  be  changed  into  se,  tu 
into  ille,  &c.-  Further,  ‘  I  stand  here,’  said  he,  ‘  for  justice/ 
will  be  changed  into  ‘  He  said  that  he  stood  there  for 
justice.’  Thus,  hie  will  be  changed  into  ille,  nunc  into 
turn,  hie  (adv.)  into  ibi ;  and  hodie  would  be  regularly 
changed  into  illo  die.  But,  for  vividness’  sake,  the  de¬ 
monstrative  forms  may  sometimes  be  retained. 

(/)  He ,  him,  his,  are  often  ambiguous  in  an  English 
speech  reported  (as  in  newspapers)  in  Oratio  Obliqua.  The 
Latin  distinction  between  se  and  ilium  diminishes  but 
does  not  remove  the  ambiguity. 

The  general  rule  is  that  se  refers  to  the  speaker,  thus  : 

*  Let  them  not  distrust  his  ‘Ne  de  sua  vigilantia  du- 

watchfulness  ’  bitarent  ’ 

But,  when  suus  is  wanted  to  refer  to  the  Subject  of 
some  subordinate  Verb,  eg.  of  dubitarent  above,  then 
ipse  is  sometimes  used  antithetically  to  refer  to  the 
speaker,  thus  ; 


102  ORATIO  OBL/QUA.  [Par.  78a. 

*  Let  thein  not  distrust  their  ‘  Ne  de  sua  virtute  aut  de 

own  valour  or  his  ipsius  vigilantia  de- 
ivatchfulness  *  sperarent  ’ 

At  other  times,  the  ipse  emphasizes  a  subordinate  Sub¬ 
ject  to  shew  that  suus,  se  refer  to  that  Subject,  and  not  to 
the  principal  Subject. 

He  said  1  he  ( the  speaker )  ‘  Se  monere  illum  ut  se 

advised  him  to  save  ipse  servaret’ 
himself * 


(g)  The  sentence  preceding  a  speech  in  Oratio  Obliqua 
is  often  completed,  and  the  speech  begun  with  the  Verb  of 
speaking  implied  and  not  expressed.  ‘  Imperator  in  hunc 
modum  milites  hortabatur.  “  Instarent ;  quid  morarentur  ? 
Praesto  esse  victoriam.”’ 

The  following  is  an  example  of  the  differences  between 
Oratio  Recta  and  Oratio  Obliqua  : — 


Oratio  Recta. 

Imperator,  milites  hortatus 
‘  Instate  ;  inquit.  ‘  Cur 
nunc  v  hic  moramur  ? 
Num  hostis  morabitur  ? 
Nolite  dubitare  de  ves¬ 
tra  virtute  aut  de  mea  vi¬ 
gilantia.  Si  ignavus  fuis¬ 
sem,  vos  deseruissem, 
urbs  enim,  ut  opinor, 
non  facile  capietur,  ne¬ 
que  frigoris  vis  mitescet. 
Sed  nolo  ignavia  vitam 
emere.  Quod  impera¬ 
torem  decuit  id  perfeci ; 
quod  si  pro  patria  mo¬ 
riar,  mortem  non  invitus 
oppetam’ 


Oratio  Obliqua. 

Imperator  milites  in  hunc 
modum  hortabatur. 
‘  Instarent.  Cur  tum 
se  ibi  morari?  Num 
hostem  moraturum  es¬ 
se  ?  N  ollent  de  sua  vir¬ 
tute  aut  de  ipsius  vigi¬ 
lantia  dubitare.  Si  ig¬ 
navus  fuisset,  se  illos 
deserturum  fuisse  :  ur¬ 
bem  enim,  (sic  se  opi¬ 
nari)  non  facile  captum 
iri,  neque  fore  ut  frigoris 
vis  mitesceret.  Sed 
nolle  (se)  ignavia  vitam 
emere.  Quod  impera¬ 
torem  deceret,  id  se 
perfecisse  :  quod  si  pro 
patria  moreretur,  mor* 
tem  non  invitum  oppe* 
titurum  ’ 


Par  79.] 


METAPHORS . 


103 


79.  Metaphors. 


An  English  Metaphor,  e.g.  this  thought  struck  me,  need 
not,  and  often  cannot,  be  rightly  translated  literally  into 
Latin.  To  say  (as  Quintilian  says)  feriit,  would  mean  for¬ 
cibly  impressed ,  whereas  we  wish  to  convey  little  more  than 
suggested  itself,  occurred  to  me.  The  right  translation 
would  be  *  hoc  mihi  in  mentem  venit/ 

Many  English  words  and  expressions  are  metaphorical, 
though  we  use  them  so  commonly  that  we  have  almost 
forgotten  the  latent  metaphor,  e.g.  ‘  at  its  height /  ‘  on  the 
; point  of/  ‘  on  the  gromid  that/  ‘  the  scene  (i.e.  stage)  of  his 
disgrace/  ‘  at  this  juncture,  stage /  Many  other  recog¬ 
nized  Metaphors  can  be  rendered  by  other  Latin  Meta¬ 
phors,  but  not  literally. 

The  pupil  must  gain,  by  observation  and  practice,  the 
power  of  rightly  rendering  English  Metaphors  into  Latin. 
The  following  are  a  few  instances  selected  to  shew  meta¬ 
phorical  diversity  in  the  two  Languages  : — 


I  am  being  TORTURED  and 
WORN  OUT  with  sor¬ 
row 

All  the  rest  SPRINGS  from 
what  has  been  men¬ 
tioned  before 

At  all  hazards ,  we  must 
make  everything  SUB¬ 
SERVIENT  to  seeing  this 
poor  girl  respectably 
married 

They  vented  their  anger 
on  me 

T  maintain  that  there  is  an 
INFLUENCE  that  may  be 
exerted  by  God  on  men 

Sensual  pleasure,  you  see , 
is  TRANSITORY 


Lacerat  animum  atque 
exest  aegritudo 

Ex  his  quae  dicta  sunt  re¬ 
liqua  nascuntur  omnia 

Quoquo  modo  se  habebit, 
illius  misellae  et  matri¬ 
monio  et  famae  servien¬ 
dum  erit 

In  me  iram  profuderunt 

Dico  esse  quod  a  diis  ad 
hominum  vitam  perma¬ 
nare  possit 

Fluit  igitur  voluptas  cor¬ 
poris 


f04  METAPHORS.  [Par.  79 


Greece  swarms  with  ora¬ 
tors 

No  one  can  APPROACH 
Africanus  in  military 
distinctio7i 


If  it  were  expediency  that 
KNITS  friends ,  a  C07n- 
piete  chatige  of  expe- 
die7icy  would  part  them 

When  one's  a7iger  has 
COOLED 

The  co7ispiracy  is  AT  ITS 
HEIGHT 

When  77iatters  GO  ON  as  we 
would  have  the77i 

Low  though  the  laws  are 
FALLEN,  yet  they  will 
one  day  rise 

/BURY  77iyself  in  7iiy  books 

I  AM  KILLING  TWO  BIRDS 
WITH  ONE  STONE 

The  teaching  of  Pythagoras 
HAS  spread  even  here 

A ffeciion  springing  fro77i 
this  0 right  gradually 
diffuses  itself  abroad 

Mark  what  this  kind  of 
argu7ne7it  leads  to 

The  su7H77ter  was  wasted 

/  have  been  deeply 
grieved  by  your  two 
letters 


Redundat  Graecia  ora¬ 

toribus 

Nemo  ad  Africanum  in 
militari  laude  aspirare 
potest.  (Only  with 

negatives  classically 
used  in  this  sense) 

Si  utilitas  conglutinaret 
amicos,  eadem  commu¬ 
tata  dissolveret 

Restinctis  jam  animorum 
incendiis 

Ardet  acerrime  conjuratio 

Rebus  ad  voluntatem  nos¬ 
tram  fluentibus 

Leges,  quamvis  sint  demer¬ 
sae,  emergent  tamen  ali¬ 
quando 

Literis  me  involvo 

Duos  parietes  de  eadem 
fidelia  dealbo.  Or, 

Una  mere  ede  duas  res 
assequor 

Huc  etiam  permanavit  Py¬ 
thagorae  doctrina 

Caritas,  hinc  nata,  serpit 
sensim  foras 

Attende  quo  serpat  hoc  ar¬ 
gumenti  genus 

Effluxit  aestas 

Binae  tuae  literae  valde  me 

momorderunt 


METAPHORS 


Par.  79*3 

His  character  had  been 
tainted,  or  rather 
BLASTED  by  that  con- 
demnation 

The  musician  did  not  TAKE 
the  FANCY  OF  the  peo¬ 
ple 

I  fear  the  attraction  of 
habit  may  prove  too 
powerful  for  us 

What  a  SEA  of  evils  ! 

These  reminiscences  have 
a  sort  of  painful  STING 


10 5 

Ex  damnatione  illa  semina¬ 
tus,  vel  potius  ambus¬ 
tus  evaserat 

Tibicen  frigebat  ad  popu¬ 
lum  (friget  often  means, 
loses  influence ) 

Vereor  ne  sestus  nos  con¬ 
suetudinis  absorbeat 

Quanta  miseriarum  incen¬ 
dia 

Haj  recordationes  morsu 
quodam  dolorem  effi¬ 
ciunt 


It  will  be  seen  from  the  preceding  examples  that  the 
simple  Metaphors  borrowed  from  heat ,  cold ,  flowing , 
breathing,  breaking ,  &c.  are  more  common  in  Latin  than 
in  English. 

Latin  is  also  more  exuberant  than  English  in  the  use 
of  Metaphors.  Note  the  use  of  different  Verbs  expressive 
of  Metaphors,  where  in  English  we  should  use  one  Verb, 
sometimes  varying  the  Metaphor  in  Nouns. 


I  have  lived  an  ho7iourable 
and  prosperous  life 

As  I  hope  to  prosper ,  gen¬ 
tlemen,  I  can  assure  you 
that  I  have  never  allowed 
myself  to  be  prevented 
from  ministering  to  the 
necessities  or  interests  of 
anyone ,  either  by  the  at¬ 
tractions  of  leisure ,  or 
by  the  alluring  voice  of 
pleasure ,  or  even  by  the 
necessity  of  sleep 


Viximus  honestissime,  flo¬ 
ruimus 

Ita  vivo,  judices,  ut  a  nul¬ 
lius  unquam  me  tempore 
aut  commodo,  aut  otium 
meum  abstraxerit,  aut 
voluptas  avocarit,  aut 
denique  somnus  retar- 
darit 


io6  HYPERBOLE.  [Par.  8a 

Compare  the  verbose  English  and  the  terse  Latin  in  the 
following  example  : — 

Give  us  a  man  that  will 
not  suffer  himself  to  be 
■worn  out  by  petty  annoy¬ 
ances. ,  or  prostrated  by 
terror ,  a  man  that ,  in  the 
pursuit  of  any  object , 
will  not  give  way  to 
feverish  desire ,  nor  suf¬ 
fer  his  will  to  waste  its 
strength  in  eager  useless 
longings — and  we  have 
here  the  wise  7n.an  that 
is  the  object  of  our  search 

The  English  is  a  great  deal  too  verbose  ;  and  it  would 
be  more  idiomatic  though  less  literal  to  use  one  Verb  and 
say,  ‘  that  will  not  give  way  to  the  feelings  of  petty  irri¬ 
tation,  or  sudden  terror,  or  feverish  desire,  or  useless 
longing  .  .  / 

Personifications  are  more  common  in  English  than  in  Latin.  “  In  English 
prose  you  might  find  a  phrase  like  this,  4  In  the  presence  of  purity  so  spotless, 
detraction  hid  its  head,  and  envy  ceased  to  whisper.’  This  way  of  speaking 
of  ideas  as  if  they  were  things  ....  is  quite  foreign  to  the  simplicity  and 
straightforwardness  of  Latin  Prose.”  * 


Si  quis  nec  tabescat  moles¬ 
tiis,  nec  frangatur  ti¬ 
more,  nec  sitienter  quid 
expetens  ardeat  deside¬ 
rio,  nec  alacritate  futili 
gestiens  deliquescat,  is 
sit  sapiens  quem  quaeri¬ 
mus 


80.  Hyperbole,  like  Metaphor,  must  not  always  be 
literally  rendered.  For  example,  it  does  not  follow,  be¬ 
cause  we  use  a  thousand  to  denote  an  indefinitely  large 
number,  that  the  Latins  should  use  mille.  It  would  be 
interesting  to  ascertain  why  they  use  sexcenti  in  the  fol¬ 
lowing  example  : 

I  prefer  a  thousand  deaths  Malo  sexcenties  mori 


Bigg’s  Easy  Exercises  in  Latin  Prose. 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


f 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


I  asked  him  to  come  to  Rome 

l  have  asked  him  to  stop  at 
Rome 

When  will  you  ask  him  to 
set  out  froyn  Rome  ? 

She  is  ten  years  old 

There  are  some  who  have 
said  this  was  not  true 

When  a  boy ,  I  was  charmed 
with  this  book 

They  sent  ambassadors  to 
ask  for  peace 

You  surely  don’t  ask  why 
we  did  this 

A  slave  of  mine 

I  wrote ,  that  you  might 
hear  the  sooner 

I  shall  soon  know  what  you 
wish 

/  That  wicked  Tullius  has 
caused  me  to  despair 


Rogavi  illum  ut  Romam  ve¬ 
niret 

Rogavi  illum  ut  Romae  ma> 

n6at 

Quando  illum  rogabis  ut 

Roma  proficiscatur  ? 

Decem  annos  nata  est  ■—» 

Sunt  qui  negaverint  hsee 
vera  esse 

Hic  liber  mihi  puero  valde 
placuit.  (Omit  When ) 

Legatos  miserunt  qui  pacem 

peterent 

Num  rogas  cur  hoc  feceri¬ 
mus  ? 

Quidam  e  servis  meis 

Scripsi,  quo  citius  intelli- 
geres 

Mox  sciam  quid  velis 

Tullius,  homo  improbissi¬ 
mus,  effecit  ut  desperem. 
(Or,  improbus  ille  Tul¬ 
lius) 


no 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


The  town  of  Corioli  was 
taken 

The  heat  was  so  great  that 
almost  all  of  us  were  un¬ 
able  to  go  on 

Why  don't  you  enjoy  what 
you've  bought  f 

It  is  your  interest  that  there 
should  be  peace  j  it  is  his 
that  there  should  be  war 

He  threatens  his  own  brother 
with  death 

Ten  days  after  the  capture  of 
Thebes 

I  fear  he  will  not  come 

I  will  teach  you  music 

You  are  being  too  much 
indulged 

Dorlt  spare  the  prisoners 


/  I  feared  he  would  come  too 
soon 

He  recommended  his  brother 
to  escape 

,  He  has  recommended  his 
own  children  to  remain 
at  Rome 

'  The  celebrated  Alexander 

Send  me  the  most  beautiful 
flowers  you  have 


Corioli  oppidum  captum  eat 
(not  capti  sunt) 

Tantus  erat  calor  ut  fere 
omnes  progredi  non  pos¬ 
semus 

Cur  non  emptis  frueris  ? 

Tua  interest  pacem,  illius 
bellum  esse 

Suo  ipsius  fratri  mortem 

minatur 

Decimo  die  post  captas 
Thebas 

Vereor  ut  veniat 

Musicam  te  docebo 

Nimis  tibi  indulgetur  — 

Noli  captivis  parcere.  (Or, 
ne  peperceris,  but  not 
ne  parcas  in  prose) 

Veritus  sum  ne  citius  veniret 

Fratri  suo*  ut  fugeret  sua¬ 
sit 

Liberis  suis  suasit  ut  Romae, 
maneant 

Alexander  ille  — 

Cura  ut  ad  me  ( not  mihi) 
flores  mittas,  quos  ha* 

'  beas  pulcherrimos 


*  Suo  may  be  omitted  where  the  omission  leaves  no  doubt  whose  brother 
is  meant. 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


in 


He  reduced  the  Gauls  to 
subjection 

In  six  days  we  came  from 
Athens  to  Samos 

V  What  have  I  to  do  with 
you  ? 

I  shall  go  back  to  my  ho?ne 
in  Italy 

There  are  some  who  hate  me 

.  Having  made  this  answer , 
he  went  home 

He  came  sooner  than  he  was 
expected 

,  He  has  long  been  desirous 
of  death 

Ccesar  was  killed  by  a  friend 


The  battle  took  place  in  a 
narrow  valley 

This  was  done  by  an  enemy 
and  not  by  chance 

He  will  see  to  the  gathering 
of  the  flowers 

In  front  was  the  sea ,  in  our 
rear  the  ene?ny 


He  made  a  long  speech  with¬ 
out  persuading  anyone  to 
forgive  him 


Gallos  suae  ditionis  fecit 

Sexto  die  Athenis  Samum 

venimus 

Quid  mihi  tecum  est  ?  *» 

Domum  in  Italiam  redibo 

Sunt  qui  me  oderint  — 

Hoc  responso,  domum  abiit 

Opinione  celerius  venit 

Jamdudum  mortem  optat  — 

Caesarem  interfecit  amicus. 
(Note  the  emphatic  posi¬ 
tion  of  amicus,  and  the 
use  of  Latin  Active  for 
English  Passive) 

In  angusta  valle  pugnatum 
est 

Hoc  non  casu  sed  ah  inimico 
factum  est.  (a  or  ab  with 
living  agent) 

Flores  carpendos  curabit 

l 

Mare  a  fronte,  a  tergo  hostes 
imminebant.  (Note  the 
similarity  of  the  Extremes 
and  Means  in  a  Latin  An¬ 
tithesis) 

Orationem  longam  habuit, 
neque  tamen  ulli  persua¬ 
sit  ut  sibi  ignosceret 
* 


£12 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


We  shall  set  out  from  Car¬ 
thage  about  the  7th  of 
May 

How  many  are  there  of  you 
in  London  f 


Carthagine  circiter  Nonas 
Maias  proficiscemur 

Quot  Londinii  habitatis  ? 


Truth  is  the  parent  of  what 
is  expedient  as  well  as  of 
what  is  just 

Philosophy  ought  to  have 
been  your  master 


/ 

/ 


/ 


/ 


I  hoped  you  would  be  con¬ 
quered 

It  is  not  like  a  brave  man  to 
lose  one's  presence  of  mind 

I  was  the  first  to  be  asked  to 
give  an  opinion 

.  We  ought  not  to  have  been 
kepi  in  ignorance  of  this 


I  was  somewhat  disturbed  by 
the  shouts 

Three  hundred  of  us  are 
prepared  to  conquer  or 
die 

I  am  persuaded  that  what 
you  say  is  false 

^  He  took  and  burned  the 
bridge 

■  It  rarely  happens  that \  &*c. 


Veritas  non  justi  solum  sed 
etiam  utilitatis  mater  est. 
(Not  utilis,  on  account  of 
the  ambiguity) 

Philosophia  tibi  magistra 
esse  debuit.  (Not  magis- 
ter,  because  Philosophia 

is  feminine) 

Speravi  te  victum  iri  or  fore 
ut  vincereris 

Non  est  fortium  perturbari 
Ego  primus  rogatus  sum 

sententiam 

Non  debuimus  hoc  (de  hac 
re)  celari.  (Note,  the 
Noun  requires  de,  the 
Neuter  Pronoun  does  not) 

Clamor  me  nescio  quid  per¬ 
turbaverat 

Trecenti  parati  sumus  aut 
ad  vincendum  aut  ad  mo¬ 
riendum.  (Not  paramur) 

Persuasum  est  mihi  te  falsa 

dicere 

Pontem  captum  incendit 

Raro  evenit  ut,  &c.  (Rare  = 
thinly ,  far  apart) 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


ri3 


My  sister  married  his  brother , 
ana  my  brother  his  sister 

When  he  performs  a  judge's 
duties  rightly ,  then  and 
not  till  then  will  he  be 
worthy  of  praise 

Has  he  been  persuaded  to 
speak  the  truth  f 

He  imputed  my  virtue  to  me 
as  a  fault 

With  you  for  our  leader we 
will  not  shrink  even  from 
famine 

She  promises  not  to  say  one 
word 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  for 
me  to  go 

No  foet  ever  thought  anyone 
superior  to  himself 

He  is  the  best  jumper  in  the 
school 

I  cannot  help  fearing 

I  a?n  different  from  what  I 
once  was 

The  better  you  are  {one  is), 
the  happier  you  are  ( one 
is) 

Hardly  anyone  saw  him  die 


Soror  mea  fratri  ejus  nupsit, 
frater  autem  sororem  ejus 

in  matrimonium  duxit 

Hic,  quum  judicis  munere 
recte  fungetur,  tum  de¬ 
mum  laude  dignus  erit 

Num  ei  persuasum  est  ut 
vera  dicat  ? 

Virtutem  meam  mihi  vitio 
dedit 

Te  duce,  ne  famem  quidem 
pertimescemus 


Promittit  se  ne  verbum  qui¬ 
dem  emissuram  esse 

Necesse  est  me  ire,  or, 
Necesse  est  eam 

Nemo  poeta  ullum*  quam  se 
meliorem  putavit 

Discipulorum,  si  quis  alius, 
ille  optime  saltat 

Facere  non  possum  quin  ti-  — 

meam 

Alius  sum  atque  olim  fui 


(  Quo  quis  melior,  eo  beatior 
<  Ut  r-nisque  optimus,  ita 
(  beatissimus 


—  J 


Nemo  fere  eum  morientem  V  ^ 


vidit 


Most  of  us  think  more  of  our  Plerique  nostras  pluris  quam 

own  virtues  than  of  those  amicorum  virtutes  aesti- 

of  our  friends  mamus 

*  Ullum  (Adj.)  =  any  {poet),  quenquam  (Pron.)  =  any  man.  See 
Madvig,  Par  -xj,  3,, 

J 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


1 14 

He  is  the  best  painter  in  all 
Italy 

A  thousand  soldiers 

Ten  thousand  soldiers 

Are  you  equal  to  bearing  this 
great  burden  ? 

Anyone  ca?i  boast  that  he  is 
more  leanied  than  a?iy  one 
of  his  own  pupils 


The  hope  of  taking  booty 

There  were  some  that  pitied 
the  prisoners 

You  ought  to  have  respected 
him  as  a  father 

I  have  a  hundred  horsemen 
and  six  hundred  infantry 

1  expect  the  city  will  be  cap¬ 
tured 

I  fear  that  something  has 
happened  amiss ,  and  that 
some  ?nisfortune  is  trou¬ 
bling  you 

The  spirit ,  the  purpose ,  and 
the  feeling  of  a  country 
are  expressed  in  its  laws 


He  said  that  I  was  not  wise , 
you  say  that  I  was  not 
honest 


Pictor  est  qualis  in  tota  Ita* 
lia  nemo 

Mille  milites 

Decem  millia  militum 

Num  es  tanto  oneri  ferendo  *2 
(Or,  par  es) 

Cuilibet  promptum  est  gloriari 
se  doctiorem  esse  quam 
quemquam  e  discipulis 
suis.  (Quemquam  by 
attraction,  see  Par.  63) 

Spes  capiendae  praedae 

Erant  qui  captivorum  mise¬ 
rerentur 

Debuisti  eum  aeque  ac  pa¬ 
trem  vereri 

Sunt  mihi  centum  equites, 
pedites  autem  sexcenti 

Credo  urbem  captum  iri.  (Or 
vereor  ne,  or  spero,  but 
notfexpecto)  & 

Yereor  ne  quid  mali  accid¬ 
erit,  ne  quod  infortunium 
te  perturbet 

Animus  et  consilium  et  sen¬ 
tentia,  civitatis  in  legibus 
posita  est.  (Verb,  being 
Singular,  agrees  with 
nearest  Subject) 

I  lie  negavit  me  sapientem 
esse,  tu  autem  negas  me 
probum  fuisse.  (Note  the 
Pres.  Infin.  after  a  Verb 
speaking  in  the  Past)' 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS .  115 


He  pities  no  one 


I  have  lost  the  book  you  gave 
me 

The  quarrels  of  lovers  should 
be  treated  as  a  renewal  of 
love 


My  wife  and  son  are  dead 


I  will  do  it  if  I  can 


The  general in  his  usual 
forgetfulness ,  passed  by 
the  tents  of  the  sentries 


/ 


I  yesterday  asked  him  to  come 
to  Rome 


The  man  that  is  freed  from 
debt  is  void  of  care 

,  I  am  sorry  to  hear  this 

Many  great  disadvantages 

He  will  come  with  speed  from 
Carthage 


For  ten  years  he  filled  the 
office  of  a  judge 

I  have  asked  him  to  come  ana 
see  me  to-morrow 


Nullius  ( not  neminis)  mise¬ 
retur 

Perdidi  librum  quem  mihi 
dedisti,  or 

Quem  mihi  dedisti  librum 
eum  perdidi 

Amantium  irse  amoris  inte¬ 
gratio  putanda  est.  (Or, 
change  order,  and  write 
putandse  sunt  amoris  in¬ 
tegratio) 

Uxor  mea  et  filius  mortui 
sunt 

Hoc  si  potero  ( not  possum) 
faciam 

Imperator,  ut  erat  mente  im- 
memori*  {not  e)  vigil-um 
{not  ium)  tentoria  praete¬ 
riit 

Rogavi  eum  heri  ut  Romam 
veniret 

Qui  sere  alieno  liberatus  est, 
is  est  cura  vacuus 

Invitus  haec  audio  — 

Multa  et  magna  incommoda 

Carthagine  celerrime  (or 
summa  celeritate,  but  not 
celeritate)  veniet 

Decem  annes  judicis  munere 
fungebatur 

Rogavi  eum  ut  cras  veniat 
me  visum 


*  Par  and  memor  always  have -i  j  pauper,  princeps,  superstes* 

compos,  always  -e,  and  dives  and  ales  generally  -e.  It  would  seem  that 
those  Adjectives  that  are  used  as  Nouns,  prefer  the  -e.  The  Noun  par  makes 
Abl.  pare.  So,  use  sapiente  for  the  Noun,  sapienti  for  the  Adjective. 

1  2 


Ii6 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


I  will  help  you  once  and  no 
more 

I  am  surprised  at  this 

Sicily  is  opposite  Carthage 

\ 

I  was  once  walking  in  a 
meadow 

Why  do  you  oppose  me  to  no 
purpose  f 

/  1  shall  die  and  no  one  will 
help  me 

I  shall  abiae  by  my  opinion 
Does  anyone  deny  this  ? 

I  cannot  write  for  weeping 

,  Once  a  king  reigned  over 
Corinth 

Dll  give  all  of  you  a  dena - 

y  t  ?!  r^us  aP^ece 

—  You  are  ten  miles  nearer  the 

city  than  I  am 

—  Trust  as  many  men  as  pos¬ 

sible 

They  will  run  on  their  several 
errands 

,  He  came  to  such  a  pitch  of 
folly  that  he  did  not  believe 
even  his  own  father 

— “  One  uses  one  medicine,  an¬ 
other  another 

He  came  as  soon  as  possible 


Semel,  non  saepius  tibi  subve¬ 
niam 

Hoc  mihi  admirationem  mo¬ 
vet.  (Not  bloc  miror) 

Sicilia  e  regione  est  Cartha¬ 
gini  (or  Carthaginis) 

Forte  in  prato  ambulabam 

Cur  mihi  frustra  adversaris  ? 
(Not  opponis) 

Moriar  nec  qnisquam  mihi 
succurret.  (Not  et  nemo) 

In  sententia  manebo 

Num  quis  hoc  negat  ? 

Free  lacrimis  scribere  non 
possum 

dim  ( or  quondam)  rex  Corin¬ 
tho  praeerat  (regno  is 
Intransitive) 

Singulos  denarios  vobis  om¬ 
nibus  dabo 

Decem  tu  millibus  propius 

quam  ego,  ab  urbe  abes 

Quam  plurimis  Crede 

Suum  quisque  iter  current 

Eo  stultitiae  venit  ut  ne  suo 
quidem  patri  crederet 

Alius  alia  medicina  utitur 

Quam  celerrime  venit 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


II7 


Everyone  trusts  me ,  but  no 
one  will  trust  him 

He  is  more  dutiful  (pius) 
than  his  brother 

Everyone  trusts  me ,  but 
without  any  affection 


I  bww  you  will  grow  cold 
—  None  of  you  will  pardon  me 

The  country  is  ruined 

Therds  no  doubt ,  citizens , 
that  he  pities  you 

The  house  is  finished 


This  will  be  a  protection  to 
me 

I  have  warned  you  of  this, 
and  have  left  nothing  Mi- 
done  that  may  be  of  use 
to  you 

Some  run  one  way,  others 
another 

My  name  is  Tullius 

He  died  ten  years  after  the 
— -  founding  of  the  city 

The  town  had  been  sur¬ 
rounded  by  the  enemy 
with  a  ditch 


Omnes  (not  quisque  nor  om¬ 
nis)  mihi,  nemo  autem 
illi  credit 

Magis  est  quam  frater,  pius 
(not  piior) 

Omnes  mihi  credunt  sed  sine 
ullo  amore.  (Autem  adds 
something  different,  sed 
something  limiting  orcon- 
tradictory) 

Scio  fore  ut  frigescas 

Nemo  vestrum  (not  vestri) 
milii  ignoscet 

Actum  est  de  re-publica 

Non  est  dubium,  cives,  quin 
vestri  (not  vestrum)  mi¬ 
sereatur 

^Edes  perfectae  sunt  (not 
perficiuntur  :  sedes  sing. 

means  a  temple) 

Hoc  erit  mihi  praesidio 

Hoc  te  monui,  nec  quidquam 
praetermisi  quod  tibi  utile 
esse  possit 

Alii  alio  currunt 

Nomen  mihi  est  Tullio  (or 
Tullius) 

Decem  annis  post  urbem  con¬ 
ditam  obiit 

Hostis  oppido  fossam  {or 

oppidum  fossa)  circum¬ 
dederat 


cL.  . 


Ii8  MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


I  sold  for  eightpence  what  I 
had  bought  for  two  shil¬ 
lings 

/  He  was  condemned  to  death 

Will  you  sell  your  life  for 
two  shillings  a  day  ? 

I  do  not  mind  being  without 
riches 

This  was  the  man  that  de¬ 
ceived  me 

I  have  ascertainea  that  the 
fellow  is  wasting  his 
time 

The  sun  is  many  times  larger 
than  the  earth 

He  inflicted  punishment  on 
his  (own)  son 

/  For  ten  years  I  have  been  a 
pupil  of  Socrates 

A  peck  of  corn  was  at  that 
time  worth  three  sesterces 


Quod  tribus  denariis  emeram 
id  uno  vendidi 

Capitis  damnatus  est 

Num  trinis  in  diem  denariis 
sanguinem  vendes  ? 

Facile  careo  divitiis 

Hic,  hic  inquam  me  fefellit 

Compertum  habeo  hominem 
tempus  terere 

Multis  partibus  major  est  sol 
quam  terra 

Filium  suum  poena  affecit 

Decimum  jaxp  annum  Socra¬ 
tem  audio 

Tritici  modius  id  temporis 
ternis  sestertiis  erat 


You  ought  to  have  answered 
before  . 


Troy  was  besieged  by  the 
Greeks  for  ten  years 

On  our  journey  we  were  at¬ 
tacked  by  robbers 

I  prefer  fighting  on  horseback 
to  fighting  on  foot 


I  think  very  highly  of  the  ex¬ 
cellent  Tullius 


/ 


>  He  threw  himself  at  the 
generals  feet 


Antea  te  mihi  respondere 
oportuit  (or  debuisti  mihi 
respondere) 

Trojam  decem  annos  Graeci 
oppugnaverunt 

Latrones  nos  ex  itinere  ad¬ 
orti  sunt 

Malo  ex  equo  quam  pedes 
(adj.)  (or  pedibus)  pug¬ 
nare 

Tullium,  virum  optimum, 
plurimi  facio 

imperatori  ad  pedes  se  pro¬ 
jecit 


MISCELLANEOUS  LDIOMS.  1 19 


-  I  heard  him  say  that  was 
not  true 


/ 

/ 


You  ought  to  have  seen  him 
jinnp 

Why  may  I  not  be  grave  ? 


Why  did  you  build  this  great 
bridge  over  this  small 
river  ? 

It  is  possible  you  have  made 
a  mistake 

When  we  say  “  in  Virgil? 
we  do  not  necessarily 
mean  u  in  the  VEneid ” 

My  dear  friend  Balbus  is 
near  the  city 

You  and  he  promised  to  be 
present 

Trees  flourish  in  the  country , 
men  in  town 


Horse ,  foot  and  baggage ,  all 
were  destroyed 


He  blamed  me  without  ascer¬ 
taining  what  I  had  done 

With  his  usual  folly ,  the 
fellow  denied  it  all ,  and 
that  too  in  my  presence 

The  enemy  at  once  sounded  a 
retreat.  When  he  heard 
thisy  the  general  bade  his 
men  also  retire 


/ 


With  your  usual  kindness 
you  will  pardon  his  folly 


Audivi  illum  negantem  id 
verum  esse 

Oportuit  te  illum  saltantem 
spectare 

Cur  mihi  non  licet  esse  se¬ 
vero  ? 

Cur  in  tam  parvo  flumine 
pontem  tantum  fecisti  ? 

Fieri  potest  ut  errorem  fece¬ 
ris 

Si  quando  “  apud  Virgilium  ” 
dicimus, non  continuo  “in 
yEneide  ”  dicere  volumus 

Balbus,  vir  mihi  amicissi¬ 
mus,  prope  ab  urbe  abest 

Et  tu  et  ille  promisistis  vos 
adfuturos  esse 

Ruri  arbores,  in  urbe  homi¬ 
nes  vigent 

Equites,  pedites,  impedimen¬ 
ta,  omnia  periere  (where 
“  and”  is  to  be  omitted) 

Me  culpavit,  neque  quid  fe¬ 
cissem  intellexit 

Homo,  cujus  est  stultitisej 
omnia,  idque  me  coram, 
infitiabatur 

Hostes  confestim  receptui 
canunt.  Quod  quum  au¬ 
divisset  imperator,  suis 
quoque,  ut  recedant,  im¬ 
perat 

Tu,  pro  tua  clementia,  ho¬ 
mini  stulto  veniam  dabis 


120 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


As  long  as  you  are  detained 
there  you  will  never  be 
free  from  annoyance 

He  died  not  long  afterwards 

l  You  have  more  than  four 
hundred  horsemen  with 
you 

They  paid  tribute  once  every 
ten  years 

I  propose  to  set  out  about  ten 
in  the  morning 

Anybody  is  believed  by  fools 

f 

As  to  the  prisoners  they  are 
brought  back ,  and  no  one 
has  escaped 

But  no  more  of  this ,  now  I 
return  to  mare  serious 
matters 

He  was  alike  treacherous  in 
peace  and  in  war 

He  is  two  inches  taller  than 
any  of  his  brothers 

By  the  advice  of  Aristides 
they  rejected  the  plan 

No  one  but  the  consul  heard 

,  him  take  the  oath 


Quoad  ibi  detineberis,  nun¬ 
quam  molestiis  carebis 

Haud  ita  multo  post  obiit 

Quadringentos  equites  am¬ 
plius  tecum  habes 


Decimo  quoque  anno  tribu¬ 
tum  pendebant 

(Consilium  est  mihi) 

(In  animo  habeo  J 

quartam  horam  proficisci 

Cuilibet  (or  cuivis)  credunt 

stulti 


circiter 


Quod  attinet  ad  captivos, 
reducti  sunt  nec  quisquam 

effugit 

Sed  haec  hactenus  :  nunc  ad 
graviora  redeo 


Tam  in  pace  quam  in  bello 
infidus  erat 

Duabus  unciis  procerior  est 
quam  quisquam  ex  fratri¬ 
bus 

Consilium,  auctore  Aristide, 

rejecerunt 

N  emo  praeter  consulem  illum 
jurantem  audivit 


Boys  are  persuaded  more 
easily  than  old  men 

He  asked  which  was  the 
younger  of  you 

The  man  is  good ,  but  by  no 
means  wise 


Pueris  facilius  quam  senibus 
persuadetur 

Rogavit  uter  vestrum  minor 
esset  natu 

Vir  est  ut  bonus  ita  nequa¬ 
quam  sapiens 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


ill 


I  am  on  the  point  of  giving 
battle  to  the  enemy 

The  two  brothers  exhorted 
one  another 

When  did  you  hear  that  she 
sings  f 

What  town  do  you  see  yonder, 
pray  ? 

I  am  vety  intimate  with  the 
few  friends  I  have 

Everything  that  was  of  value 
was  burned 

One  can  scarcely  avoid  cold 
in  one’s  house ,  imich  less 
in  the  open  air 

He  is  a  good ,  nay  an  excellent 
man 

Every  legion  was  divided 
into  ten  cohorts 


Everyone  hates  ingratitude 

You  are  all  but  last 

I  did  not  know  whether  he 
would  not  remain 

Take  care  not  to  trust  him 

Next  year  he  was  returned 
by  Cambridge  for  the 
second  time 

Nothing  is  so  narrow-minded 
and  paltry  as  avarice 


In  eo  sum  ut  praelium  cum 
hostibus  committam 

Fratres  alter  alterum  hortan¬ 
tur 

Quando  audivisti  illam  ca¬ 
nere  ? 

Quod  tandem  oppidum  ibi 
prospicis  ? 

Amicis  quos  habeo  paucos 
familiarissime  utor 

Quidquid  erat  pretiosi  con¬ 
crematum  est 

Vix  in  tectis  frigus  vitatur, 
nedum  sub  divo 

Vir  est  bonus,  immo  potius 
egregius 

Omnes  legiones  (or  legio 
quseque)  in  denas  cohortes 
divisae  sunt.  (Not  omnis 
legio) 

Omnes  beneficii  immemo- 
rem  oderunt.  (Par.  3 . a ) 

Minimum  abest  quin  ultimus 

sis 

Nesciebam  an  mansurus  es¬ 
set.  (Non  to  be  omitted) 

Cave  (ne)  credas  homini 

Proximo  anno  Cantabrigien- 
ses  illum  iterum  dele¬ 
gerunt 

Nihil  est  tam  angusti  animi 
tamque  parvi  quam  amare 
divitias 


122 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS, 


I  could  scarcely  keep  from 
/  venting  my  anger  on  him 

I  don't  know  whether  you 
will  do  as  I  do 

Do  you  know  when  he  will 
come  f 

Mow  ever  wise  he  may  be,  he 
needs  friends  to  help  him 

A  Ithough  I  am  absejit,  I  like 
to  hear  what  is  going  on 
at  hojne 

We  were  almost  perishing 

When  I  was  recovering  from 
my  illness  I  was  one  day 
attacked  by  a  bull 

While  this  was  happening 
the  ene?ny  fled 

Whether  this  is  true  or  false 
it  does  not  at  all  trouble 
me 

When  I  approached  the 
/  whelps  the  lion  rushed  at 
me 

Ife  asked  me  whether  this 
was  t7'ue  or  false 

I  perceived  the  kindness  with 
which  he  received  me 

You  have  done  well  in 
coming  here 


Vix  me  continui  quin  iram  in 
eum  evomerem 

Nescio  an  non  eadem  atque 

ego  facturus  sis.  (Non 

inserted) 

Scisne  quando  venturus  sit  ? 

Quamvis  sit  sapiens,  opus 
est  illi  amicis  qui  illi  sub¬ 
veniant 

Quanquarn  absum,  libenter 
tamen  quid  domi  fiat  au¬ 
dio 

Minimum  abfuit  quin  perire¬ 
mus 

Quum  ex  morbo  convalesce¬ 
bam  forte  taurus  me  pe¬ 
tiit.  (Quum  temporal) 

Dum  haec  geruntur  (pres.) 
hostes  terga  verterunt 
(perf.) 

Haec,  sive  vera  sunt  sive  fal¬ 
sa,  nibil  ( or  nullo  modo) 
me  movent 

Quum  ad  catulos  accederem 
leo  me  petiit.  (Quum  cau¬ 
sal) 

Interrogavit  me  utrum  haec 
vera  an  falsa  essent 

Intellexi  quanta  me  benevo¬ 
lentia  exciperet.  (Not 
benevolentiam  qua) 

Bene  fecisti  quod  huc  venisti 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


123 


He  answered  he  had  sent  the 
moiiey  to  Lilybceum  a  few 
days  ago 

He  died  four  years  after  he 
returned  home 


I  heard  that  the  enemy  had 
marched  twenty  miles  by 
night  and  was  now  close 
at  hand 

We  accepted  the  terms  on 
condition  that  the  guards 
should  be  removed 


He  is  not  a  fit  person  for  you 
/  to  converse  with 

y  He  is  too  brave  to  fear  death 


The  soldiers  were  seized  with 
/  fear  that  Cicero’s  wound 
might  be  fatal 

You  are  acting  as  foolishly 
as  if  you  were  questioning 
a  deaf  man 

Ccesar  asked  his  soldiers  why 
they  distrusted  their  own 
valour  or  his  e?iergy 


We  must  wait  till  the  elec¬ 
tions  are  held  two  months 
/  hence 


Respondit  se  Lilybaeum  pau¬ 
cis  abhinc  diebus  argen¬ 
tum  misisse 

Anno  quarto  postquam  do¬ 
mum  redierat  mortuus  est. 
(N.B. — The  pluperfect  is 
allowed  after  postquam 
when  the  length  of  the 
interval  is  expressed) 

Intellexi  hostem  viginti  millia 
noctu  progressum  esse  et 

jam  adesse.'  (Not  nunc, 
not  adfuisse) 

Ita  accepimus  conditiones 
ut  custodes  removerentur 

Non  est  aptus  quocum  collo¬ 
quaris 

Fortior  est  quam  qui  ( or 
quam  ut)  mortem  timeat 

Pavor  cepit  milites  ne  Cice¬ 
ronis  vulnus  mortiferum 

esset 

Idem  facis  ac  si  surdum  in¬ 
terroges 


Caesar  ex  militibus  quaesivit 
cur  de  sua  virtute  aut  de 
ipsius  diligentia  despera¬ 
rent.  (ipse  referring  to 
the  principal  Subject,  is 
used  in  contrast  to  se  re* 
ferred  to  a  minor  Subject) 

Expectandum  est  nobis  dum 
comitia  duobus  abhinc 
mensibus  habeantur 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


124 

Socrates  was  called  to  trial 
on  the  charge  of  corrupt¬ 
ing  the  youth,  but  in  real- 
/  ity  because  he  had  beco7ne 
suspected  by  those  in 
power 

Instead  of  being  true  it  is  not 
even  probable 

They  grew  alarmed  that  with 
his  changeable  and  artful 
nature  he  might  desert 
them  and  once  more  gain 
the  favour  of  his  country¬ 
men 

Not  till  now  did  the  citizens 
disperse  to  their  homes 

If  you  help  me  I  shall  be  re- 
/  joicbdj  if  not ,  I  shall  not 
take  it  ill 

Will  you  7iot  mform  7ne 
whether  this  is  true  or 
not  t 

Nature  prompts  a7i  infant  to 
love  itself 


Suppose  a  man  is  selling  a 
house  because  of  so77ie 
faults  in  it 

He  said  it  wasTit  like  G7'eek 
manners  for  wome7i  to 
dine  with  men 


Socrates  in  judicium  vocatus 
•est  quod  corrumperet  ju¬ 
ventutem,  re  tamen  ipsa 
quia  in  suspicionem  ma¬ 
gistratibus  venerat 

Tantum  abest  ut  hoc  verum 
sit  ut  ne  verisimile  quidem 
sit 

Pertimescebant  ne,  homo  va¬ 
fer  et  inconstans,  ab  ip¬ 
sis  descisceret  et  cum 
suis  in  gratiam  rediret 


Tum  demum  cives  suam  quis¬ 
que  domum  digressi  sunt 

Si  mihi  subvenies  gaudebo  ; 
sin  minus,  haud  aegre  fe¬ 
ram 

Nonne  me  certiorem  facies 
utrum  haec  vera  sint  an- 

non  ?  (Or  necne) 

Natura  movet  infantem  ut  se 
ipse  diligat,  (ipse,  quali¬ 
fying  the  Subject  of  a 
clausecontainingse, shews 
that  se  refers  to  the  Sub¬ 
ject  of  the  clause,  not  to 
the  principal  Subject) 

Vendat  vir  aedes  propter  ali¬ 
qua  vitia 

Negavit  moris  esse  Graeco¬ 
rum  ut  in  convivio  viro¬ 
rum  mulieres  accumbe¬ 
rent  {or,  Acc.  and  Inf.) 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


125 


The  general  encouraged  his 
/  soldiers  saying ,  “  Why  do 

you  make  useless  lamen¬ 
tations  ?  Press  on.  Why 
are  we  delaying  here  ? 
Will  not  the  enemy  crush 
us  while  we  delay  ?  If 
you  had  obeyed  nie  before , 
you  would  have  been  in 
safety  by  this  time ,  and 
even  now  you  may  yet  be 
safe.  Be  of  good  courage. 
Soon  the  cold  will  grow 
less  severed 

I  have  often  seen  my  country¬ 
men  walkmg  in  the  busy 
cities  of  A  thens  or  Rome 

/  At  one  time  he  says  this,  at 
another,  something  else 

The  child  hoped  that  the  bird 
would  grow  tame 

Pancetius  praises  Africanus , 
giving  as  a  reason  that 
he  was  moderate 

I  prefer  Alexander  to  Aris- 
tocles ,  not  because  the  fo7‘- 
mer  is  altogether  wise, 
but  because  the  latter  is 
not  wise  at  all 

My  father  blajned  me  for  ?iot 
writing  three  letters  to 
him  in  the  whole  of  a 

year 


Imperator  milites  in  hunc 
modum  hortatus  est,  “  Cur 
inutiliter  plorarent  ?  In¬ 
starent  !  Cur  ibi  se  mo¬ 
rari  ?  Nonne  hostem  se 
morantes  oppressurum 
esse  ?  Si  sibi  antea  pa¬ 
ruissent,  illos  jam  in  tuto 
futuros  fuisse,  salvos 
etiam  tum  esse  posse. 
Erigerent  animos.  Mox 
fore  ut  frigus  mitesceret  ” 


Saepe  meos  cives  Athenis  vel 
Romae,  in  urbibus  cele¬ 
berrimis,  ambulantes  vidi 

Modo  hoc,  modo  illud,  dicit 

Puer  (not  liber  except  in  pl.) 
speravit  fore  ut  avis  mi¬ 
tesceret 

Panaetius  Africanum  laudat 
quod  fuerit  abstinens 

Alexandrum  Aristocli  ante¬ 
pono,  non  quod  ille  sit 
omnino  sapiens,  sed  quia 
hic  est  omnino  non  sa¬ 
piens.  N.B. — sit,  est 

Pater  me  culpavit  quod  per 
totum  annum  non  ad  se 
trinas  literas  misissem, 
(Note  Distributive  with 
literse,  castra,  &C.) 


326  MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


Of  males  as  many  as  10,000 
were  captured 


Zeuxis  and  Polygnotus  did 
not  use  more  than  four 
colours 

Your  advice  is  more  honour¬ 
able  than  expedient 

He  has  perpetrated  an  almost 
unheard-of  crime 

Not  less  than  thirty  horse¬ 
men  were  killed 

All  that  survived  the  battle 
were  take?i  the  next  day 

They  set  out  for  the  bridge , 
which  was  fourteen  miles 

off 

I  am  expected  to  remain 


The  general  exhorted  his  me?i 
as  follows  :  “  Why  do  you 
make  useless  complaints  t 
Press  on  ” 

Don't  despise  a  joke 

» 

Who  was  there  that  did  not 
hate  you  ? 

We  shall  not  be  safe  if  Ci¬ 
cero  is  killed 

Some  law  were  passed,  others 
remained  posted  up 


Virile  secus,  ad  decem  millia 
capta.  (Used  without  al¬ 
teration  in  apposition  to 
all  cases) 

Zeuxis  et  Polygnotus  non 

plus  quam  quatuor  colo¬ 
ribus  utebantur 

Consilium  das  magis  hones¬ 
tum  quam  utile  {or  ho¬ 
nestius  quam  utilius) 

Tantum  non  inauditum  scelus 
patravit 

Haud  minus  triginta  equites 

interfecti 

Si  qui  praelio  superfuerant 
capti  sunt  postridie. 
(Never  omnes  qui) 

Ad  pontem — aberat  autem 
millia  quatuordecirn— pro¬ 
ficiscuntur 

Omnes  confidunt  me  mansu¬ 
rum  esse  {or  postulant 
ut) 

Imperator  milites  hortatus 
“  Cur  1  inquit ,  inutiliter 
ploratis?  Instate!”  (Note 
the  introductory  sentence 
left  unfinished) 

Ne  jocos  sis  aspernatus  (not 
asp  emeris) 

Quis  erat  quin  te  odisset  ? 

Tuti  non  erimus  si  Cicero 
occisus  erit 

Leges  aliae  latae  sunt,  alias  pro¬ 
mulgatae  fuerunt.  (Madv. 
344) 


MISCELLA  NE  0  US  IDIOMS. 


127 


How  few  there  are  that  are 
prepared  to  die  for  their 
country  / 

I  asked  him  what  d clock  it 
was ,  but  he  made  me  no 
reply 

What  is  the  meaning  of  the 
word  pleasure  f 

I  cadt  hope  it  will  be  7ny 
/  good  fortU7ie  to  escape 


He  says  that  we  shall  7iot 
succeed  if  Cicero  is  killed 


I  am  writing  this  letter  on 
the  7  th  of  March ,  a7id  I 
e7it7'eat  you  to  answer  as 
soo7i  as  possible 


Bid  your  friends  collect  with 
/  speed 


After  ofie  or  two  days  he 
called  a  meeting  of  all  the 
surviving  citizens 


What  reaso7i  is  there  why 
your  depa7'tu7'e  should  be 
excused f 

Suppose  you  were  in  my 
position  ? 


Quotus  quisque  est  qui  -  pa¬ 
ratus  sit  ad  moriendum 
pro  patria  ! 

Interroganti  mihi  quota  hora 
esset  nihil  respondit 


Quid  vult  vox  voluptatis  ? 

Sperare  non  possum  fore  ut 
contingat  mihi  evadere. 
(Do  not  use  fut.  part,  of 
compounds  of  tango) 

Negat  rem  nobis  bene  suc¬ 
cessuram  esse  si  Cicero 
occisus  sit.  (Fut.  changed 
to  Subj.  in  dependent 
sentence) 

Has  literas  Nonis  Martiis 
scribebam  atque  oro  te 
ut  quamprimum  rescribas. 
(To  the  reader,  the  writing 
is  past,  the  entreaty  re¬ 
mains  prese7if) 

Amicos  tuos  jube  quam  celer¬ 
rime  convenire.  (Re¬ 
member  that  colligere  is 
Transitive) 

Post  unum  et  alterum  diem 
convocat  si  qui  {or  quid¬ 
quid)  civium  supererant. 
(Or  qui  cives  .  .  .  omnes, 
but  not  omnes  cives  qui) 

Quid  e.st  causse  cur  abeas 

excusatus  ? 


Fac,  quasso,  qui  ego  sum 

esse  te? 


128 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


I  wrote  yesterday  from  Ephe¬ 
sus ,  to-day  I  write  from 
Tralles 

He  is  too  rich  to  be  in  want 
of  money 

See  that  you  sell  half-a- 
dozen  houses 

I  have  no  fault  to  find  with 
old  age 

It  is  said  that  Agesilaus  lived 
to  the  age  of  seventy 

You  will  do  well  to  remem¬ 
ber  the  difference  between 
a  friend  and  a  flatterer 

Czispiusfirom  whom  you  will 
receive  these  two  letters , 
is  useful  to  me  in  many 
ways 

A fter  I  had  spent  the  moiith 
of  May  there ,  we  were 
detamed  from  the  yd  of 
June  to  the  12th  Septem¬ 
ber 

I  shall  not  believe  your  pro¬ 
mises,  unless  you  fulfil 
what  you  have  already 
pro?nised 

It  was  resolved  to  send  am¬ 
bassadors  to  ask  what  was 
the  meaning  of  these  re¬ 
peated  insults 

Yesterday  evening  he  return¬ 
ed  home  to  his  family 


Dederam  Epheso  pridie,  has 
dedi  Trallibus 

Divitior  est  quam  ut  pecuniae 
egeat.  (Ditior  rare  in 

prose) 

Fac  senas  aedes  vendas. 
(Not  sex) 

Nihil  habeo  quod  incusem 
senectutem 

Dicitur  Agesilaus  ad  septua¬ 
gesimum.  annum  vitam 
egisse 

Bene  facies  si  memineris 
quantum  inter  amicum  et 
assentatorem  intersit 

Cuspius,  a  quo  binas  has 
litteras  accepisti,  multis 
in  rebus  mihi  utilis  est 

Postquam  ibi  mensem  Maium 
consumpsi,  ex  ante  diem 
tertium  Nonas  Junias  us¬ 
que  ad  pridie  Idus  Sep¬ 
tembres  tenebamur 

Ita  credam  promissis  si  quae 
jam  promisisti  solveris 


Placuit  legatos  mitti  qui  ro¬ 
garent  quid  vellent  hae 
tot  contumeliae 

Heri,  vesperi  domum  ad  ux¬ 
orem  liberosque  rediit 
(not  familiam) 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS. 


129 


With  what  decency ,  pray , 
can  you  insult  thus  so 
excellent  a  man  as  Tul¬ 
lius ? 

If  he  had  not  run  away,  I 
should  have  helped  the 
poor  man  with  pleasure 

I  came  to  see  you  at  once ,  in- 
asmuch  as  I  had  received 
many  kindnesses  at  your 
hands  , 

This  is  too  good  to  be  true 

You  must  be  ignorant  of  your 
position 

If  I  knew,  I  would  tell 


But  I  should  not  have  time, 
if  I  tided  to  relate  it  all 


No  one  is  so  keen-sighted  as 
/  not  to  be  occasionally  de¬ 
ceived 

Would  that  you  thought  as  I 
did,  or,  since  that  is  im¬ 
possible,  would  that  you 
would  think:  that  I  mean 
well 


Quo  tandem  ore  Tullium, 
virum  egregium  tanta 
contumelia  afficis  ? 

Homini  miserrimo,  nisi  au¬ 
fugisset,  libenter  (not 
leefce,  nor  voluptate)  suc¬ 
currissem 

Statim  veni  te  visum,  ut  qui 
multa  beneficia  a  te  acce¬ 
pissem 

Meliora  haec  sunt  quam  quse 
possint  esse  vera 

Fieri  non  potest  quin  nescias 

quo  in  loco  sis.  (Not  po¬ 
situm,  or  positionem) 

Si  scirem,  dicerem  (I  do 

not  know,  and  my  telling 
is  impossible.  Condition 
regarded  as  impossible) 

Sed  tempus  me  deficiat,  si 
omnia  nunc  narrare  ve¬ 
lim.  (I  might  try,  but  I 
do  not  intend  to.  The 
condition  is  possible ,  but 
will  not  occur) 

Nemo  est  tarn  lynceus  qui 

non  interdum  fallatur 

Utinam  tu  eadem  atque  ego 
sentires,  vel,  si  hoc  fieri 
non  potest,  utinam  cre¬ 
das  me  bene  velle.  (Note 
various  uses  of  think) 

K 


MISCELLANEOUS  IDIOMS . 


130 

Cicero  has  been  banished ,  a 
calamity  that  is  deplored 
by  every  respectable person 

I  shall  leave  nothing  undone 
j  to  banish  the  most  turbu¬ 
lent  citize?is 

He  promised  to  come  on  the 
nth  of  September,  but  did 
not  co7ne  till  the  nth  of 
October 

What  would  you  take  to 
jump  off  this  bridge? 

It  would  have  bee7i  better  to 
have  a7iswered  Yes  or  No 

I  asked  him  whether  he  would 
have  helped  7ne  if  he  had 
bee7i  able 

I  praise  this ,  not  because  it  is 
ho7iourable  but  because  it 
is  useful 

The  e7ie7ny  flock  7'oimd  in  the 
hope  of  fi7idhig  so77ie  uilet 

Instead  of  thanking  77ie  he 
abused  me 

hi  the  case  of  a  slave ,  this 
77iight  have  bee7i  main¬ 
tained \  7iot  in  the  case 

•  a  free  7na7i 

Alas  for  the  deceitfuhiess  of 
human  hopes  ! 

I  am  a7ixious  for  your  sake 

I  do  not  k7iow  what  I  should 
have  done 


Cicero  ex  urbe  pulsus  est,  id 

quod  (or  quam  calamita¬ 
tem)  boni  plorant  omnes 

Nihil  praetermittam  quin  vio¬ 
lentissimum  quemque  ci¬ 
vium  ex  urbe  pellam 

Adventum,  quem  in  ante 
diem  tertium  Idus  Sep¬ 
tembres  promisit,  in  ante 
diem  quintum  Idus  Octo¬ 
bres  distulit 

Quid  velis  mereri  ut  de  hoc 
ponte  desilias  ? 

Satius  fuit  aut  Etiam  aut 

Non  respondere 

Interrogavi  eum  utrum  mihi 
subventurus  fuisset  si 

potuisset 

Illud  laudo,  non  quod  hones¬ 
tum  sit  sed  quia  utile  sst 

Circumfunduntur  hostes  si 
quem  aditum  reperire  pos¬ 
sint 

Quum  gratias  mihi  agere  de¬ 
beret  mihi  maledixit^ 

Hoc  in  servo  dici  potuit,  in 

ingenuo  non  potuit 


O  fallacem  hominum  spem  ! 

Tuam  vicem  sollicitus  sum 
Nescio  quid  facturus  fuerim 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


( Each  Exercise  is  based  on  the  one  or  more  preceding  exercises . 
For  example,  “  your  kind  tmcle  Tullius”  in  the  second  Exercise , 
is  an  instance  of  the  same  rule  as  is  exe?7iplified  in  “  the 
prodigal  Balbus  ”  in  the  first  Exercise.  The  References  in  the 
first  Exercises  are  to  the  Paragraphs  in  “  Rules  and  Reasons.”) 


HINTS  FOR  TRANSLATING  CONTINUOUS  PROSE. 

1.  Read  over  your  English  ( not  one  sentence  at  a  time ,  but  the 
whole  passage)  till  you  have  mastered  its  meaning. 

2.  Render  abstract  Nouns  by  simpler  concrete  Nouns,  or  by  Peri¬ 
phrases,  or  by  Phrases  with  Verbs.  See  Paragraphs  3,  3a. 

3.  Render  English  Metaphors  by  appropriate  Latin  Metaphors. 
See  Paragraph  79. 

4.  In  a  group  of  English  short  coordinate  sentences,  find  out 
which  is  the  ?nost  important  and  make  that  the  principal,  and  the 
rest  subordinate.  See  Appendix,  page  164. 

5.  Find  out  the  connection  between  each  subordinate  part  of  a 
stntence  and  its  principal  part,  whether  it  be  cause,  contrariety, 
sequence,  consequence,  Src.  and  use  the  appropriate  links.  See 
Appendix. 

6.  If  there  are  any  implied  statements  lurking  in  epithets,  drag 
than  out  and  express  them  by  clauses  with  appropriate  links.  See 
Appendix. 

7.  Find  out  the  comiedion  of  the  first  sentence  with  what  {pro¬ 
bably')  preceded,  and  then  of  each  of  the  other  sentences  with  the 
sentence  immediately  preceding,  and  use  the  appropriate  links.  See 
Appendix. 


INTRODUCTORY  EXERCISES 


Exercise  I. 

1.  It  is  said  (5)  that  Cato  was  (a  man)  of  upright  character. 

2.  All  of  us,  young  and  old,  rich  and  poor,  must  die  (5). 

3.  Foolish  (persons)  are  easily  persuaded  (to)  any  thing  (6). 

4.  We  ought  to  believe  good  and  honorable  men  (6). 

5.  If  one  does  one’s  best  (8),  one  ought  not  to  be  blamed. 

6;  No  one  of  us  is  free  from  fault,  but  the  better  part  of  us 
(our  nature)  is  divine  (10). 

7.  Caesar  was  on  the  point  of  (11)  (in  eo  esse  ut)  taking 

the  fort. 

8.  The  good  men  were  loved,  the  rich  were  envied  (n). 

9.  While  these  things  were  going  on  (11)  in  France,  Caesar 

was  waging  war  upon  the  Britons. 

10.  He  did  not  let  the  enemy  go  till  he  had  promised  to  ob¬ 
serve  the  treaty  in  future  (11). 

Exercise  II. 

1.  They  may  (possibly)  come  to  us  to-morrow  (12). 

2.  Caius  Julius  !  you  might  help  me,  if  you  would  (12). 

3.  The  enemy  might  return  at  any  moment,  and  slay  us  all 

(12). 

4.  Would  that  my  faithful  friend  knew  the  danger  I  am  in! 

(12). 

5.  My  friend  !  you  should  not  do  this  (=  ought  not  to). 

6.  Should  they  do  this  (12),  they  would  deserve  great  blame. 

7.  They  must  all  have  perished  (12),  if  the  brave  sailor  had 

not  promptly  (praesens)  helped  them. 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  CISES. 


133 


8. 

9* 


10. 


1. 


2. 


3- 

4- 

5* 

6. 

7- 

8. 

9- 


10. 


1. 


2. 


3- 


You  must  come  from  England  to  Boston  over  the  sea  (12). 

We  must  obey  our  parents,  love  our  children,  and  fight  for 
fatherland  (12). 

You  must  not  (12)  fancy  that  you  are  believed,  (when) 
speaking  falsely  (participle). 


Exercise  III. 


The  boy  is  like  his  father  (13)  (in  appearance),  but  the  girl 
is  like  her  mother  (in  disposition). 

Caesar  ordered  (impero)  the  soldiers  to  attack  the  wall, 
but  the  camp-followers  he  ordered  (jubeo)  to  remain  in 
the  camp. 

I  am  ashamed  of  my  folly,  repentant  of  my  sins,  and  weary 
of  life  (13«). 

It  is  our  interest  (13  a)  that  our  country  should  be  pros¬ 
perous. 

He  said  it  was  his  (own)  interest  to  do-good  to  all  men. 

The  herds  are  feeding-on  rich  pastures  (13  a ),  but  the  men 
eat  various  food. 

The  master  teaches  his  pupils  many  (things),  but  the 
pupils  conceal  many  (things)  from  the  master  (14). 

He  takes-away  the  life  of  his  enemy,  and  tears  off  the  arms 
from  his  body  (15). 

Terrified,  the  townsmen  cast  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the 
conqueror  (15,  note). 

The  travellers  set  out  from  Boston  for  the  country :  they 
spent  five  days  in  the  country,  and  then  returned  to  the 
city  (16). 


Exercise  IV. 

My  sister  lives  in  the  splendid  house  of  her  father-in-law, 
but  I  dwell  in  my  own  house  (16,  end). 

Good  children  are  (in  the  place  of)  a  great  joy  to  their 
parents  (17). 

The  bold  lion  fiercely  resists  his  enemies,  but  the  timid 
deer  flees  quickly  (18). 


134 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  CISES. 


4.  He  besought  his  comrades  not  to  desert  him  in  this  so 

great  danger  (19). 

5.  That  brave  commander,  Alexander,  and  that  wise  philoso¬ 

pher,  Socrates,  were  formerly  greatly  praised  (19,  note). 

6.  He  said  that  Caesar  was  not  the  man  to  yield  to  danger  or 

death  (21). 

7.  Cicero  was  the  first  to  arise  (21)  in  the  Senate  and  accuse 

Catiline  of  dreadful  crimes. 

8.  Tall  trees  are  first  struck  by  lightning  (21,  22),  and  a  tall 

tree  is-blooming  in  my  meadow  (22). 

9.  No  Christian  (22)  would-be-guilty-of  (admitto  in  se)  so 

foul  a  crime. 

10.  The  braver  a  man  is,  the  more  merciful  is  he  towards  the 
weak  (=every  bravest  man,  &c.,  22). 

Exercise  V. 

1.  Idleness  is  a  very-degrading  vice  (23). 

2.  The  horseman  slew  his  embarrassed  (impeditus)  enemy 

with  a  sword  (24). 

3.  Cicero  upbraided  Catiline  with  great  bitterness  (24). 

4.  In  appearance  he  was  a  lover  of  his  country,  in  reality  a 

lover  of  himself  (24). 

5.  In  the  judgment  of  all  good  men,  he  is  convicted  of  base 

deceit  (24). 

6.  We  have  been  waiting  at  home  for  you,  dear  George,  now 

many  days  (25). 

7.  The  Gauls  are  said  to  have  been  naturally  more  impetuous 

than  firm  (25). 

8.  The  King  gave  his  faithful  body-guard  (satelles)  a  great 

reward  for  his  so  great  services  (27). 

9.  The  exiled  Emperor  lived  for  several  years  in  England, 

near  London  (27). 

10.  For  the  last  twenty  years,  many  wars  have  been  carried  on 
in  Europe  and  America  (27). 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  T  EXRR  CISES. 


135 


Exercise  VI. 

1.  The  city  was  taken  in  the  fourth  year  after  it  had  begun 

to  be  besieged  (28). 

2.  Trees  and  flowers  bloom  in  summer,  but  decay  and  wither 

in  winter  ( 28 ) . 

3.  What  is  the  price  of  wheat  in  the  market  to-day  ?  Seven 

dollars  (29). 

4.  The  good  citizen  values  money  and  magistracies  highly, 

but  virtue  and  integrity  more  highly  (29). 

5.  The  saucy  boy  snapped  his  fingers  and  said,  “  I  don’t  care 

a  straw  for  you  ”  (29). 

6.  The  King  of  the  Cappadocians,  (while)  rich  in  slaves,  was 

•  without  money  (31). 

7.  Relying  on  (32)  the  valor  of  his  army,  Louis  (Ludovicus) 

Napoleon  waged  war  on  Germany. 

8.  The  boy  was  born  in  high  station,  and  is  descended 

from  noble  ancestors  (32). 

9.  Desire  of  glory  and  wealth  are  great  incitements  to  under¬ 

going  (gerundive)  dangers  (33). 

10.  A  good  general  has  need  of  valor,  of  prudence,  of  great 
experience  in  warfare  (33). 

Exercise  VII. 

1.  The  harbor  of  Boston  (adj.)  is  capable-of-holding  (34) 

many  war-ships  and  merchant-vessels  (navis  oneraria). 

2.  The  wise-man  is  no  less  firm  of  purpose  than  capable-of- 

restraining  (=powerful-over)  evil  desires  (34). 

3.  Cicero  was  unjustly-accused  of  tyranny  and  cruelty,  but 

Catiline  was  justly  condemned  for  treason  and  parri¬ 
cide  (36). 

4.  It-is-the-characteristic-of  a  prudent-man  to  deliberate  care¬ 

fully  about  important  matters,  and  of  a  foolish-man  to 
act  rashly  (38). 

5.  This  State  is  bounded  on  the  east  and  south  by  the  Atlan¬ 

tic  Ocean  (39). 


136  INTR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  CISES. 

6.  William  Evarts,  the  illustrious  lawyer,  departing  from  his 

home  at  Boston,  fixed  his  abode  at  New  York  (Ebora- 
cum-novum)  (39). 

7.  The  Germans  attacked  the  army  of  Caesar  in  front  and 

rear  on  its  march  (39). 

8.  The  rest  of  the  Carthaginian  ships  were  taken  in  the  607th 

year  after  the  foundation  of  the  city  (40). 

9.  Before  the  Birth  of  Christ,  many  wonderful  portents  ap¬ 

peared  (40). 

10.  The  traveller  arose  by  night,  and  about  nightfall  arrived 
at  home  (41). 


Exercise  VIII. 


» 

N 


O'-, 


A. 


C:*> 


.  (For  this  and  the  fifteen  following  Exercises,  refer  to  41,  The 

Prepositions). 

1.  Do  not  try  to  do  any  thing  beyond  your  strength. 

2.  The  brave  leader  and  above  three  hundred  soldiers  were 

lately  slain  by  the  Indians.  ~" 

3.  My  friend,  strive  to  be  above  deceit. 

4.  According  to  Thucydides,  the  Athenians  managed  their 

affairs  ill. 

5.  The  good  and  the  bad  will  each  be  rewarded  according  to 

their  deeds. 

6.  Immediately  after  his  consulship,  Cicero  set  out  for  his 

country-house. 

7.  After  your  letter,  mine  was  immediately  read. 

8.  After  the  manner  of  bandits,  they  plundered  all  things, 

public  and  private. 

9.  We  ought  all  to  live  agreeably  to  nature. 

10.  The  orator  speaks  as  agreeably  as  possible  to  the  truth. 


Exercise  IX. 

1.  We  justly  esteem  cowardice  among  the  basest  vices. 

2.  The  battle  of  Cannae  (adj.)  was  memorable  amongst 

Roman  defeats. 


INTRODUCTORY  EXERCISES.  137 

3.  He  was  the  only  young  man  among  many  who  won  for 

himself  fame. 

4.  The  victorious  general  divided  all  the  booty  among  his- 

men  (sui). 

5.  The  city,  taken  by  storm,  was  at  the  mercy  of  the  con¬ 

querors. 

6.  At  the  beginning  of  the  battle,  the  enemy  were  courageous 

and  elated  ;  at  the  end,  they  were  cast  down  and  dis¬ 
pirited. 

7.  Is  your  dear  daughter  at  the  point  of  death  ? 

8.  The  beautiful  lady  held  a  looking-glass  before  her. 

9.  Fifty  tried  warriors  were  on  guard  before  the  Praetorian 

gate. 

10.  Through  the  whole  of  life,  death  and  disease  present  them¬ 
selves  before  the  eyes  of  mortals. 

Exercise  X. 

1.  Verres  was  brought  to  trial  before  the  jury,  at  the  instance 

of  Cicero  (=  Cicero  being  accuser). 

2.  The  captive  Gaul  boldly  made  (habeo)  a  speech  before  the 

general. 

3.  Sulla  died  nineteen  years  before  the  Consulship  of  Cicero. 

4.  The  slanderer  is  beneath  the  notice  of  honorable-men. 

5.  What  you  say,  my  dear  son,  is  beside  the  mark. 

6.  The  heavy  rains  had  caused  the  river  to  swell  beyond  its 

bounds. 

7.  That  so  good  a  man  should  utter-falsehoods  is  beyond 

belief. 

8.  The  city  praetor  will,  beyond  question,  be  brought  to  trial 

for  extortion. 

9.  The  Sabines,  making  an  onset,  all  but  took  the  city. 

10.  What  else  is  the  history  of  a  nation,  but  the  history  of 
men  ? 


138 


IN  TR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  CISES. 


Exercise  XI. 

1.  Maecenas  had  a  splendid  country-seat  by  the  Anio. 

2.  When  the  messengers  arrived,  my  sons  and  daughters  were 

sitting  by  me. 

3.  My  son  came  to  Boston  by  sea,  but  the  journey  is  now 

generally  performed  by  land. 

4.  As  Often  as  she  was  by  herself,  the  widow  bitterly  mourned 

for  her  dead  husband. 

5.  The  robber  committed  the  robbery  by  himself. 

6.  Our  friend  will  set  out  for  London  on  the  1st  of  May,  and 

will  return  home  by  the  15th  of  October. 

7.  Caesar  was  informed  by  spies  that  the  Helvetii  had  set  out 

from  home  with  all  their  forces. 

8.  Some  ancient  writers  said  that  Ireland  was  less  by  a  half 

than  Britain. 

9.  By  Heaven  !  I  implore  you,  do  not  commit  so  great  a 

crime  ! 

10.  By  what  you  say,  the  last  hope  is  now  lost  to  us. 

Exercise  XII., 

1.  The  Helvetians  thought  their  territories  too  small,  consid¬ 

ering  their  numbers. 

2.  During  four  years,  he  used  to  call  upon  me  twice  or  thrice 

a  month. 

3.  During  the  night,  my  uncle  saw  a  terrible  dream. 

4.  During  the  reign  of  Charles  I.,  the  great  English  Rebellion 

occurred. 

5.  During  the  reign  of  George  III.,  the  American  Provinces 

gained  their  liberty. 

6.  We  are  delighted  with  our  house,  except  that  it  is  not 

large  enough. 

7.  While  I  was  dwelling  in  the  country  for  two  years,  I  sent 

no  letter  except  to  you. 

8.  All  bitterly  abused  me,  with  the  exception  of  one,  or,  at 

most,  two. 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  T  EXER  CISES. 


139 

9  Exclusive  of  his  personal  property,  the  wealthy  merchant 
has  left  his  wife  large  estates. 

10.  Exclusive  of  many  vices,  Catiline,  according  to  Sallust, 
was  guilty-of  foul  crimes. 

Exercise  XIII. 

1.  The  barbarians  of  the  Southern  (australis)  Islands  used 

small  shells  for  money. 

2.  The  fanciful-man  (says  Horace)  exchanges  round-build¬ 

ings  for  square. 

3.  Let  us  fight  bravely  for  our  wives,  for  our  children,  for  our 

fatherland  ! 

4.  I  fear  greatly  for  you,  my  son,  but  not  at  all  for  myself. 

5.  For  Heaven’s  sake  (—by  the  gods  I  beseech  you)  come 

quickly  and  help  me  ! 

6.  The  dishonest  judge  took  bribes  for  deciding  a  suit  con¬ 

trary  to  evidence. 

7.  He  had  been  chosen  for  the  magistracy,  which  had  been 

appointed  for  the  following  year. 

8.  It  is  my  intention  to  set  out  for  Rome  on  the  20th  of 

August. 

9.  I  will  wrait  for  a  longer  time  even  than  you  have  asked  for. 

10.  Out  of  many  such  deeds,  this  one  will  perhaps  serve  for 
an  example. 

Exercise  XIV. 

1.  For  my  part,  I  intend  to  go  to  the  country  at  the  begin¬ 

ning  of  next  summer. 

2.  The  soldiers  in  the  camp  are  suffering  severely  for  want  of 

provisions. 

3.  As  for  the  physician  whom  you  mention  in  your  letter,  I 

know  nothing  about  him. 

4.  For  success  that  youth  is  both  too  trifling  and  too  idle  ! 

5.  Take  courage,  worthy  (excellent)  friend  :  there  is  no  cause 

for  despair  ! 

6.  For  all  I  know,  the  excellent  poet  has  perished  at  sea. 


140 


INTRODUCTORY  EXERCISES. 


7.  Be  assured  you  are  no  match  for  that  strong  and  active 

wrestler. 

8.  So  much  for  that  matter  !  Now  let  us  turn  our  thoughts 

to  other  things. 

9.  It  were  better  for  many  guilty-men  to  escape  (avoid)  pun¬ 

ishment,  than  for  one  innoceilt-man  to  be  condemned  to 
death. 

10.  He  writes  with  such  care  that  it  is  rare  for  him  to  make 

even  a  single  blot. 

Exercise  XV. 

1.  From  his  boyhood,  he  was  eagerly-desirous  of  learning. 

2.  From  the  time  when  I  returned  home  from  England,  I  have 

suffered  severely  with  tooth-ache  and  head-ache. 

3.  From  (being)  poor,  our  friend  has  suddenly  become  rich. 

4.  From  Romulus’s  name  (says  the  legend)  the  city  was 

named  Rome. 

5.  The  French  nation  now  is  different  from  what  it  once  was, 

under  the  great  Emperor. 

6.  Messengers  came  from  Carthage  to  Hannibal  to  warn  him 

not  to  return  home. 

7.  The  German  monarch  wrested  his  kingdom  from  the  Em¬ 

peror  of  the  Franks. 

8.  Rest  from  labor  and  care  comes  only  to  the  dead. 

9.  He  generally  comes  into  the  city  to  buy  supplies  once  in 

seven  days. 

10.  Both  in  Herodotus  and  in  Homer  we  find  many  incredible 
tales. 

Exercise  XVI. 

1.  The  Great  Desert  of  Sahara  extends  about  nine  hundred 

miles  in  width,  and  three  thousand  in  length. 

2.  The  orator  exhorted  the  assembly  in  this  manner  for  more 

than  two  hours. 

3.  Paul,  the  famous  Apostle,  was  born  at  Tarsus,  was  put  in 

prison  at  Philippi,  and  suffered  death  at  Rome. 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  CISES. 


HI 

4.  In  my  judgment,  said  Clearchus,  the  traitor  deserves  to  be 

put  to  death. 

5.  If  we  wish  to  live  in  accordance  with  Nature,  we  must  live 

in  the  country. 

6.  In  addition  to  this,  he  had  great  patience  and  wonderful 

fortitude. 

7.  In  case  of  your  father’s  death,  what  will  you  children  do  ? 

8.  In  comparison  with  those  dwelling  in  hotter  countries,  we 

deserve  to  be  considered  happy. 

9.  In  consequence  of  the  defeat  at  Cannae,  great  fear  came- 

upon  the  Romans. 

10.  Catiline  was  going  in  the  direction  of  Gaul,  when  Q.  Metel¬ 
lus  Celer  met  him. 

Exercise  XVII. 

1.  His  liberality,  skill  in  warfare,  and  good-fortune  were  in 

favor  of  Caius  Caesar. 

2.  It  is  said  that  the  Emperor  wishes  to  abdicate  in  favor  of 

his  son. 

3.  In  the  midst  of  the  enemy,  many  of  whom  he  had  slain 

with  his  own  hand,  lay  the  leader  stabbed  with  a  sword. 

4.  The  eloquent  senator  spoke  long  and  vehemently  in  oppo¬ 

sition  to  the  proposal. 

5.  In  point  of  numbers  the  Swiss  nation  is  weak,  but  in  point 

of  valor  it  is  very  strong. 

6.  Americans  spare  no  toil  in  the  search-after  riches. 

7.  Your  son  is  not  deficient  either  in  respect  of  natural-ability 

or  in  knowledge. 

8.  In  spite  of  all  the  brave  citizens  could  do,  the  city  was 

taken  by  assault. 

9.  In  spite  of  the  intercession  of  many  powerful  men,  the 

murderer  was  hanged  on  the  gallows. 

IO.  Pythias  was  instead  of  a  brother  to  Damon,  and  they  were 
mutually  willing  to  die,  each  for  his  friend. 


142 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  T  EXER  CISES. 


Exercise  XVIII. 

1.  Scotland  is  on  the  north-east  of  Ireland. 

2.  The  enemies’  army  is  within  ten  miles  of  the  city. 

3.  The  active  father  said  to  his  idle  son,  “  This  comes  of  lazi¬ 

ness.” 

4.  To  come  of  good  parentage  ought  to  be  a  stimulus  to  good 

deeds. 

5.  They  found  in  the  camp  many  vessels  of  gold  and  silver. 

( Turn  two  ways.) 

6.  There  are  many  men  of  ability,  but  only  few  of  great 

ability. 

7.  Very  few  of  us  now  survive  who  remember  the  famous 

general. 

8.  The  Battle  of  Cannae  was  near  (did  not  want  much  of) 

bringing  destruction  to  the  City  of  Rome. 

9.  Rooks  build  their  nests  in  the  tops  of  trees. 

10.  Before  rain,  leaves  and  feathers  float  on  the  surface  of  the 
water. 

* 

Exercise  XIX. 

1.  He  ordered  the  captain  not  to  stir  a  finger’s  breadth  from 

that-spot  (illinc). 

2.  Many  persons,  shut  in  by  snow  in  the  midst  of  the  moun¬ 

tains,  perished  of  hunger. 

3.  News  of  the  death  of  the  general  and  his  brave  soldiers 

was  first  brought  by  an  Indian  scout. 

4.  I  greatly  desire  to  ascertain  what  has  become  of  my  class¬ 

mate,  who  went  many  years  ago  to  India. 

5.  What  think  you  of  the  measures  which  have  recently  been 

brought  before  the  Senate  ? 

6.  Huntsmen  and  warriors  ought  to  be  swift  of  foot,  ready  of 

wit,  keen  of  eye,  and  bold  of  hand. 

7.  In  the  year  479  b.c.,  a  great-sea-battle  between  the  Greeks 

and  Persians  took  place  off  Mycale. 

8.  Many  tombs  of  illustrious  men  are  still  standing  on  the 

Appian  Road. 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  CISES. 


H3 

9.  Sardanapalus,  as  he  rushed-forth  to  meet  the  enemy,  had 
a  wreath  on  his  head,  and  a  sword  in  his  right-hand. 

10.  Vienna  (Vindobona)  is  on  the  Danube,  340  miles  from 
Berlin  (Berolinum). 

Exercise  XX. 

1.  On  the  north,  Spain  is  bounded  by  the  Pyrenees  Moun¬ 

tains,  on  the  west  by  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

2.  Caesar  and  Ariovistus  held  a  conference  on  horseback. 

3.  We  heard  the  poet  playing  skilfully  on  the  lyre. 

4.  The  Spartan  soldier  was  carried  home  to  his  mother  on  his 

own  shield. 

5.  When  Darius  was  on  the  point  of  death,  he  wished  both 

of  his  sons  to  come  to  him. 

6.  The  Senators  were  mostly  on  Pompey’s  side,  the  common- 

people  on  Caesar’s,  and  many  cautious  men  were  on 
neither  side. 

7.  On  the  side  of  the  Helvetii,  the  mountain  gradually  slopes 

down  to  the  plain. 

8.  My  friend  excuses  himself  from  coming  to  my  house  on 

the  plea  of  health. 

9.  Bad  men  obey  the  laws,  not  willingly,  but  out  of  fear. 

10.  Boys  often  inflict  injury,  not  on  purpose,  but  out  of  fun. 

Exercise  XXI. 

1.  The  famine  in  Egypt  lasted  many  years  (over  many). 

2.  Hannibal  the  Carthaginian,  (while)  very  young,  was  set 

over  the  army. 

3.  The  Isle  of  Man  is  over  against  Britain  on  the  west. 

4.  It  was  owing  to  the  rashness  of  Lentulus  to  a  great  extent 

(magnopere)  that  Catiline’s  Conspiracy  did  not  suc¬ 
ceed. 

5.  Pending  the  giving  of  judgment,  the  defendant  had  com¬ 

mitted  suicide. 

6.  Themistocles  persuaded  his  countrymen  (civis)  to  build  a 

broad  and  high  wall  round  Athens. 


144 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  T  EXER  CISES. 


7.  The  Sabines  sent  ambassadors  round  to  the  neighboring 

States  to  excite  them  to  war  against  the  treacherous 
Romans. 

8.  Ever  since  America  won  her  freedom  (se  in  libertatem 

vindicare),  she  has  been  increasing  in  riches,  fame,  and 
power. 

9.  Never  since  the  creation  of  the  world  have  arts  flourished 

more  than  in  the  present  day  (=  these  times-). 

10.  It  was  chiefly  through  his  wealth  that  Tarquinius  Priscus 
rose  to  be  King  of  Rome. 

Exercise  XXII. 

1.  My  friend  will  set  out  from  Boston  on  the  1st  of  August, 

and  will  go  first  to  Italy,  then  to  Smyrna,  and  lastly  to 
the  Crimaea. 

2.  The  German  Empire  extends  from  the  Baltic  Sea  to  the 

shores  of  the  Adriatic. 

3.  Our  soldiers  fought  with  the  Indians  to  a  late  hour  in  the 

day,  when  they  were  overwhelmed  by  superior  numbers 
(multitudo)  of  enemies. 

4.  Having  slain  many  of  the  enemy,  the  small  band  of  Ameri¬ 

can  soldiers  was  slain  to  a  man. 

5.  To  what  end  do  you  utter  so  many- words,  which  have  no 

bearing  on  (nihil  pertinens)  the  subject. 

6.  The  orator  mounting  the  rostra,  whence  he  had  so  often 

before  harangued  the  people,  spoke  to  this  effect. 

7.  To  be  dutiful  to  (one’s)  parents,  loyal  to  (one’s)  father- 

land,  faithful  to  friends,  firm  towards  foes  are  (the  char¬ 
acteristics)  of  a  good  citizen. 

8.  To  the  best  of  his  power  Hector  defended  Troy  against 

the  attacks  of  the  Greeks. 

9.  The  cavalry,  under  Philip’s  command  ( abl, .  abs.),  charged 

suddenly  towards  the  hills  which  look  toward  the  east. 

10.  Achilles  felt  towards  Patroclus  the  love  of  a  brother,  and 
therefore  exacted  heavy  vengeance  for  his  death  (=  him 
slain). 


INTR  OD  UC  TOR  Y  EXER  C1SES. 


H5 


Exercise  XXIII. 

1.  Under  the  pretence  of  reconciling  the  alienated  friends,  by 

treacherous  calumnies  he  rendered  them  more  hostile  to 
each  other. 

2.  The  Servians  under  arms  have  invaded  the  Turkish  (Tur¬ 

cicus)  territories,  and  have  fought  some  battles  with 
poor  success  (male  gerere). 

3.  Under  the  appearance  of  a  favor,  he  inflicted  on  his  client 

a  severe  injury  (—  affected  his  client  with). 

4.  The  Jews  were  continually  fighting  with  one  another, 

when  they  ought  to  have  been  fighting  against  the 
Romans. 

5.  Having  the  wind  with  him,  the  merchant  sailed  quickly 

from  Boston  to  Dublin  (Eblana). 

6.  I  will  do  at  once  what  you  request,  with  all  my  heart. 

7.  The  decision  of  the  suit  rests-entirely  with  the  chief  judge. 

8.  With  heaven’s  aid,  we  may  (licet)  hope  to  overcome  all 

enemies,  and  surmount  all  dangers. 

9.  Cicero,  with  his  usual  wisdom,  defended  both  the  city  and 

himself  against  the  desperate  (perditus)  conspirators. 

10.  The  boy  fell  into  the  river  and  was  within  a  very  little  of 
being  drowned. 


L 


146  INTRODUCTORT  EXERCISES . 


Exercise  XXIV. 

1.  Without  (75)  attempting  to  conciliate  (45)  even  his  friends, 
he  (2)  succeeded  in  conciliating  even  his  enemies. 

2.  There  is  no  doubt  that  (54)  all  the  magistrates  in  the  (16 
end)  populous  city  (40)  of  Antioch  (64),  (2)  conspired  to  dethrone 
the  (18)  just  king  Tullius. 

3.  What  reason  have  you  (page  94)  for  saying  that  the  (18) 
foolish  young  Balbus  will  not  return  (16)  to  Corinth  ? 

4.  I  am  (6)  persuaded  that  you  are  wrong  and  (45)  nothing 
shall  persuade  me  (page  89)  to  believe  otherwise. 

g.  I  will  help  you  if  I  (par.  11,  page  8)  can,  but  I  fear  youi 
friends  will  (49)  not  help  you,  and,  if  (70)  so,  there  is  no  doubt 
(49)  that  you  (49)  will  be  banished. 

6.  (51)  Whether  this  is  true  or  false,  it  does  not  persuade  me 
(page  89)  to  believe  that  (18)  the  excellent  Balbus  is  guilty. 

7.  I  will  ask  him  (51)  whether  he  (64)  wished  to  remain  at  (16) 
Carthage,  or  to  set  out  for  (16)  Rome. 

8.  He  says  the  bird  will  never  (page  98)  grow  tame  (mitesco), 
as  long  as  it  ( 1 1)  is  kept  in  a  cage. 

9.  I  fear  (49)  (64)  he  wished  to  converse  with  (page  56)  me. 

10.  There  is  no  doubt  (49)  that  he  (64)  promised  to  come  to 
(16)  Athens,  (44a)  but  he  did  not  perform  (53)  what  he  promised. 

11.  The  (18)  sagacious  husbandman  said  the  weather  (dies, 
pi. )  would  (page  98)  grow  cold  (frigesco). 

12.  I  (2)  expect  that  (51)  whether  he  comes  to  Rome  or  re- 
‘  mains  at  Naples  he  will  not  be  (2)  secure.  Nothing  (hint*  7  and 

appendix)  but  his  (3a)  departure  from  Italy  will  satisfy  me. 

(Turn  by  ita  ...  si  discesserit :  see  page  49.) 

13.  After  the  (18)  thoughtless  Tullius  (11)  had  asked  me  (page 
89)  to  dine  with  (page  56)  him,  he  (page  88)  promised  to  dine 
with  Balbtis  in  the  same  day. 

The  reference  is  to  the  hints  on  page  131. 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


147 


14.  Did  not  you  read  the  (19)  two  (binas)  long,  interesting 
letters  (literae)  (54  end)  that  my  good  friend  Tullius  sent  me  ten 
days  (page  35)  before  his  death? 

15*  The  hot-tempered  (11)  captain  (hint  4  and  appendix) 
perceived  (21)  the  treachery  that  was  intended,  (47)  and  answered 
(cage  43)  in  haste,  (Oratio  Recta,  78)  “Do  not  (12)  send  mes¬ 
sengers  to  these  (19)  blood-thirsty  people.  (Hint  7  and  appendix. ) 
The  citizens  have  sworn  to  admit  nobody.  (Hint  7  and  appendix.) 
of  you  (12)  will  send  some  one,  don’t  send  anyone  you  have  a 
liking  for.  Send  a  bachelor.” 


I.  I  fear  the  prodigal  (18)  Balbus  will  die  within  a  week.  If 
so,  all  (54)  that  he  has  will  be  sold,  and  (45)  nothing  will  be  left 
to  support  his  child.  But  the  man  has  no  cause  (75)  for  finding 
fault  with  anyone  but  himself ;  for,  after  ( postquam )  he  had  (66) 
squandered  his  father’s  patrimony,  instead  of  (75)  working  (24) 
with  vigour,  he  left  his  family  (2)  at  Rome  (16)  without  (41) 
money  to  (73)  buy  them  bread,  while  (67)  he  travelled  from 
Rome  to  (16)  Milan,  and  from  Milan  to  Paris,  begging  from 
(7)  anyone  that  he  met  on  (39)  the  way.  I  have  often  entreated 
him  to  (73)  improve,  but  all  in  vain. 


2.  What  reason  had  you  for  finding  fault  in  this  way  with 
your  kind  and  considerate  uncle  Tullius?  He  did  his  best  to 
help  you,  and  would  have  done  more,  if  you  had  not  refused  to 
obey  him.  I  fear  that  in  ten  months’  time  you  will  repent,  when 
too  late,  of  your  disgraceful  ingratitude ;  meantime  I  entreat 
you  to  remember  your  promise  to  improve.  You  have  not 
much  time  to  fulfil  your  promise,  for  he  writes  to  me  that,  when 
he  arrives  at  Naples,  he  intends  to  sell  his  estate  there  and  to 
return  to  Rome  with  speed.  (75,  70,  49,  page  89,  11,  16.) 

3.  There  is  no  doubt  that  if  he  pities  us,  he  will  be  a  great 
protection  to  us  in  these  sad  calamities ;  and  indeed  the  town 


148 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


has  now  been  surrounded  by  the  enemy  with  a  ditch,  so  that 
I  fully  expect  that  it  will  be  captured  in  ten  days  from  this 
time.  If  our  spies  had  warned  us  of  this  before  the  enemy  came 
to  Naples,  we  should  have  been  able  to  resist  them  with  some 
chance  of  success  ;  but,  as  it  is,  I  fear  that  we  shall  be  captured 
or  put  to  death  to  a  man.  One  thing  I  wish  to  know  before 
you  go,  viz.  on  what  day  the  general  promised  to  send  a  messenger 
to  the  town  of  Nola.  (11,  12,  2,  64,  16.) 

4.  The  excellent  Balbus,  when  in  his  old  age,  while  studying 
Greek  at  Corinth,  used  to  say  that  “he  was  afraid  he  should  not 
succeed,  like  Cato,  in  learning  a  new  language,  for  his  memory 
failed  him  and  his  old  energy  had  gone.”  And  indeed,  although 
some  one  in  Cicero  says  that  he  has  no  fault  to  find  with  old  age, 
we  certainly  must  not  expect  to  retain  all  the  vigour  of  youth. 
So  do  not  promise  to  perform  when  old,  what  you  have  neglected 
when  young.  I  have  often  asked  how  old  Balbus  was  when  he 
began  Greek  ;  but  I  could  never  ascertain  his  exact  age.  But 
I  believe  he  was  over  seventy.  (18,  70,  2,  page  98,  12,  54,  64.) 

5.  Although  my  kind  friend  Tullius  promised  to  help  me,  he 
forgot  his  promise.  The  consequence  was  that  (ut)  I  was  left, 
while  a  boy,  at  Rome,  without  money  to  take  me  home  ;  and 
there  was  no  one  to  help  me  in  my  sore  distress.  Indeed,  if  the 
worthy  Balbus  had  not  seen  and  pitied  me,  I  do  not  know 
what  I  should  have  done.  His  enemies  used  to  say  that  he  loved 
no  one,  and  that  no  one  loved  him ;  but  he  asked  me  to  come 
home  with  him,  and  treated  me  all  the  time  I  was  in  his  house, 
like  a  man  of  humanity,  as  he  was,  with  kindness  and  con¬ 
sideration.  (76,  18,  70,  73,  45,  page  77,  60,  24.) 

6.  I  don’t  know  whether  there  is  anything  more  agreeable 
than  to  hear  one’s  praises  uttered  by  some  one  who  is  free  from 
flattery.  The  following  remark  of  Cicero  illustrates  this  better 
than  a  «thousand  treatises  on  flattery: — “The  most  subtle 
flattery,”  says  that  author,  “is  to  tell  your  friend  that  he  is 
above  flattery,  and  to  say  that  you  do  not  know  how  to  flatter 
him.  ”  It  happened  once  that  a  Roman  senator,  named  Lentulus, 
had  a  needy  obsequious  Greek  fellow  dining  with  him,  who 
tried  in  vain  to  flatter  his  host.  Lentulus  laughed  at  his 
awkward  attempts,  and  said,  (Orat.  Rect.)  “I  flatter  myself, 
sir,  that  I  am  indifferent  to  flattery.”  ( Orat .  Red.)  “Had  I 
known  that,”  replied  the  Greek,  “I  should  have  known  how 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES.  149 

to  flatter  you,  but  you  have  taught  me  a  good  lesson,  and  I  will 
not  forget  it.”  (8,  25,  12,  46.) 

7.  Almost  all  the  men  in  the  ship,  when  they  saw  nothing  but 
rocks  and  waves  before  them,  thinking  that  the  boat  was  not  fit 
for  use,  flung  themselves  into  the  sea  and  swam  towards  different 
parts  of  the  beach.  But  all  to  a  man  perished.  Only  the  sailors 
in  the  boat  managed  to  escape  to  the  shore.  When  they  had 
reached  it,  they  asked  the  natives  to  grant  them  food,  clothing, 
and  shelter :  for  they  had  nothing,  not  even  a  morsel  of  bread, 
to  satisfy  their  hunger.  But,  instead  of  friends,  they  found 
robbers  drawn  up  to  meet  them  on  the  bes^h:  they  were  then 
deprived  even  of  the  little  clothing  they  had,  some  of  them 
were  beaten,  some  of  them  threatened  with  death,  one  was 
killed.  In  this  extreme  misery  they  were  met  by  a  band  of  three 
thousand  soldiers  coming  from  the  capital,  which  was  ten  miles 
off.  The  commander  of  this  force  received  them  with  kindness, 
asked  them  whether  the*'  wished  to  go  on  to  the  capital  or  to 
return  at  once  to  their  country;  and,  upon  their  deciding  on 
the  former  alternative,  ordered  that  each  should  receive  ten 
pounds  ( Orat .  Red.  and  Or  at.  Obi.).  “  Whft  more,”  he 
added,  “  can  I  do  for  you  ?  Only  say  and  it  shall  be  done.” 

8.  In  these  great  calamities,  the  brave  and  intrepid  general, 
instead  of  manifesting  fear,  turned  to  his  dejected  soldiers  and 
said,  {Orat.  Obi.),  “Courage!  all  will  be  well!  We  shall 
succeed  past  expectation,  if  we  do  our  best  to  teach  the  enemy 
that  they  can  be  resisted  by  brave  men.  Why  do  we  delay 
here  in  idle  conversation  when  we  ought  to  be  up  and  doing  ? 
I  am  informed  that  20,000  infantry,  4,000  cavalry,  and  fifteen 
ships  of  war  have  been  despatched  against  us  ;  but  do  not 
fear  them,  for,  while  they  are  mercenaries,  we  are  free  men. 
The  enemy  will  certainly  not  pity  you,  and  there  is  no  hope  but 
in  arms.” 

9.  On  the  receipt  of  this  sad  news,  the  two  generals,  with 
joyful  looks  intended  to  disguise  their  feelings,  began  to  ask  their 
guide  how  much  stronger  the  enemy  was  than  their  own  army. 
On  hearing  that  the  Athenians  had  3,000  more  infantry  than 
they  had,  one  of  them  turned  to  the  other  and  said  {Orat.  Red. 
and  Orat.  Obi.),  “It  is  all  over  with  these  exultant  soldiers  of 
ours,  if,  instead  of  retiring,  we  march  forward  to  Athens.  You 
see,  by  these  two  letters  in  my  hand,  that  our  largest  army 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


15° 

was  yesterday  defeated,  almost  all  that  survived  were  captured, 
and  no  one  but  the  consul  returned  to  tell  the  tale.  Though 
the  Athenians  are  treacherous  enemies,  they  have  no  lack  of 
bravery,  and  I  fear  that,  if  we  do  not  retreat,  we  shall  repent.” 
After  hearing  these  words,  the  other  general  asked  for  time  to 
deliberate  before  making  up  his  mind  what  ought  to  be  done. 

10.  The  celebrated  Caius  was  once  asked  whether  the  man 
that  believed  nobody,  or  the  man  that  believed  everybody,  was 
the  wiser.  He  answered,  that  every  virtue  was  a  mean  between 
two  vices  :  that  it  was  possible  for  us  to  believe  too  much,  as 
well  as  to  believe  too  little  ( Orat .  Obi.).  “Cannot  anyone  see 
that  it  is  the  duty  of  a  wise  man  to  distinguish  between  those 
that  are  worthy,  and  those  that  are  unworthy  of  credit  ?  for  it  is, 
and  always  will  be,  a  part  of  virtue  not  merely  to  desire  to  do 
right,  but  also  to  determine  what  is  right.”  While  the  wise 
Caius  was  saying  this,  his  pupils  listened  with  attention.  After 
he  had  finished,  some  of  them  remained  behind  to  ask  him  the 
meaning  of  what  he  said  ;  others  said  that  there  was  no  truth 
in  it  ;  others  left  without  saying  a  single  word  themselves,  or 
thinking  in  the  slightest  degree  about  what  had  been  said  by 
their  teacher. 

11.  In  the  war  with  the  Germans,  this  cruel  and  arbitrary  king, 
being  desirous  of  making,  in  the  night-time,  some  alterations  in 
his  camp,  ordered  that,  under  pain  of  death,  neither  fire  noi 
candle  should  be  burning  in  the  tents  after  a  certain  hour.  He 
■went  round  the  camp  himself,  to  see  that  his  orders  were  obeyed: 
and  as  he  passed  by  Captain  Tullius’  tent,  he  perceived  a  light. 
He  entered,  and  saw  the  captain  seal  a  letter,  which  he  had  just 
finished  writing  to  his  wife,  whom  he  tenderly  loved.  ( Orat.  Obi. ) 
“What  are  you  doingthere?”  said  the  king.  “Do  not  you  know 
the  orders  ?”  Tullius  threw'-  himself  at  his  feet,  and  begged  for 
mercy,  but  he  had  no  power,  and  made  no  attempt,  to  deny  his 

,  fault.  {Orat.  Red.)  “Sit  down,”  said  the  king  to  him,  “and 
add  a  few  words  that  I  shall  dictate.”  The  officer  obeyed,  and 
the  king  dictated,  {Orat.  Obi.)  “To-morrow  I  shall  perish  on  the 
scaffold.”  Tullius  wrote  it,  and  he  was  executed  the  next  day. 

12.  Amid  the  shouting  of  the  soldiers  the  voice  of  the  general 
was  distinctly  heard  as  he  encouraged  those  who  wrere  advancing 
to  the  charge,  and  rebuked  the  fugitives  {Orat.  Obi).  “  Why,” 
he  cried,  “are  you  retreating?  Do  you  hope  to  find  safety  in 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


IS1 

flight  ?  Do  you  not  know  that  even  the  timid  deer  does  not 
always  flee  ?  On  the  one  side  lies  the  sea ;  and  on  the  other  the 
enemy.  Death  is  on  both  sides  of  you — choose  between  a  death 
of  honour  and  a  death  of  shame.  If  even  now  you  do  not  fight 
for  your  country,  it  is  all  over  with  the  glory  of  Rome.”  On 
hearing  these  words,  all  the  best  of  the  soldiers  recovered  their 
spirits,  closed  their  ranks,  and  charged  the  enemy  with  fierce¬ 
ness.  The  latter,  unprepared  for  this  sudden  attack,  fled  some 
in  one  direction,  some  in  another  ;  none  were  spared,  and  not 
a  man  out  of  that  vast  multitude  was  left  to  cany  back  home  the 
news  of  the  sad  result. 


13.  To  this  the  general  answered  that  he  could  not  help  recol¬ 
lecting  the  great  cruelty  with  which  his  soldiers  had  been  treated 
by  the  enemy  at  the  taking  of  Nola,  seven  years  ago  (Oral  Obi.). 
“Now,”  he  said,  “nothing  but  compassion  prevents  me  from 
destroying  all  of  you  to  a  man.  You  have  not  enough  food  to 
satisfy  you,  not  enough  even  to  keep  off  famine.  Whether  you 
are  assisted  by  the  Romans  or  not,  it  matters  little  ;  all  of  you 
must  perish.”  Upon  this,  the  ambassadors,  bursting  into  tears, 
promised  that  their  countrymen  should  give  all  they  had  to  the 
soldiers  if  only  their  lives  were  spared.  They  did  not  say  that' 
they  had  not  deserved  death  ;  for  if  they  had  said  so,  it  would 
have  been  of  little  use  :  but  they  flung  themselves  at  the  general’s 
feet,  and  again  and  again  begged  for  pardon.  He  heard  them  in 
silence,  without  raising  them,  or  appearing  in  any  way  to  be 
touched  by  their  calamities. 


14.  {Oral.  Obi.)  “If,”  said  tne  wise  shepherd,  “you  had 
observed  the  weather,  as  you  promised  to  do,  and  had  not  forgotten 
the  instructions  I  gave,  you  would  not  have  come  into  this  painful 
position.  When,  about  a  couple  of  weeks  ago,  an  inundation  took 
place,  all  the  shepherds  that  were  in  the  neighbourhood  collected 
in  haste  and  came  to  me  for  advice.  On  receiving  my  advice, 
they  thanked  me  for  the  pains  I  had  taken,  and  assured  me  they 
would  carry  out  all  that  I  had  recommended.  Consequently, 
although  another  storm  visited  us  in  the  following  week,  scarcely 
anyone  was  injured,  and  I  do  not  believe  that  you  will  lose  a  single 
sheep  for  the  future,  if  you  will  adopt  the  same  course  as  they  did. 
Instead  of  weeping,  give  up  your  folly.  Why  did  you  come  here 
but  to  get  advice?  and  why  are  we  sent  into  the  world  but 
to  battle  with  troubles  like  these  ?  ” 


I52 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


15.  When  the  renowned  Balbus,  \Vho  had  conquered  Persia, 
Tartary,  and  Syria,  was  defeated  by  Tullius,  and  taken  prisoner, 
he  sat  on  the  ground,  and  a  soldier  prepared  a  coarse  meal  to 
appease  his  hunger.  As  this  was  boiling  in  one  of  the  pots  used 
for  the  food  of  the  horses,  a  dog  put  his  head  into  it,  but,  from 
the  mouth  of  the  vessel  being  too  small,  he  could  not  draw  it  out 
again,  and  ran  away  with  both  the  pot  and  the  meat.  The 
captive  monarch  burst  into  a  fit  of  laughter  :  and,  on  one  of  his 
guards  demanding  what  cause  upon  earth  could  induce  a  person 
in  his  situation  to  laugh,  he  replied  ( Oral.  Obi. ),  “It  was  but 
this  morning  the  steward  of  my  household  complained,  that  three 
hundred  camels  were  not  enough  to  carry  my  kitchen  furniture  ; 
now  it  is  carried  with  ease  by  that  dog,  who  hath  carried  away 
both  my  cooking  instruments  and  dinner.” 

16.  On  hearing  this,  the  passionate  queen  replied  in  a  fury 
( Oral .  Reel.),  ‘‘I  am  surprised  that  I  have  not  persuaded  you  that 
the  course  I  recommended  is  the  best  under  the  circumstances,  and 
I  regret  that  you  seem  to  have  forgotten  the  great  kindnesses  you 
have  received  from  me  and  from  my  predecessors  on  the  throne.” 
Then,  growing  more  and  more  angry  as  she  proceeded  ( Oral.  Obi. ) 
“  For  what  purpose,”  cried* she,  “have  we  marched  here  but  to 
fight  the  enemy  ?  Do  you  wish  to  give  up  your  rights  and  liberties 
to  the  detestable  Balbus  ?  Although  I  cannot  dictate  to  you  the 
course  you  should  follow,  I  entreat  you  to  listen  to  me  when  I 
appeal  to  you,  in  the  name  of  the  national  honour,  not  to  desert  me 
in  this  degrading  position.  Why  did  you  promise  to  obey  me,  if 
you  did  not  intend  to  keep  your  word  ?  What  have  you  asked 
of  me  that  you  have  not  obtained  ?  Prepare,  I  beseech  you,  to 
conquer  or  to  die.  If  I  had  known  that  you  wished  to  surrender 
the  city,  I  would  never  have  come  on  this  disgraceful  journey.” 

17.  [Oral.  Obi.)  “Can  I  ever  fail,”  said  the  grateful  Tullius, 
“to  recollect  the  favours  I  have  received  at  your  hands  ?  Depend 
upon  it,  I  will  do  my  best  to  deserve  success,  even  though  I  can  • 
not  attain  it  ;  and  you  shall  have  no  cause  to  regret  the  kindness 
you  showed  me  in  my  many  severe  troubles.  But  why  do  I 
delay  when  I  am  called  elsewhere  by  duty.  Farewell !”  The 
wise  old  judge  replied  as  follows: — (Oral.  Reel.)  “  I  am  indeed  glad 
to  hear  what  you  say,  and  nothing  will  make  me  believe  that  you 
are  ungrateful.  I  advise  you  and  your  friends,  instead  of  trying 
any  longer  to  conciliate  Balbus,  to  collect  together  at  once  and 
oppose  him.  I  am  sure  he  will  never  be  persuaded  by  mere 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


153 

argument,  and  if  he  is  not  put  down  in  a  few  months,  you  will 
be  seriously  injured  by  him.” 

18.  As  t.he  agents  of  the  infamous  queen  were  conducting  her 
unfortunate  husband  to  the  strong  castle,  ten  miles  off,  at  Cumse, 
the  scene  of  his  tragic  and  sorrowful  end,  it  came  into  their  minds 
that  to  prevent  his  being  recognized  by  the  people  on  the  road, 

*  it  would  be  well  to  have  his  head  and  beard  shaved.  They  ac¬ 
cordingly  commanded  the  prince  to  alight  from  his  horse, 
obliging  him  to  sit  down  on  a  mound  by  the  wayside ;  meanwhile 
one  of  the  escort,  who  officiated  as  barber,  brought  a  basin  of 
cold  water  taken  out  of  the  next  ditch,  observing  to  the  king  that 
“  for  that  time  any  water  must  do.”  The  prince,  deeply  affected, 
burst  into  a  flood  of  warm  tears,  and  seeing  them  fall  into  the 
basin,  he  pathetically  observed  [Or at.  Obi.),  “Behold,  monsters, 
nature  supplies  what  you  would  deny.” 

19.  On  hearing  this  the  impetuous  soldier,  with  his  sword  / 
drawn,  rushed  into  the  midst  of  his  rebellious  comrades,  and  cried 
at  the  top  of  his  voice  {Orat.  Obi.),  “Why  do  we  stay  here  in 
this  narrow  camp,  waiting  for  the  enemy  to  crush  us  ?  Why  do 
we  continue  to  obey  an  incapable  general  ?  Did  not  you  thank  me 
for  the  bravery  I  showed  in  representing  your  claims  to  the 
general  ?  And  did  you  not  promise  to  join  me  ?  Collect  then  at 
once,  and  in  haste.  Seize  the  officers.  Instead  of  delaying,  adopt 
the  same  course  as  our  comrades  in  France  ten  days  ago  adopted, 
and  you  will  have  no  cause  to  regret  the  result.  Success  is 
certain  if  you  but  do  your  best.  Are  you  not  ashamed  of  the 
disgraceful  position  in  which  you  have  been  placed  for  more  than 

a  fortnight  ?  ”  Here  he  paused  for  a  moment,  and  then  added, 
with  bitterness  [Orat.  Red.),  “Perhaps  some  one  will  say  we 
must  not  forget  the  oath  of  fidelity  we  have  sworn  to  our  generals. 
We  will  not  ffirget  it,  on  condition  they  remember  the  duty  of 
kindness  towards  us.” 

20..  In  the  midst  of  all  these  terrible  disasters  the  brave 
general  was  the  only  man  that  retained  his  presence  of  mind. 
Collecting  a  few  of  the  most  resolute  men  in  the  army,  he 
reported  them  to  act  with  energy,  and  not  to  forget  the  great  glory 
that  awaited  them  if  they  could  only  force  their  way^ through  the 
enemy  and  reach  a  place  of  security  ( Orat .  Obi.).  “Why,” 
said  he,  “do  you  despair,  when  I  am  your  leader?  Has  the 
enemy  any  reason  to  boast  of  having  ever  defeated  me  ?  It  is  not 


*54 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


the  enemy  that  I  fear,  it  is  your  timidity  and  irresolution.  Before 
you  came  to  Naples  you  acted  with  the  courage  of  soldiers  ; 
now,  you  are  in  some  strange  way  altered,  and  I  do  not  know 
what  is  the  matter  with  you  ;  if  you  had  marched  with  speed, 
you  would  now  be  in  Rome,  and  not  a  man  there  would,  dare 
to  oppose  you.  ” 

21.  Remembering  the  cruelty  with  which  their  countrymen  had 
been  treated  by  the  enemy,  the  ambassadors  came  most  unwill¬ 
ingly  on  their  humiliating  errand,  and,  after  they  had  arrived  at 
the  capital  and  obtained  an  audience  in  the  town-hall,  no  one 
liked  to  be  the  first  to  speak.  At  last  the  excellent  Tullius  broke 
silence  with  these  words  ( Orat .  Obi.): — “Although  we  cannot 
expect  indulgence,  and  do  not  ask  you  to  pity  us,  yet  we  think  it 
worth  while  to  appeal  to  your  sense  of  your  own  interest,  and  to 
ask  you  to  give  us  time  to  consult  our  government  as  to  whether 
we  may  surrender  the  city.  Remember  that  it  is  sometimes  pro¬ 
fitable  to  spare  the  vanquished,  and  that  mercy  is  sometimes  the 
mark  of  a  politic  as  well  as  of  a  merciful  man.  The  oldest  of 
your  nobles  cannot  have  entirely  forgotten  the  great  calamities 
that  befel  you  in  the  late  war.  What  you  have  suffered  once  it 
is  possible,  if  not  probable,  that  you  may  suffer  again.  How¬ 
ever,  if  we  cannot  persuade  you  that  our  advice  is  the  best,  we 
are  prepared  to  resist  you  to  the  last.  ” 

22.  {Orat.  Obi.)  “I  was  not  so  much  injured  by  the  wound,” 
cried  the  intrepid  soldier  ;  “it  was  the  man’s  treachery  in  attempt¬ 
ing  to  stab  me  when  off  my  guard  that  provoked  and  angered  me. 
I  thank  you  with  all  my  heart  for  the  great  kindness  you  have 
shown  me  while  ill,  and  now  farewell.  Believe  me,  I  shall  not 
find  it  easy  to  forget  the  many  benefits  you  have  bestowed  on  me 
in  my  severe  trial.  Why  do  not  all  men  remember,  as  you  do, 
the  claims  of  hospitality  and  mercy  ?  Can  I  ever  repay  you  for 
your  trouble  ?  Never,  except  by  imitating  your  conduct.  Before 
I  knew  you,  I  was  persuaded  that  every  Roman  was  a  knave  ; 
now  I  know  that  wherever  I  go  I  shall  find  in  all  nations  some 
goodness,  kindness,  and  compassion  :  and  nothing  shall  make 
me  believe  the  contrary.” 

23.  At  the  unfortunate  battle  of  Damietta  against  the  Saracens, 
Louis  IX.  was  taken  prisoner.  He  bore  this  reverse  of  fortune 
so  nobly  and  so  magnanimously  that  his  enemies  said  to  him  in 
admiration  ( Orat.  Red.),  “We  look  upon  you  as  our  captive  and 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


155 


Our  slave  ;  but  though  in  chains,  you  behave  to  us  as  if  we  were 
your  prisoners.”  The  sultan  having  sent  one  of  his  generals  to 
the  king,  to  demand  a  very  considerable  sum  of  money  for  his 
ransom,  his  majesty  replied,  (Orat.  Obi.)  “Return,  and  tell 
your  master,  that  a  King  of  France  is  not  to  be  redeemed  with 
money  :  I  will  give  him  the  sum  he  asks  for  my  subjects  that  are 
taken  prisoners ;  and  I  will  deliver  up  to  him  the  city  of  Damietta 
for  my  own  person.”  And  such  were  the  terms  on  which  the 
liberation  of  the  King  of  France  and  his  subjects  was  afterwards 
effected. 

24.  A  thousand  promises  cannot  restore  the  reputation  forfeited 
by  one  dishonourable  act,  and  it  ought  never  to  be  forgotten  that  a 
readiness  to  make  professions  and  promises  often  implies  a  readi¬ 
ness  to  break  them.  But,  while  we  cannot  help  distrusting  a 
man  that  seems  to  promise  much  and  feel  little,  we  ought  to  be 
on  our  guard  against  suspecting  a  man  unduly.  We  ought  to  be 
wise,  without  being  cruel  or  suspicious.  A  man  of  good  feeling 
will  do  well  to  remember  that  he,  as  well  as  others,  is  liable  to 
go  wrong,  and  the  precept  that  enjoins  upon  us  not  to  judge  lest 
we  be  judged  will  be  always  in  his  mind.  If  we  remember  this 
solemn  precept,  we  shall  be  more  likely  to  act  not  only  with 
mercy  but  also  with  wisdom  in  our  relations  to  our  inferiors,  and 
there  can  be  no  doubt  that,  in  spite  of  apparent  failure,  gentle¬ 
ness  will  in  the  end  succeed  where  cruelty  will  fail. 

25.  {Orat.  Red.)  “Do  you  dare  to  say,”  cried  the  infuri¬ 
ated  mutineers,  “that  the  soldiers  in  the  camp  did  not  again  and 
again  entreat  you  to  lead  them  against  the  enemy  ?  Have  you 
anything  to  reply  to  this  accusation  ?  If  so,  speak  :  if  not,  con¬ 
fess  that  you  deserve  death.”  To  these  words  the  general  replied 
{Orat.  Obi.),  “I  see  that  you  are  determined  to  murder  me 
Yet  my  oldest  lieutenant  will  bear  me  witness  that  I  shewed 
my  prudence  in  giving  orders  for  a  retreat.  I  had  only 
2,000  men  at  that  time  with  me.  I  did  not  know  which  of 
the  two  roads  through  the  wood  led  to  Rome.  Upon  my  pro¬ 
posing  a  retreat  to  my  officers,  they  all  kept  silence  except  two, 
who  expressed  their  approval  of  it ;  and,  in  the  end,  it  was  unani¬ 
mously  determined  on.  As  for  the  prisoners,  it  is  true  that  none 
were  spared  ;  but  the  reason  was  that  several  tried  to  escape 
after  they  had  promised  not  to  depart  from  the  camp.  What 
more  could  anyone  have  done  in  that  great  calamity  ?  I  for  my 
part  do  not  know,  and  I  wish  my  accusers  would  each  produce 
his  own  plan.” 


GRADUATED  EXERC/SES, 


I56 

26.  After  inquiring  why  the  principal  men  of  wealth  and 
importance  in  the  town  did  not  interfere  to  prevent  these  great 
tumults,  Tullius  unfortunately  turned  to  the  general  Fabius  and 
said  ( Orat .  Rect.),  “I  am  surprised  that  your  country  has  not 
obtained  more  wisdom  from  its  misfortunes.  You  asked  me 
just  now  what  we  should  have  done  if  we  had  been  conquered. 
I  reply,  we  should  at  least  have  learned  moderation.”  On 
hearing  this,  the  general  was  filled  with  anger  and  replied  {Oral. 
Obi.),  “Why  do  you  make  such  absurd  remarks?  Can  I  or 
anyone  avoid  destiny  ?  What  is  the  use  of  talking  about  what 
might  have  happened  ?  It  serves  no  purpose  but  that  of  irritating 
the  people.  Cease  to  waste  time  in  this  way  and  depart  from 
Rome  with  speed,  taking  your  goods  with  you.  If  you  do  not,  I 
promise  to  accuse  you  of  treachery  in  three  days,  and  you  and 
thousands  of  spies  like  you  shall  be  put  to  death.”  Tullius 
was  persuaded  that  he  meant  what  he  said,  and  he  therefore 
collected  his  goods,  bade  farewell  to  his  family,  and,  after  asking 
them  to  write  to  him  as  soon  as  possible,  set  out  in  haste  for 
Egeria,  a  town  about  twenty-five  miles  distant. 

*  27.  The  wise  and  pious  philosopher,  turning  to  the  rash  and 
foolish  youth,  replied  with  calmness  (Oral.  Reel.),  “If,  while 
young,  you  do  not  pay  attention  to  your  work,  you  will  find,  when 
old,  that  you  will  have  cause  to  repent  your  folly.  There  are  many 
that  are  admired,  while  young,  for  their  quickness,  ingenuity, 
and  taste,  and,  if  they  had  determined  to  work  with  steadiness, 
they  would  have  succeeded  ;  but,  instead  of  doing  so,  they  often 
waste  their  time  in  an  idle  and  frivolous  manner,  and  thus  they 
are  left  far  behind  in  the  race  of  life  by  others  of  inferior  ability 
but  greater  application.”  To  this  the  young  man  replied  in 
haste  (Orat.  Obi.),  "  I  have  a  great  dislike  to  receive  such  lectures 
from  you  ;  and  there  is  no  reason  why  you  should  select  me  in¬ 
stead  of  others,  since  others  are  as  bad.  Pray  cease,  if  you  don’t 
wish  me  to  leave  the  room.  I  shall  go  home  to  my  friends  in 
Italy  at  once.  Can  anything  be  more  absurd  than  that  a  youth 
of  ability  like  mine  should  continue  to  remain  at  school  ?  ” 

28.  It  was  customary  with  General  Caius,  when  any  of  his 
soldiers  were  brought  before  him  for  heinous  offences,  to  say  to 
them,  “  Brother,  you  or  I  will  certainly  be  hanged;”  which  was 
a  sufficient  denunciation  of  their  fate.  Once  a  spy,  who  was  dis¬ 
covered  in  his  camp,  was  addressed  in  this  language.  Next  day,  as 
the  poor  wretch  was  about  to  be  led  to  the  gallows,  he  pressed 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


*57 

earnestly  to  speak  with  the  general,  alleging  that  he  had  some- 
*  what  of  importance  to  communicate.  The  general,  being  made 
acquainted  with  his  request,  said  with  roughness  ( Orat .  Ob!.), 
“It  is  always  the  way  with  these  rascals;  they  pretend  some  frivo¬ 
lous  story,  merely  to  reprieve  themselves  lor  a  few  moments  : 
however,  bring  the  dog  hither.”  When  he  was  introduced,  the 
general  asked  him  what  he  had  to  say.  [Orat.  Red.)  “  Why,  my 
lord,”  said  theculpr.t,  “when  I  first  had  the  honour  of  your  con¬ 
versation,  you  were  pleased  to  say  that  either  you  or  I  should  be 
hanged  ;  now  I  am  come  to  know  whether  it  is  your  pleasme  to 
be  so,  because,  if  you  won’t,  I  must;  that’s  all.”  The  general 
was  so  pleased  with  the  fellow’s  Lumour  that  he  ordered  him  to 
be  released. 

29.  In  this  great  perplexity  I  had  recourse  to  the  active,  ener¬ 
getic  Tullius,  one  of  my  most  intimate  and  affectionate  friends. 
I  took  him  by  the  hand,  informed  him  of  the  difficulty  in  which  I 
was  placed,  and  asked  him  to  advise  me  what  to  do,  and,  il 
possible,  to  assist  me  with  money.  He  answered,  with  his  usual 
kindness,  “  If  you  had  asked  me  to  help  you  on  the  23rd  of  March 
I  would  have  done  so  with  pleasure,  but  now,  instead  of  being 
able  to  help  you,  I  want  help  myself.  It  is  true  that  a  few  days 
ago  I  possessed  friends,  money,  and  arms  ;  but  now  I  have  not 
even  food  enough  to  last  me  and  my  children  for  seven  days. 
Can  you  hope  for  help  from  me  after  hearing  this  ?  ”  While  he 
said  this,  the  tears  ran  down  his  face.  I  felt  the  sorrow  with 
which  he  was  moved,  and  there  was  not  a  man  present  that 
did  not  feel  it  as  much  as  I  did.  For  my  part,  I  turned  away 
my  face  so  as  not  to  shew  my  feelings,  and  I  told  Tullius  that  I 
would  only  consent  to  take  the  command  of  the  army  on  con¬ 
dition  that  he  had  his  property  restored  to  him. 


30.  I  once  heard  a  Frenchman  and  a  German  arguing  to¬ 
gether  as  to  which  was  the  better  country  ;  the  former  spoke  of 
the  successes  in  war  that  had  been  obtained  by  his  nation,  and 
enumerated  the  distinguished  generals  that  had  gained  conquests 
innumerable.  The  German  reminded  the  Frenchman  of  the 
discoveries  in  art  and  science  that  had  been  effected  by  his 
countrymen  ;  the  beauty  of  their  literature,  the  world-wide 
renown  of  their  poets,  their  historians,  and  their  philosophers. 
While  they  were  thus  arguing  together,  it  happened  that  an 
Englishman  came  up,  who  put  in  a  claim  for  his  own  country 
in  the  following  words  [Orat.  Obi.)  : — “Although  we  admit  that 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


158 

the  French  have  more  taste,  and  the  Germans  have  more  depth 
than  our  own  countrymen,  yet  still  in  practical  ability  we  think  *► 
that  we  are  not  inferior  to  any  nation  :  for  answer  this  question 
— What  nation  has  succeeded  like  ours  in  administering  its 
affairs  at  once  in  peace  and  prosperity  ?  ” 

31.  ( Orai .  Rect.)  “If,”  said  the  philosopher,  in  answer  to  the 
question  of  his  brave  young  son,  “if,  in  our  great  calamities,  we 
had  been  spared  by  the  conquering  Romans,  perhaps  we  should 
have  pitied  them  in  turn.  But,  instead  of  pitying  us,  they  treated 
us  with  cruelty  on  all  occasions  ;  I  am  therefore  much  surprised  at 
your  regretting  the  rapidity  with  which  the  army  of  Carthage, 
under  the  leadership  of  Hannibal,  conquered  the  armies  of  Rome.” 
Seeing  that  his  son  kept  silence,  the  old  man  went  on  as  follows 
( Orat .  Obi.): — “  For  my  part,  I  am  as  happy  to  see  the  defeat  of 
Rome,  as  the  Romans  were  to  see  that  of  Spain  fifteen  years  ago  ; 
and  I  am  sure,  if  you  remember  the  past  history  of  our  nation, 
that  you  will  feel  it  to  be  your  duty  to  do  everything  you  can  to 
procure  the  defeat  of  the  Romans  and  the  success  of  the  Cartha¬ 
ginians.  If  you  agree  with  me,  I  am  satisfied  ;  if  not,  I  will 
endeavour  to  prove,  by  narrating  the  history  of  the  past  war,  that 
ambition,  pride,  avarice,  and  cruelty,  must  inevitably  be  the 
ruin  of  any  nation,  and  that  Rome  can  form  no  exception  to 
this  rule.  ” 

32.  The  angry  and  passionate  queen,  resenting  the  insult  she 
had  received  from  all  the  'wealthiest  inhabitants  of  the  city, 
replied  with  bitterness  ( Oral .  Obi.),  “The  most  exalted  genius  is 
frequently  overborne  by  envy.  I  am  determined  to  do  every¬ 
thing  that  I  can  to  effect  the  ruin  of  this  rebellious  people,  for  I 
am  certain  that  their  wants  will  never  be  satisfied,  and  that 
until  their  wants  are  satisfied  they  will  never  cease  rebelling. 
They  would  persuade  me,  forsooth,  that  the  sovereign  is  made 
for  the  nation,  instead  of  the  nation  being  made  for  the 
sovereign ;  they  complain  that  I  neglect  public  merit,  and 
lavish  the  revenue  of  the  state  upon  unworthy  favourites,  and  that 
all  the  most  important  offices  are  bestowed  by  favour.  For  my 
part,  instead  of  being  moved  to  pity  by  such  complaints  as  these, 

I  shall  collect  my  most  faithful  troops  in  haste  ;  I  will  then 
surround  the  city,  arrest  the  ringleaders,  banish  some,  fine  others, 
kill  others,  and  thus  establish  peace.” 

33.  It  is  said  that  even  this  hard  and  cruel  tyrant  was  touched 
with  gratitude  at  the  haste  with  which  the  poor  lame  cobbler  had 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


159 


come  to  his  assistance.  After  he  had  remarked  that  the  favourites 
of  kings  were  often  the  most  deserving  men  in  a  country,  he 
proceeded  to  describe  the  rebellion  and  the  measures  that 
had  been  taken  to  put  it  down  {Or at.  Red.).  “If,”  he  said, 
“  my  generals,  instead  of  sparing  the  people,  had  destroyed  all  the 
forests  in  the  country,  broken  down  the  bridges  and  burned  the 
villages,  we  should  in  all  probability  have  succeeded,  and  we 
should  not  now  be  obliged  to  ask  for  peace.  We  should 
not  have  before  us  the  spectacle  of  a  city  so  .vast  and  beautiful 
as  this,  besieged  on  all  sides  by  enemies  whom  it  is  impossible 
to  resist,  and  equally  impossible  to  persuade  to  peace.”  Then, 
turning  to  the  bystanders,  who  displayed  much  emotion  at  his 
words,  he  said  (Orai.  Obi.),  “Leave  me;  why  do  you  delay? 
Make  the  best  of  your  way  to  the  nearest  refuge,  for  there  is 
nothing  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  at  any  time  taking  the  city  ; 
and,  while  I  value  your  sympathy,  I  do  not  feel  justified  in  en¬ 
dangering  your  safety.” 


34.  I  cannot  be  persuaded  that  you  have  done  wisely  in 
not  visiting  the  castle.  It  is  a  place  worthy  of  being  seen  for 
its  own  sake,  and  1  hardly  think  that  any  is  more  strongly 
fortified  both  by  nature  and  art  ;  and  to  those  who  have  read 
the  chronicles  of  England  it  is  rendered  more  memorable  by  a 
beautiful  instance  of  filial  piety.  Two  hundred  years  ago,  the 
town  was  besieged  and  greatly  straitened  for  want  of  provisions. 
No  one  could  be  found  bold  enough  to  undertake  the  dangerous 
task  of  conveying  supplies  thither,  until  a  youth,  whose  father 
was  in  the  garrison,  came  forward  and  accepted  the  duty.  For 
several  nights  he  crossed  the  lake,  climbed  the  wall,  and  placed 
pr-ovisions  at  a  spot  where  his  father  would  find  them.  At 
length  he  was  taken  prisoner  and  sentenced  to  death,  to  strike 
terror  into  anyone  who  might  be  disposed  to  render  similar  help 
to  the  besieged.  It  was  the  good  fortune  of  one  of  my  own 
ancestors  to  obtain  pardon  for  him.  W ith  considerable  danger  to 
himself,  he  procured  an  interview  with  the  general,  and  addressed 
him  pretty  nearly  as  follows: — “Affection  to  a  father  is  the 
source  of  patriotism.  You  cannot  put  the  youth  to  death  without 
also  causing  pain  to  every  good  son.”  Not  to  make  a  long 
tale,  he  succeeded  in  his  prayer,  and  the  youth  was  spared.  For 
my  part,  ever  since  I  heard  this  story,  I  have  always  felt  proud  of 
my  ancestor’s  conduct,  and  never  think  of  the  old  castle  but  with 
feelings  of  interest  and  pleasure. 


l6o  GRADU  A  TED  EXERCISES. 

35.  During  the  wars  in  Flanders,  in  the  reign  of  Queen  Anne, 
when  the  Duke  of  Marlborough  and  Prince  Eugene  commanded 
the  allied  army,  a  soldier,  in  the  division  of  the  latter,  was  con¬ 
demned  to  be  hanged  for  marauding.  The  man  happened  to  be 
a  favourite  with  his  officers ;  they  therefore  applied  to  the 
Duke  of  Marlborough,  begging  his  grace  to  interfere.  With  his 
usual  good  nature,  he  accordingly  went  to  Prince  Eugene,  who 
said  ( Orat .  Obi.)  he  never  did,  and  never  would,  consent  to  the 
pardon  of  a  marauder.  {Orat.  Red.)  “Why,”  said  the  duke,  “at 
this  rate,  we  shall  hang  half  the  army  ;  I  pardon  a  great  many.” 
{Orat.  Obi.)  “  That,”  replied  the  prince,  “is  the  reason  that  so 
much  mischief  is  done  by  your  people,  and  that  so  many  suffer 
for  it ;  I  never  pardon  any,  and  therefore  there  are  very  few  to  be 
punished  in  my  army.”  The  duke  still  urged  his  request ;  on 
which  the  prince  said  {Orat.  Obi),  “Grant  me  this  favour. 
Make  inquiry  which  of  us  has  executed  most  men,  and  if  your 
grace  has  not  executed  more  than  I  have  done,  I  will' consent  to 
the  pard<>n  of  this  fellow.”  The  proper  inquiries  were  accord¬ 
ingly  made,  and  it  appeared  that  the  duke  had  executed  far  more 
than  Prince  Eugene,  on  which  he  said  to  the  duke  {Orat.  Red.), 
“There,  my  lord,  you  see  what  example  can  do.  You  pardon 
many,  and  therefore  you  are  forced  to  execute  many  ;  I  never 
pardon  one,  therefore  few  dare  to  offend,  and  of  course  but  few 
suffer.” 


36.  After  Tullius  had  heard  that  the  brave  young  soldier  Balbus 
had  returned  to  the  town  of  Tarentia,  forty  miles  distant,  he 
went  and  visited  him  to  see  whether  he  was  contented  with  his 
position  in  the  army,  and  to  ascertain  how  matters  were  going  on 
in  the  camp.  He  was  delayed  for  a  day  or  two  by  the  illness  of 
an  intimate  friend,  but  three  days  after  Balbus’  return,  Tullius 
arrived  at  Naples  and  called  on  Balbus.  On  seeing  him,  he 
addressed  the  young  soldier  thus  {Orat.  Obi.): — “However 
much,  my  dear  Balbus,  I  am  gratified  by  the  report  of  your 
many  illustrious  achievements,  yet  I  feel  that  as  long  as  you 
are  in  the  army,  your  conduct  can  never  entirely  meet  with 
my  approval.  For  what,  after  all,  is  a  soldier?  He  is  a  man 
that  will  cut*  anyone’s  throat  for  a  shilling  a  day.”  Hereupon 
the  impetuous  Balbus  replied  in  haste  {Orat.  Obi.),  “Why  do 
you  talk  like  this  ?  Pray  cease.  Do  you  not  know  that  a  soldier 
may  sometimes  be  one  of  the  most  deserving  men  in  the  country? 
Besides,  whether  your  observations  are  true  or  false,  they  are  sure 
to  be  useless,  as  long  as  human  nature  remains  as  it  is.” 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


161 


37.  “We  should  not  have  taken  these  harsh  measures,”  said 
the  ferocious  old  general,  “  against  all  the  most  respectable  citizens 
in  Rome,  if  we  had  not  known  for  certain  that  the  people  in 
Rome  will  never  be  quiet,  and  will  never  submit  to  our  dominion 
in  peace.”  He  then  continued  to  speak  as  follows  : — “  Even  all 
the  brilliant  successes  of  our  army  have  been  unable  to  convince 
the  Italians  that  resistance  is  impossible,  and  that  it  is  absolutely 
necessary  for  them  to  come  to  terms.  There  will  always  be 
found  cruel  generals  and  undisciplined  and  disobedient  soldiers, 
and  I  confess  that,  although  we  have  done  our  best  to  avoid 
injuring  private  individuals,  yet  the  life  of  the  agriculturists  in 
Italy  during  the  past  four  months  has  been  by  no  means  an 
enviable  one.  But  did  you  not  know  when  you  went  to  war 
the  risk  you  were  incurring  ?  And  did  not  we  take  up  arms  to 
improve  our  condition  if  possible  ?  Cease,  then,  from  unavailing 
complaints.” 

38.  {Or at.  Red.)  “  Look  at  my  withered  body,”  said  the  camel 
to  Jupiter.  “  Why  have  you  not  given  me  the  plumpness  of  the 
horse,  the  ox,  and  the  elephant  ?  Why  have  you  given  me  so  few 
muscles,  and  made  me  so  ugly?  And  why  have  you  compelled 
me  to  dwell  in  a  dry,  barren,  and  fiat  country  like  Arabia  ?  ”  To 
these  complaints  Jupiter  answered  with  a  smile  {Orat.  Obi.), 
“My  excellent  friend,  you  will  find  that  I  have  a  reason  for  all 
I  have  done.  If  I  have  made  you  lean  and  -deprived  you  of  all 
superfluous  muscles  and  flesh,  it  is  because  in  the  dry  barren 
deserts  of  Arabia  it  is  not  possible  to  obtain  much  food.  Why 
else  did  I  give  you  this  powerful  jaw-bone  except  that  you  might 
chew  the  hardest  nutriment?  For  the  same  reason  I  gave  you  a 
small  stomach  to  prevent  your  eating  too  much.  And  as  for  my 
obliging  you  to  live  in  Arabia,  how,  with  your  fat,  fleshy  feet, 
could  you  ascend  the  heights  of  mountains,  or  walk  without 
slipping  in  the  mud  of  marshy  districts  ?  Instead  of  talking  an y 
more  nonsense,  be  kind  enough  to  return  to  your  work.” 

39.  [Orat.  Obi.)  “If  the  matter  is  neglected  longer,”  said  the 
wise  Tullius,  “the  country  wall  not  be  safe.  We  ought  not  to 
hesitate  in  this  great  calamity  to  choose  a  general  to  meet  the 
enemy  before  they  arrive  at  Rome  ;  and  nobody,  I  think,  will 
deny  that  we  ought  not  to  have  hesitated  when  the  Cartha¬ 
ginians  were  first  collecting  their  forces.  For  when  they  were  at 
the  river,  not  more  than  ten  miles  off,  would  it  not  have  been 
easy  for  us,  even  with  a  small  number  of  men,  to  repel  a  regular 

M 


162 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


army?  We  have  lost  an  opportunity ;  but  now,  without  delaying 
longer,  let  us  collect  with  speed  our  bravest  citizens,  and  before 
the  enemy  advances  further  I  hope  to  crush  him  with  ease.” 
When  they  heard  this,  the  soldiers  shouted  for  joy  ;  declared 
to  a  man  that  they  would  have  Scipio  for  their  general ;  crossed 
the  bridge  with  speed  ;  marched  for  three  days  through  a  waste 
district  called  Gergovia ;  met  the  enemy  suddenly  near  the  Anio, 
and  completely  defeated  them. 

40.  When  Field  Marshal  Balbus  was  taken  prisoner  at  the  battle 
of  Corioli,  a  Numidian  hussar,  who  seized  him,  perceiving  that  he 
had  a  valuable  ring,  said,  “Give  me  your  ring.”  The  marshal 
instantly  complied  with  the  demand  of  the  captor.  A  short  time 
after,  when  he  was  liberated  by  General  Tullius,  and  the 
Numidian  hussar  had  become  a  prisoner  in  his  turn,  he  with  great 
unconcern  drew  the  marshal’s  ring  from  his  finger,  and  presenting 
it  to  him  said  ( Orat .  Obi.),  “Since  fate  has  turned  against  me, 
take  back  this  ring  ;  it  belonged  to  you,  and  it  would  not  be  so 
well  to  let  others  strip  me  of  it.”  Pleased  with  the  honesty  of 
the  hussar,  the  marshal  bade  him  keep  the  ring  in  remembrance 
of  his  having  once  had  its  owner  for  his  prisoner. 

41.  Without  attending  to  the  arguments  of  the  merciful  officer, 
the  ferocious  and  passionate  general  replied  {Orat.  Red.), 
“  Whether  you  are  speaking  the  truth  or  not,  what  you  say  has  no 
effect  upon  me,  and  I  never  asked  you  whether  it  was  your  desire 
to  spare  the  lives  of  the  citizens  of  Corioli,  a  city  that  has  done  us 
as  much  harm  as  it  possibly  could.  What  I  asked  was,  how  soon 
it  could  be  taken,  for  there  is  no  doubt  it  will  be  taken  sooner 
than  people  think.  Now,  instead  of  giving  me  advice,  I  order 
you,  as  I  ordered  you  ten  days  ago,  to  collect  all  your  bravest 
soldiers  and  to  prepare  for  immediate  action.”  On  hearing  this, 
the  young  man  replied  {Orat.  Obi.),  “If  I  have  spoken  freely, 
it  is  because  I  am  persuaded  that  unless  you  do  your  best  to 
conciliate  the  men  of  Corioli,  and  unless  you  promise  to  send 
them  back  all  the  hostages  they  have  given  us,  not  merely  will 
you  lose  the  hope  of  success,  but  the  very  safety  of  the  army 
will  be  in  danger.  You  may  blame  yourself  for  your  present 
misfortunes,  for  you  might  have  managed  matters  very  differently. 
If  you  had  taken  the  advice  I  gave  you,  you  would  not  now  be 
in  this  great  difficulty.  Every  town  in  Italy  would  favour  you, 
and  not  a  man  would  wish  to  oppose  your  progress.  I  know 
of  my  own  knowledge,  that  300  of  the  bravest  men  of  Naples 
determined  to  help  you  on  condition  you  did  not  storm  Corioli.” 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


1 63 


42.  {Or at.  Obi.)  “I  may  well  complain  of  the  neglect  with 
which  I  have  been  treated  by  my  best  friends,”  cried  the  proud 
and  passionate  queen.  “  I  have  no  one  to  help  me,  no  one  to 
advise  me  what  to  do  in  this  great  calamity.  Instead  of  coming 
to  this  dangerous  place  I  might  have  travelled  with  ease  to  the 
city  of  Athens,  which  is  not  more  than  thirty-two  miles  off,  and 
if  I  had  done  so  I  should  have  escaped  my  cruel  enemies  and  now 
I  should  be  in  safety.”  On  hearing  this,  the  aged  Tullius,  the 
wisest  of  her  nobility,  said  (Orat.  Obi.),  “  Why  does  your  majesty 
complain?  For  these  last  two  years  you  have  been  desiring 
nothing  so  much  as  an  opportunity  for  engaging  with  the  enemy 
— a  desire  that  is  now  on  the  point  of  being  gratified.  Now, 
therefore,  that  the  opportunity  has  arrived,  why  do  you  delay 
to  avail  yourself  of  it  ?  Why  does  the  army  remain  here  inactive  ? 
I  ask  your  pardon  for  speaking  with  freedom,  but  if  your  majesty 
does  not  communicate  to  the  officers  the  exact  time  at  which  you 
will  fight  to-morrow,  and  the  army  is  not  prepared  for  an 
immediate  conflict,  the  mercenaries,  with  their  usual  fickleness, 
will  desert  your  standard,  and  you  cannot  possibly  hope  to 
succeed.” 

43.  {Orat.  Rect.)  “I  wish  you  would  tell  me,” said  the  wise 
philosopher  to  the  young  man,  “what  is  a  worthy  object  to 
pursue  through  life.”  {Orat.  Obi.)  “  Tne  first  thing,”  said  the 
young  man,  “that  I  should  like  to  do,  would  be  to  succeed  in 
business;  then,  after  amassing  a  considerable  fortune,  I  should 
like  to  rise  till  I  had  become  one  of  the  principal  persons  in  my 
neighbourhood  ;  then  there  are  all  sorts  of  prospects  that  would 
be  open  for  me.  With  a  little  tact,  and  the  judicious  expen¬ 
diture  of  a  little  money,  I  could  get  into  parliament ;  and  when 
a  man  is  once  in  parliament,  there  is  no  limit  to  the  career 
before  him.”  {Orat.  Red.)  “But  what  do  you  expect  to  do  in 
parliament?”  said  the  philosopher.  (Orat.  Red.)  “I  should 
endeavour  to  create  a  sensation,”  replied  the  young  man.  (Orat. 
Obi. )  “  But  do  not  you  think,”  said  the  philosopher,  “  that  such 
an  object  as  this  is  unworthy  of  a  really  noble  man  ?  Instead  of 
endeavouring  to  make  a  sensation,  had  you  not  better  find  out 
what  work  you  are  best  fitted  to  do,  and  do  that  as  well  as  you 
can  ?  Believe  me,  the  highest  object  of  a  human  being  is  to 
make  the  world  a  little  better  for  his  having  lived,  and  not 
to  make  a  sensation.” 

44.  When  the  Samnites  under  their  brave  king  Tullius  defeated 
the  Etrurians  in  the  battle  of  Cumae,  the  King  of  Etruria,  seeing 


GRADU  A  TED  EXERCISES. 


164 

his  troops  flee,  asked  what  was  the  number  of  the  Samnites  who 
were  making  all  this  slaughter  ?  He  was  told  that  it  was  only 
King  Tullius  and  his  men,  and  that  they  were  all  on  foot.  ( Orat . 
Red.)  “Then,”  said  the  crafty  Etrurian,  “  God  forbid  that  such 
a  noble  fellow  as  King  Tullius  should  march  on  foot,”  and  sent 
him  a  noble  charger.  The  messenger  took  it  and  said,  {Oral.  Obi.) 
“  Sire,  the  King  of  Etruria  sends  you  this  charger,  that  you  may 
not  be  on  foot.  Be  pleased  to  accept  it  as  a  token  of  his  respect.- 
The  brave  Tullius  was  as  cunning  as  his  enemy,  and  ordered  one 
of  his  squires  to  mount  the  horse  in  order  to  try  him.  The  squire 
obeyed :  but  the  horse  proved  a  fiery  one,  and  the  squire  being 
unable  to  hold  him  in,  he  set  off  at  full  speed  to  the  pavilion  of 
the  King  of  Etruria.  The  king  expected  he  had  caught  King 
Tullius,  and  was  not  a  little  mortified  to  discover  his  mistake. 

45 .  After  he  had  wish  patience  heard  the  rash  young  soldier 
make  his  defence,  the  general  addressed  him  in  severe  tones  as 
follows  ( Orat.  Obi.) : — “  I  feared  some  time  ago  that  I  had  made  a 
mistake  in  sending  you  to  take  the  command  of  the  forces  in 
Rome,  and  now  I  know  for  certain  that  you  are  not  yet  fit  for  the 
command  of  a.  large  army;  I  shall  therefore  order  you  to  return 
to  your  home  ten  days  hence.  You  have  pleaded  that  your 
intentions  were  good  ;  but  that  is  not  the  question.  There  is 
no  one  but  believes  in  the  rectitude  of  your  intentions,  and  thinks 
you  honest  and  well-meaning  ;  but  however  well-meaning  one 
may  be,  a  man  is  not  fit  (to)  for  command  without  self-control, 
tact,  judgment,  and  energy  ;  and  these  qualities  you  do  not 
possess.”  The  young  man  in  sorrow  replied  [Orat.  Red. ),  “  I  have 
nothing  more  to  say  in  self-defence;  I  feel  that  I  no  longer  deserve 
your  confidence ;  and  though  I  am  conscious  that  I  meant  well, 
yet  I  must  admit  that  I  ought  not  to  have  left  the  city  against 
orders.  If  I  had  known  my  defects  sooner,  I  should  not  have 
asked  you  to  appoint  me  a  general.” 

46.  {Orat.  Red.)  “Away  with  these  compliments,”  said  the 
grateful  Balbus  ;  “  the  attachment  between  us  is  too  great  for  it  to 
be  right,  either  that  you  should  offer  me  thanks  for  any  attention, 
or  I  you.  I  have  not  paid  you  an  attention,  I  have  repaid  it.  I 
think  that  I  have  received  acknowledgment  enough  indeed,  if 
what  I  have  taken  real  pains  to  do  be  acceptable  to  you.  There 
is  no  reason  why  you  should  thank  me,  if  for  your  numerous 
uncommon  kindnesses  towards  myself  I  have  repaid  you  with 
this  trifling  service.  So  far  from  deserving  praise,  I  should 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


165 

have  deserved  tD  be  considered  most  ungrateful  if  I  had  failed 
my  friend.  Whatever  I  possess,  whatever  can  be  done  by  my 
pains,  reckon  as  much  your  own  as  your  own  property.  I  think 
that  I  have  received  a  benefit  in  the  kind  construction  you 
have  put  upon  my  services.  If  you  heartily  approve  my 
services,  mind  you  make  a  more  frequent  use  of  them.  I  shall 
not  believe  that  you  are  pleased  with  what  I  have  -done,  unless, 
whenever  you  want  anything  of  mine,  you  take  whatever  you 
like,  instead  of  asking  for  it.” 

47.  Amid  a  profound  silence,  the  renowned  and  eloquent  Tullius 
arose  and  spoke  as  follows  ( Orat .  Obi. )  : — “Why  do  we  delay? 
Is  the  crafty  and  cruel  Balbus  delaying?  Do  we  not  know  for 
certain  that  he  is  making  it  his  object  to  betray  his  country? 
Beware  of  regarding  your  private  interests  and  disregarding  the 
interests  of  the  public.  If  you  delay,  it  is  all  over  with  the  state  ; 
either  Rome  or  Balbus  must  fall  :  choose  which  shall  perish.” 
The  senate  heard  the  orator  with  admiration,  adopted  his 
opinion,  and  decreed  that  the  consuls  should  provide  for  the  safety 
of  the  country.  On  receiving  this  intelligence,  the  conspirators, 
in  fear  and  trembling,  betook  themselves  with  all  diligence  to 
their  respective  homes,  and  none  dared  to  utter  so  much  as  a 
word  in  opposition.  They  fled  in  different  directions,  some  to 
Sicily,  some  to  Athens ;  poor  old  Cathegus,  now  an  old  man  of 
seventy-three,  was  the  only  one  left  at  Rome. 

48.  {Orat.  Red.)  “There  is  no  doubt,”  said  the  ferocious 
general,  “  that  all  that  have  been  taken  with  arms  in  their  hands 
will  be  banished  ;  for  indeed  it  will  be  the  height  of  folly,  if 
men,  who  without  any  prospect  of  success  rebel  against  their 
king,  are  spared,  and  allowed  to  go  unpunished.”  To  this  the 
wise  and  merciful  king  replied  with  gentleness,  but  at  the  same 
time  with  firmness  {Orat.  Obi.),  “  There  is  certainly  a  great  deal 
in  what  you  say,  and  I  recognize  the  zeal  with  which  you  have 
espoused  my  cause  ;  but  remember  that  because  a  man  pities  the 
innocent,  it  does  not  necessarily  follow  that  he  is  weak-minded. 
Indeed,  oppression  is  as  impolitic  as  it  is  cruel.  Why,  then,  do 
we  delay  to  throw  open  the  prisons,  and  to  allow  all  the 
best  of  the  prisoners  to  return  with  speed  to  Rome,  especially 
as  they  have  not  bread  enough  for  ;he  people  there  ?  I,  for  my 
part,  will  fake  care  of  the  destruction  of  the  bridge  th  t  spans 
rhe  Tiber,  and  I  hope  that  in  a  few  days,  by  surrounding  the  city 
with  a  wall,  we  shall  make  the  rebels  see  ihac  their  position 
is  untenable,  and  we  shall  induce  them  to  lay  down  their  aims.* 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


1 66 

49.  Tullius,  turning  with  a  look  of  contempt  to  Balbus, 
addressed  him  in  these  words  \Orat.  Red.)  : — “I  do  not  know 
what  reason  there  is  why  you  should  think  you  may  keep  your 
own  property,  and  use  that  of  other  persons.  There  never  was 
any  reason  why  you  should  think  so.  What  would  you  have 
thought,  if  a  man  had  violently  entered  your  house,  beaten 
your  servants,  insulted  your  family,  taken  your  money  and  all 
your  valuables,  and  refused  to  make  satisfaction?  But  this  is 
just  what  you  have  done.  I  ask  you  then  with  what  decency 
you  can  attempt  to  excuse  such  conduct.  Actions  like  these  have 
made  you  so  hated  that  there  is  not  a  man  in  your  neighbourhood 
but  would  be  delighted  to  hear  of  your  death.  Indeed,  you  have 
so  alienated  all,  that  even  your  friends  without  exception  desert 
you.  A  man  must  be  a  villain  indeed  to  be  deserted  by  his 
friends,  and  not  to  have  a  single  person  to  take  his  part.  Where 
is  your  old  reputation  for  spirit  and  courage  which  you  had  when 
a  youth  ?  If  you  had  a  spark  of  courage,  you  would  not  bear 
such  ignominy  with  tameness.”  On  hearing  this,  the  wretched 
Balbus,  spite  of  his  ordinary  impudence,  was  touched  with  remorse. 
He  went  home,  told  his  servant  he  was  ill,  shut  himself  up  in  his 
bedroom,  made  his  will,  took  out  of  a  chest  a  good  stout  rope, 
fixed  a  nail  in  the  wall,  fastened  the  rope  to  the  nail,  and  hung 
himself — thus  endeavouring  to  heal  a  life  of  error  by  one  last 
fatal  error. 


50.  When  the  Gauls  under  the  command  of  Brennus  had  got 
possession  of  Placentia,  they  carried  their  cruelty  to  their  Italian 
prisoners  to  the  severest  extremities,  making  them  work  like 
horses  at  their  mills,  and  in  drawing  water.  The  acute  and 
learned  Balbus,  in  his  travels,  relates  that  he  met  some  of  these 
unfortunate  wretches  on  his  first  entrance  into  the  city,  who  had 
been  liberated  that  morning  from  their  dungeon,  and  who  were 
endeavouring  literally  to  crawdto  the  village  of  Alma,  which  was 
but  ten  miles  off.  ( Ouit .  Obi.)  “The  legs  of  these  poor  creatures 
were  swollen  to  a  size  that  was  tri.ly  horrible,  and  their  eyes 
wereterrible  from  inflammation.  Some,  too  weak  to  support  them¬ 
selves,  had  fallen  on  the  sand,  where  they  were  exposed  to  the 
scorching  beams  of  the  sun.  Immediately  on  seeing  Balbus  and 
his  companions,  they  uttered  such  moans  as  might  have  pierced 
the  hearts  of  their  cruel  oppressors.  They  begged  for  water,  but 
the  travellers  had  none  to  give  them  :  and  all  they  could  do  was 
to  prevail  on  one  or  two  of  the  men  of  Alma  to  promise  to  take 
care  of  them  until  relief  could  be  obtained.  Of  these  unfortunate 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES  167 

captives,  upwards  of  forty  perished  every  day  from  the  miseries 
to  which  their  conquerors  exposed  them.” 

51.  The  industrious  and  acute  philosopher  turned  with  calmness 
to  the  rash  young  man  and  said  ( Orat .  Obi.),  “  I  am  surprised  at 
your  acting  with  such  thoughtlessness  and  want  of  good  feeling ; 
you  have  occupied  now  for  ten  years  an  honourable  position  in 
the  estimation  of  all  Rome,  and  you  would  now  give  up  this 
position.  Instead  of  paying  attention  to  the  duties  of  your 
office,  you  propose  to  bury  yourself  in  a  life  of  contemplation, 
and  to  desert  your  family.  If  ten  days  ago  your  best  friends  had 
known  of  your  intention,  and  the  haste  with  which  you  intended 
to  leave  them,  they  would  all  to  a  man  have  expressed  to  you  the 
sorrow  with  which  they  received  your  determination.  Give  up 
then  this  hasty,  thoughtless  plan  ;  your  friends  will  be  delighted 
to  receive  you  home.  Did  you  not  hear  yesterday  that  your 
most  faithful  servants  were  seeking  you  everywhere  ?  ” 

52.  This  great  and  illustrious  general  would  soon  have  obtained 
all  the  help  he  wanted  from  his  countrymen,  and  would  have 
driven  the  enemy  out  of  the  country  in  disgrace,  had  he  not  been 
prevented  by  the  arrival  of  his  great  adversary  Tullius.  As  soon 
as  the  latter  reached  the  camp  he  began  to  sow  discontent  among 
all  the  bravest  soldiers.  He  went  first  to  one,  then  to  another, 
and  endeavoured  to  persuade  them  to  mutiny  by  such  words  as 
these  ( Orat .  Obi.)  : — “  Do  you  know  that  your  general  means  to 
betray  you  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy  upon  the  first  opportunity? 
If  not,  why  is  the  camp  placed  in  this  disadvantageous  position  ? 
Why  are  we  wasting  our  time  instead  of  marching  upon  the  un¬ 
defended  city  of  Nuceria,  barely  ten  miles  away?  Rouse  up  your 
courage,  and  depend  upon  it  that,  if  you  are  prepared  to  resist 
the  commands  of  your  general,  I  shall  be  ready  to  put  myself  at 
your  head  and  to  take  upon  myself  the  responsibility  of  leading 
you  in  this  terrible  crisis.  Once  this  would  have  been  difficult. 
Now  nothing  prevents  you  obtaining  your  rights  once  for  all.” 

53.  The  general  made  answer  as  follows  {Orat.  Obi.): — “The 
enemy  that  you  have  been  so  long  seeking  is  now  only  two  miles 
distant  :  prepare  then  to  conquer  o»  to  die.  I  will  send  spies  to 
bring  me  word  of  their  numbers  and  the  position  of  their  camp  ; 
this  done,  I  must  entrust  the  rest  to  you.  Remember  that  your 
country  depends  upon  y.ou.  If  you  conquer,  you  will  enjoy 
ease,  plenty,  freedom,  and  glory  ;  if  you  are  defeated,  you  will 


l68 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


experience  the  only  treatment  you  will  deserve,  that  of  slaves:  up 
then  and  quit  yourselves  like  men.  Ten  days  ago  you  were 
eagerly  longing  for  a  battle  :  do  you  now  shrink  back  ?  Ask 
yourselves  whether  you  prefer  a  glorious  death  or  an  in¬ 
glorious  flight.”  At  these  words  the  soldiers  were  filled  with 
fury  ;  they  cast  aside  fear,  they  forgot  their  complaints,  and  pro¬ 
mised  one  another  to  conquer  or  to  die  :  and  there  was  not  one 
who  thought  victory  for  a  moment  doubtful.  Soon  afterwards 
all  retired  to  their  several  tents,  and  there,  by  the  command  of  the 
general,  rested  themselves  till  night  brought  darkness  and  the 
conflict.  The  general  then  ordered  all  the  bravest  centurions  to 
appear  before  him,  for  the  purpose  of  receiving  their  several 
instructions. 

54.  After  the  general  had  cast  round  his  eyes,  and  had  examined 

each  rank  in  turn,  he  turned  to  the  place  where  all  the  bravest 
officers  were  assembled,  and  said  {Orat.  Red.)'.  “Send  some 
one  at  once  to  tell  the  king  that  I  have  examined  the  soldiers, 
and  that  no  one  here  is  guilty.”  After  these  words  he  turned 
towards  the  soldiers.  He  was  ashamed  of  them,  he  said  ( Orat . 
Obi. )  ;  he  could  scarcely  believe  them  capable  of  such  gross  in¬ 
gratitude  and  cowardice.  Why  had  they  arms  in  their  hands 
bufto  fight  against  the  enemies  of  their  country  ?  “  Why,”  he 

added,  ‘  ‘  do  we  delay  here,  as  though  we  did  not  purpose  battle. 
Away  with  such  shameful  cowardice  !  {Orat.  Obi.  still.)  If  you 
fight  bravely,  I  promise  you  16/.  a-piece  ;  if  not,  you  shall  be 
decimated,  and  no  Englishman  will  assert  that  I  have  acted  with 
harshness  towards  you.  Ten  days  ago  you  were  all  clamouring 
for  battle  ;  why  do  you  now  decline  it  ?  When  in  the  city  you 
cried  for  war  ;  now  that  you  are  in  the  camp  do  you  cry  for 
peace?”  Although  the  general  had  not  been  at  the  head  of  his 
army  more  than  three  months,  the  soldiers  had  learned  to  respect 
him.  He  was  only  thirty-two  years  old,  but  in  this  great  peril 
he  displayed  the  sagacity  of  age  with  the  courage  of  youth. 
Though  therefore  he  addressed  them  with  bitterness  and  with 
reproaches,  they  listened  to  him  in  silence,  instead  of  threatening 
him  as  they  had  threatened  their  former  commander. 

55.  The  inhabitants  of  this  island  were  so  bold  that  they 
would  have  preferred  a  thousand  deaths  to  disgrace  if  the  choice 
had  been  necessary.  One  brave  farmer  was  asked  why  he  would 
sooner  die  nobly  on  the  field  of  battle  than  live  ignobly  at  home. 
He  answered  {Orat.  Red.),  “  Because  I  am  more  afraid  of  shame 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


169 

than  of  death.”  It  happened  once  that  they  were  invaded  by 
the  powerful  nation  of  the  Ventidii,  who  landed  on  their  shores, 
marched  up  to  their  capital,  devastated  the  country  all  round,  and 
then  laid  siege  to  the  city.  The  citizens  determined  to  resist 
with  boldness.  Instead  of  throwing  themselves  at  their  enemies’ 
feet,  they  sent  away  their  families,  their  old  men,  and  their 
treasures,  and  prepared  to  resist  with  desperation.  Though  they 
were  prevented  by  scruples  from  committing  suicide,  they  pro¬ 
mised  one  another  to  fight  so  desperately  that  the  enemy  should 
not  take  them  alive.  When  they  were  all  assembled  in  arms, 
their  general  addressed  them  thus  ( Orai .  Red.  and  Obi.)  : — “  Re¬ 
member,  citizens,  that  victory  or  death  awaits  you.  I  will  say 
no  more  ;  the  enemy  is  at  the  gates  :  what  reason  is  there  for 
delaying  ?  ” 

56.  The  despairing  husbandmen,  looking  at  the  rising  flood, 
exhorted  one  another  to  patience,  and  the  eldest  of  them  all,  turning 
to  his  fearful  companion?  said  [Oral.  Red.),  “  Be  of  good  cheer  ! 
There  are  not  less  than  300  of  us.  Yesterday  I  sent  a  messenger 
to  ask  for  help  ;  to-day  I  have  sent  another  to  report  our  perilous 
condition.  I  am  persuaded  that  our  houses,  if  destroyed,  will 
easily  be  repaired,  and  we  shall  recover  all  the  cattle  that  survive 
the  deluge.”  Then,  hearing  a  few  of  them  murmur,  he  con¬ 
tinued  thus  (Oral.  Obi.)  : — “  We  must  do  our  best  not  to  disgrace 
our  reputation,  for  indeed  we  are  in  such  a  terrible  position  that 
we  need  all  our  faculties.  What  help  is  there  except  in  industry 
and  courage?  Nothing  but  God  and  our  right  hands  can  rescue 
us  from  destruction.  I  am  now  old,  and  very  differ-ent  from 
what  I  was  when  a  boy  ;  but  I  will  use  all  the  strength  I  have 
in  the  task  of  assisting  the  wretched,  and  I  am  persuaded  that 
there  is  not  one  of  you  that  will  not  do  the  same.  I  hoped,  indeed, 
that  the  waters  would  have  diminished  five  days  ago ;  but, 
though  you  are  disappointed,  remember  that  you  are  English¬ 
men,  and,  whether  the  waters  rise  or  fall,  behave  as  English¬ 
men  should.  To  work  !  why  do  we  wait  longer?” 

57*  The  citizens  at  first  stood  by  in  silence,  and  all  the  most 
respectable  of  them  manifested,  by  the  expression  of  their  coun¬ 
tenance,  the  sorrow  they  felt.  At  last  the  eldest  of  their  number, 
on  hearing  of  the  taking  of  the  city,  after  asking  her  majesty  to 
allow  him  to  speak,  stepped  forward  and  addressed  the  queen 
a?  follows  (Oral.  Obi.): — “Your  majesty  has  asked  us  what 
cause  we  have  to  complain,  and  has  declared  that  as  long,  as 


170 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


discontent  prevails  in  our  country  prosperity  will  not  increase. 
Suffer  us,  however,  to  remind  you  that  your  generals,  without  even 
hearing  what  we  have  to  say  in  our  defence,  have  razed  four  of 
our  best  towns,  and  are  even  now  butchering  300  men  a  day.  The 
meekest  and  mildest  will  turn  upon  an  enemy  that  threatens 
their  race  with  extinction;  already  there  are  rumours  of  re¬ 
bellion  ;  these  rumours  will  soon  increase,  and  rebellion  will 
commence.  We  should  have  resisted  this  cruelty  before  now, 
if  we  had  been  able,  and  we  are  sure  that  if  your  majesty  does  not 
as  soon  as  possible  command  these  cruel  generals  to'  desist,  you 
will  soon  not  have  One  faithful  subject  in  the  country.  Pardon 
our  freedom.  Is  it  not  much  better  that  we  should  say  what  we 
feel  than  that  your  Majesty’s  empire  should  be  endangered  ?  ” 

58.  On  hearing  this,  the  brave  but  rash  general  replied  in  anger 
(Oral  Obi.) Soldiers  !  I  am  surprised  at  your  cowardice  ; 
and  I  did  not  think  that  the  men  whom  I  have  been  commanding 
for  twenty  years  would  have  deserted  me  in  this  emergency.  Is 
there  any  hope  of  success  except  in  bravery  ?  Did  you  not 
promise  when  you  swore  fidelity  to  me  nine  years  ago,  soon 
after  the  capture  of  the  two  camps  near  Naples,  that  you  would 
always  ob’ey  the  slightest  intimation  of  my  wishes?  Away  ! 
You  are  no  longer  worthy  to  be  my  soldiers,  nor  am  I  coward 
enough  to  be  a  fit  general  for  you  and  the  like  of  you.”  At 
these  words,  the  most  respectable  of  the  soldiers  were  much 
grieved.  After  a  short  deliberation  they  sent  the  brave  captain 
Tullius  to  the  general,  and  he  spoke  briefly  to  this  effect  (Oral. 
Red. )  :  that  the  whole  army  were  determined  to  obey  the  general, 
with  the  exception  of  one  or  two  mutineers,  whom  they  would 
select  and  hand  over  to  the  general  for  execution. 

59.  The  brave  soldier  continued  his  narrative  amid  the  attention 
of  all  present  ( Orat .  Red.)  : — “On  leaving  Naples  the  enemy 
proceeded  with  600  of  their  bravest  horsemen,  and  10,000 
infantry,  to  Nola,  a  town  that  is  at  no  very  great  distance  from 
Naples,  and  is  a  convenient  station  for  troops.  Here  they  com¬ 
mitted  all  sorts  of  atrocities  ;  they  slew  some  twro  and  tortured 
others,  arrested  all  the  most  wealthy  citizens,  burnt  down  the 
principal  buildings,  and  destroyed  the  bridge ;  finally  they 
marched  out,  leaving  the  place  a  ruin.  And  if  our  forces  had 
not  arrived  in  t-ime  to  save  Praeneste,  that  town  also  would  have 
suffered  the  same  fate.”  (Oral.  Obi.)  “Indeed,”  continued  the 
soldier  with  earnestness,  “this  is  the  most  cruel  war  that  I  ever 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


I7I 

heard  of ;  the  conquered  are  not  spared  on  either  side,  and  the 
bravest  soldiers  are  hardened  by  war  till  they  take  pleasure  in 
cruelty.  You,  my  friends,  are  happy  in  never  having  expe¬ 
rienced  the  horrors  of  war  ;  do  your  best,  then,  to  keep  them  at  a 
distance  from  your  shores,  and  do  not  grudge  a  few  thousand 
pounds  for  this  purpose.” 

60.  ( Orat .  Red.)  “  With  all  his  faults,”  said  the  kind-hearted 
soldier,  weeping,  “  our  general  was  brave,  just,  and  merciful,  and 
there  was  no  one  that  did  not  trust  him.”  Then,  turning  to  his 
fellow-soldiers,  who  were  assembled  in  great  numbers  to  ask  for 
their  pay,  he  said  [Orat.  Obi.),  “Cease  from  thus  execrating 
the  memory  of  the  dead  ;  have  you  forgotten  the  many  occasions 
on  which  our  general  led  us  to  victory  ?  Can  you  not  remember 
the  many  brilliant  distinctions  we  gained  under  his  command  ? 
Did  we  ever  prefer  a  reasonable  request  to  him  that  he  would  not 
grant?  But  this  is  just  what  you  always  do — you  curse  to-day  the 
man  whom  you  will  bless  to-morrow.”  This  was  what  the  brave 
captain  Tullius  said,  and  if  the  othes  soldiers  had  been  like  him, 
the  rebellion  would  have  been  quelled,  and  the  city  of  Naples, 
with  all  its  fortifications  and  supplies,  would  not  have  been 
surrendered  to  the  enemy  in  such  haste.  But,  instead  of  listening 
to  him,  the  infuriated  soldiers  selected  the  most  turbulent  of  their 
number  they  could  find,  and,  under  their  leadership,  marched  in 
haste  to  Rome. 

61.  [Orat.  Red.)  “You  will  have  no  chance  of  attaining  the 
truth,”  said  the  wise  philosopher  to  the  young  and  thoughtless 
Tullius,  “  unless  you  bestow  more  patience  upon  the  investigation 
of  truth  ;  ”  then,  seeing  the  young  man  preparing  to  interrupt  him 
without  allowing  him  to  finish  his  sentence,  he  said  [Orat.  Obi.), 
“  Suffer  me  to  finish  what  I  am  saying.  Have  you  persuaded 
yourself  that  you  are  seriously  studying,  while  you  are  merely 
taking  up  from  time  to  time  any  subject  that  attracts  your  atten¬ 
tion  and  learning  a  smattering  of  it  ?  Did  I  not  endeavour  to 
persuade  you  to  study  some  one  science  with  thoroughness  and 
steadiness  ?  And  did  I  not  propose  to  give  you  all  the  assistance 
I  could,  if  you  liked  to  study  the  history  of  your  nation  and  your 
national  literature  ?  Without  knowing  something  of  the  history 
of  one’s  nation,  it  is  impossible  for  a  man  to  be  a  gentleman, 
much  less  a  successful  politician.  And  I  will  further  beg 
you  to  consider  the  extent  to  which  a  desultory  course  of  study 
and  the  acquisition  of  a  smattering  of  many  subjects  tends  to 


172 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


make  a  man  conceited,  frivolous,  and  idle,  if  not  positively 
immoral.  ” 

62.  The  angry  and  sorrowful  queen  scarcely  knew  in  this  great 
calamity  which  alternative  to  prefer,  whether  it  was  better  to 
give  up  her  empire,  or  to  run  the  risk  of  being  killed.  How¬ 
ever,  with  her  usual  firmness,  she  soon  decided  on  the  fit  course 
to  pursue.  Sending  for  the  sergeant  of  her  body-guard,  she 
informed  him  of  all  that  had  occurred,  and  requested  him  to  send 
the  ten  strongest  men  that  he  had,  armed  and  prepared  for  a 
journey  to  Rome  ( Orat .  Obi.),  “Meanwhile,”  she  said,  “I 
shall  remain  here  ;  and  though  I  am  now  an  object  of  pity,  the 
time  will  come  when  I  shall  be  admired  by  my  friends  and 
dreaded  by  my  foes,  and  there  will  be  no  one  who  will  maintain 
that  the  queen  of  Rome  did  not  behave  with  courage  and  with 
wisdom.”  After  she  had  spoken  thus,  she  left  the  palace  with 
the  intention  of  quitting  the  city.  But  so  great  was  the  fury  of 
the  crowd,  consequent  on  the  queen’s  refusal  to  appoint  her  suc¬ 
cessor,  that  from  sunrise  to  sunset  they  beset  the  city  gates, 
demanding  a  change  of  ministers  and  the  execution  of  the  unfor¬ 
tunate  courtier  whom  the  queen  had  chosen  last  for  her  principal 
adviser — a  request  which  they  well  knew  the  queen  would  never 
grant,  even  though  her  refusal  might  cost  her  her  own  blood 
and.  that  of  all  her  most  faithful  soldiers. 

63.  On  finding  that  his  friends  were  in  this  great  misfortune, 
the  wise  and  prudent  philosopher  turned  to  the  rash  young  Tullius 
and  advised  him  as  follows  ( Oral .  Obi.): — “If  you  had  only 
listened  to  the  advice  I  gave  you  ten  years  ago,  you  would  not 
have  been  brought  into  this  great  peril,  and  you  would  not  have 
been  forced  to  seek  safety  by  such  disgraceful  means.  What  has 
been  done,  however,  cannot  be  undone.  Why,  therefore,  do  you 
delay  longer  here  ?  Did  not  your  wise  mother,  when  she  sent 
money  to  you  at  Rome  not  very  long  ago,  send  a  friend  at  the 
same  time  to  inform  you  of  the  pleasure  with  which  she  had  heard 
that  your  life  was  spared,  and  of  her  willingness  to  receive  you 
home  whenever  you  thought  fit  to  return?  Cease  complaining 
then,  and  prepare  to  quit  this  place  for  Rome  at  a  moment’s 
notice.”  On  hearing  this,  young  Tullius,  with  his  usual  rashness, 
replied  in  haste  (Oral.  Red.  ),  “  1  have  no  more  to  say;  but  I  should 
like  to  inform  you  that  your  warnings,  whether  they  are  wise  or 
unwise,  have  not  the  slightest  effect  upon  me  :  and  I  shall  judge 
for  myself,  without  the  interference  of  others,  w’hether  it  is  better 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


l73 

to  go  to  Rome  or  to  remain  at  Carthage.  I  never  asked  anyone 
to  spare  me  or  to  pity  me,  and  I  ask  no  one  now.” 

64.  When  the  general  had  heard  this,  he  turned  with  fury  to  his 
brave  officers,  Tullius  and  Baibas,  and  said  ( Orat .  Obi.),  “  Why 
did  you  not  tell  me  of  this  before  I  came  here?  Now  that  it  is 
too  late  to  help  our  countrymen,  you  come  with  the  sad  news 
that  almost  the  whole  of  our  army  is  destroyed,  that  1,400  of 
the  infantry  have  been  slain,  that  the  cavalry  have  fled  to  their 
respective  homes,  and  there  is  no  hope  left.  What  was  there  to 
prevent  you  from  bridging  over  the  river  and  marching  upon 
Rome.  If  even  a  single  regiment  out  of  your  vast  army  had 
done  this,  you  would  have  penetrated  without  resistance  into 
the  heart  of  the  enemy’s  country.”  Hearing  this,  the  officers 
threw  themselves  at  their  general’s  feet  with  tears  and  supplica¬ 
tions,  and  said  that  they  wuuld  never  desert  him,  that  nothing 
should  induce  them  to  break  their  faith  with  him,  and  that 
they  would  spare  no  one,  and  pity  no  one,  who  dared  to  accuse 
him  of  the  slightest  fault.  All  they  wanted  was,  that  he  would 
give  them  a  chance  of  redeeming  their  character  and  proving 
their  penitence. 

65.  After  the  occupation  of  the  bridge  over  the  river,  near 
the  village  of  Alino,  some  seventeen  miles  from  their  camp, 
the  little  band  of  heroes  did  not  enjoy  a  long  respite  from  the 
attacks  of  the  superior  force  by  which  they  were  now  completely 
surrounded.  Admirable  was  the  spirit  in  which  they  prepared 
to  resist  the  assault.  Although  they  knew  not  where  to  look  for 
succour,  and  could  scarcely  hope  to  succeed  if  unassisted,  they 
felt  that  they  could  do  their  country  good  service,  even  if  they 
only  checked  the  invaders’  progress  for  a  few  hours;  and  for  such 
an  object  as  this  it  seemed  to  these  brave  men  worth  while  to 
risk  their  lives.  In  this  dangerous  position  the  general  made  his 
arrangements  with  coolness  and  sagacity.  He  sent  out  a  few  of 
the  swiftest  of  his  cavalry  with  orders  to  scour  the  country  for  ten 
miles  round,  and  to  bring  back  word  the  same  day  of  the  position 
and  numbers  of  the  enemy,  and  whether  the  attacking  force  con¬ 
sisted  mostly  of  cavalry  or  infantry  ;  they  were  also,  if  possible, 
to  take  a  prisoner  or  two,  so  as  to  enable  them  to  gain  informa¬ 
tion  of  the  enemy’s  plans.  The  rest  of  the  army  was  employed, 
without  excepting  even  the  officers,  in  fortifying  all  the  weakest 
points  of  the  position.  After  ( postquam )  all  preparations 
had  been  completed,  thfe  aged  general  collected  his  men  (and} 


174 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


addressed  them  in  his  usual  cheerful  way  ( Orat.  Obi.) : — “  I  have 
done,”  he  said,  “  what  I  could  :  the  rest  depends  on  you ;  and  I 
am  sure  you  will  not,  as  the  enemy  have  repeatedly  done,  promise 
without  performing.  I  now  dismiss  you  to  your  several  posts,  in 
perfect  confidence  that  you  will  not  live  to  be  pitied,  and  that 
none  of  you  will  prefer  disgrace  to  death.  ” 

66.  “  The  flower  that  blooms  to-day  to-morrow  dies,”  says  the 
melodious  poet  Shelley  in  one  of  his  sweetest  poems  ;  and  in  truth, 
poets,  moralists,  novelists,  and  philosophers  repeat,  almost 
without  ceasing,  meditations  on  the  transitory  nature  of  every 
tiring  in  the  world,  and  are  never  tired  of  asserting  that  life  is 
nothing  but  a  dream.  It  is  curious,  however,  to  note  the  little 
success  that  these  remarks,  in  their  usual  exaggerated  form,  have 
had  in  influencing  the  actions  of  practical  men.  The  instinct  of 
the  majority  of  mankind  refuses  to  believe  those  who  would 
maintain  that  life  is  a  dream,  heroism  a  delusion,  and  that  there  is 
nothing  worth  living  for.  On  the  contrary,  men  have  felt  that 
there  is  no  position  in  life  but  can  be  made  real  and  noble  by 
acts  of  self-sacrifice,  whether  for  the  benefit  of  one’s  country  or 
for  that  of  individuals.  I  am  therefore  inclined  to  prefer  to  the 
usual  exaggerations  of  philosophers,  the  following  simple  advice 
which  I  once  heard  a  father  give  to  his  son  ( Orat.  Obi. )  : — “  Do 
not  forget  the  importance  that  attaches  to  every  action  of  life.  It 
matters  not  whether  it  be  great  or  small ;  for  whether  great  or 
small,  it  can  be  rightly  or  wrongly  done.  That  was  what  the 
Stoics  meant  when  they  said  that,  even  if  a  bad  man  merely  ex¬ 
tended  his  finger,  he  sinned ;  by  which  they  meant  that  the  most 
trifling  action  of  a  bad  man  must  be  bad.” 

67.  Ten  years  after  the  reduction  of  this  vast  kingdom,  the 
Casmathians,  led  by  the  intrepid  Balbus,  made  a  daring  inroad 
beyond  the  river  Eborius  and  advanced  to  Turium,  a  town  some 
thirty  miles  off,  with  no  more  than  500  horse.  By  order  of 
Tullius,  the  king  of  Turium,  the  bridge  had  been  broken  down 
to  cut  off  the  retreat  of  Balbus,  and  the  person  or  head  of  the 
rebel  was  every  moment  expected.  The  king’s  legate,  from  a 
motive  of  fear  or  pity,  having  sent  a  messenger  to  apprise 
Balbus  of  his  danger,  recommended  him  to  escape  with  speed. 
“Although,”  replied  the  intrepid  Casmathian  to  the  messenger, 
“your  master  is  at  the  head  of  so, 000  men,  yet,  since  he  wishes 
to  know  what  sort  of  men  crossed  the  Eborius  with  me,  I  will 
shew  him  that  he  has  not,  in  all  that  host*,  three  such  men  as 


GRADUATED  EXERCISES. 


*75 


these.”  Then  turning  to  three  of  his  followers,  he  ordered  the 
first  to  plunge  a  dagger  into  his  heart,  the  second  to  leap  into 
the  Eborius,  and  the  third  to  cast  himself  down  a  precipice. 
All  of  them  obeyed  without  uttering  a  word  of  remonstrance. 
“Relate  what  you  have  seen,”  continued  Balbus.  “Before 
evening  it  will  be  your  general,  not  I,  that  will  need  pity.  Why 
do  you  loiter  ?  Depart,  unless  you  wish  to  perish  ;  and  tell  him 
that  twelve  hours  hence  he  will  be  chained  among  my  dogs.” 
Before  the  evening  the  camp  was  surprised,  and  the  threat 
executed. 

68.  The  haughty  Solyman,  Emperor  of  Turkey,  in  his  attack 
on  Hungary,  took  the  city  of  Belgrade,  which  was  considered 
with  justice  the  bulwark  of  Christendom.  After  this  important 
conquest,  a  woman  of  low  rank  approached  him  and  complained 
wtih  bitterness  that  some  of  his  soldiers  had  carried  off  her  cattle 
one  night  while  she  was  asleep,  and  had  thus  deprived  her  of  her 
only  means  of  subsistence.  “Tell  me,”  said  Sulyman,  with  a 
smile,  “how  you  contrived  to  sleep  so  soundly  that  the  robbers 
did  not  wake  you.  I  could  not  have  slept  so  soundly.”  “True, 
my  sovereign,”  replied  the  woman,  “I  did  sleep  soundly,  but  it 
was  in  the  fullest  confidence  that  your  highness  watched  for  the 
safety  of  your  poorest  subjects.” 

The  magnanimous  emperor,  instead  of  resenting  this  freedom, 
praised  the  courage  with  which  she  had  spoken,  and  made  the 
poor  woman  ample  amends  for  the  loss  she  had  sustained. 


LATIN  GENDERS 


First  Declension. 

Feminine. 

Second  Declension. 

Masculine  Endings,  er,  ir,  and  us.  Neuter  Ending,  UM. 

(alvus,  colus  (m),  domus,  humus,  vannus  ; 

Exceptions'  Greek  nouns  in  odus,  as  ex.od.us,  &c.,  with  dialectus,  diphthongus,  Sec, 

(.PELAGUS,  VIRUS,  VULGUS  (m). 


Masculine  Endings. 

er,  or,  os 

es,  imparisyllabic 

o,  when  not  do,  go,  io 


Principal  Exceptions. 
tY  CADAVER  ITER 
PAPAVER  TUBER 
UBER  VER 


Third  Declension. 
Feminine  Endings. 

do,  go,  io,  as,  is,  aus,  x 

es,  parisyllabic  ;  s,  impure 
US,  long ,  in  hypermonosyllables 

Principal  Exceptions, 
do  cardo  ordo  udo 

go  harpago  ligo  margo 

io  nouns  not  abstract,  as  papilio,  &c. ; 


VERBER 

linter 

as 

as  elephas  vas 

(vadis) 

vas (vas 

is) 

FAS 

NEFAS 

or  arbor 

AEQUOR 

is 

amnis 

anguis  (f) 

axis 

cassis  (is) 

COR 

MARMOR 

cinis 

collis 

crinis 

ensis 

fascis 

finis  (f) 

follis 

funis 

tffCOS 

dos 

ignis 

lapis 

mensis 

orbis 

CHAOS 

EPOS 

panis 

piscis 

postis 

pulvis 

OS  (oris) 

os  (ossis) 

sanguis 

torris 

unguis 

vectis 

vermis 

es  comnes 

merces 

X 

calix 

codex 

cortex 

frutex 

merges 

quies 

grex 

pollex 

silex 

thorax 

requies 

seges 

vertex 

teges 

AiS 

es 

acinaces 

s 

bidens(f)  dens 

fons 

hydrops 

o  caro 

echo 

mons 

pons 

rudens (f) 

Neuter  Endings. 
C,  A,  T,  E,  L,  N, 
AR,  UR,  US  short, 
US  long,  in  mono - 
syllables 


Principal  Exceptns . 

/  sal 

sol 

n  lien 

pecten 

ren 

splen 

uriwr 

furfur 

turtur 

vultur 

us  short , 

lepus 

pec  US  (udis) 

us  long,  grus  (m) 
SUS  (m)  mus 


Fourth  Declension. 

Masculine,  except  acus,  idus  (pi).,  manus,  porticus,  tribus. 

Fifth  Declension. 

Feminine,  except  dies  (f.  Poets.),  meridies. 


A.  Masculine  by  meaning. 

B.  Feminine  99 


Names  of  Male  persons,  the  Occupations  of  men,  and 
Winds,  Rivers,  and  Months. 

„  of  Females,  Countries,  Islands,  Towns, 
Plants,  and  Trees. 


Masculine . Exceptions  to  B . Neuter. 


Towns.  Some  in  o,  as,  Croto,  Hippo,  &c. 

All  Plurals  in  i,  as  Veii,  Delphi,  &c. 
PLANTS.  Those  in  er  (and  many  in  us)  of 
the  second. 


Towns.  All  in  um,  or  plural  A. 

Those  in  e  or  ur  of  the  third. 
Plants.  Those  in  s h  or  ur  cf  the  third 


SCHEME  OF  LATIN  PRONUNCIATION.* 

Based  on  the  nearest  English  Approximations. 


VOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS. 


Latin 

a 

— 

English 

99 

a 

99 

99 

e 

9  9 

99 

99 

ae 

oe 

w 

r= 

99 

99 

99 

99 

99 

99 

e 

1 

V# 

1 

6 

u 

== 

99 

99 

99 

99 

99 

o 

= 

99 

99 

u 

= 

9  9 

99 

u 

= 

99 

99 

au 

= 

99 

99 

eu 

*• 

= 

99 

99 

ei 

27 

99 

a  in  father. 

first  a  in  away,  or  a  in  villa. 
ai  in  pam. 
ai  in  pam. 
ai  in  pam. 
e  in  mm. 
i  in  mach/ne. 
i  in  pzty. 
o  in  home. 
o  in  tap. 
u  in  rale. 
u  in  fall. 
ow  in  power. 

(Latin  e  followed  quickly  by  Latin 
1  ■&  (differs  little  from  present 

V  pronunciation). 

/Latin  e  followed  quickly  by  Latin 
l  i  (differs  little  from  ai  in  pam). 


CONSONANTS. 


Latin  c,  ch 

= 

English  k. 

„  S 

= 

99 

g  in  get 

9  9  S 

= 

99 

s  in  jin. 

„  t  (ratio) 

= 

1  ” 

t  in  ca^,  not  sh,  as 
in  na/ion.  * 

9  9  j 

sc 

99 

y  in  yard. 

„  V 

=- 

9  9 

V. 

„  z,  ph,  th 

= 

9  9 

z,  ph ,  th. 

t)S,  bt  should  be  sounded  and  generally  written  fis,  fit. 

Latin  S  between  two  vowels  — 

(sometimes)  English 

s  in  rose,  e.g.  1  roSa, 

*  Taken  from  the  Syllabus  of  Latin  Pronunciation ,  issued  by  the  Pro¬ 
fessors  of  Latin  at  the  Universities  of  Cambridge  and  Oxford,  at  the  request 
of  the  Head  Masters  of  Schools.  Some  modifications  have  been  made  by 
the  suppression  of  all  Italian  standards,  and  of  all  the  English  standards  of 
pronunciation  that  contain  a  vowel  followed  by  r.  Consequently  the  Latin 
O  is  represented  by  the  English  o.  The  Professors  give  the  option  of  pro¬ 
nouncing  v  as  v  or  as  w. 


N 


178 


APPENDIX. 


APPENDIX 

ON  THE  CONNECTION  OF  SENTENCES. 


You  may  know  the  Latin  equivalents  of  every  word  and  idiom  in  the 
English  language,  and  yet  may  be  unable  to  write  Latin  Prose.  For  to 
write  Prose  you  must  also  know  how  to  connect  together  the  different  parts 
of  a  Latin  sentence,  and  the  different  sentences  of  a  Latin  passage.  For  this 
purpose  the  following  rules  may  be  useful.  They  rise  naturally  out  of  the 
colloquial  nature  of  English  as  contrasted  with  the  logical  nature  of  Latin  : 

I.  English  prefers  co-ordinate,  Latin  subordinate  clauses. 

II.  English  prefers  multiplicity  of  subjects,  Latin  one  subject. 

III.  English  omits  connecting  particles,  Latin  inserts  them. 

IV.  English  uses  epithets,  Latin  uses  subordinate  clauses. 

I.  He  took  and  burned  the  bridge  Pontem  captum  incendit 

II.  They  asked  him  his  opinion ,  Rogatus  (or  interroganti- 

and  he  replied,  <5 rc.  bus)  sententiam  respondit 

III.  When  you  have  a  groupof  abrupt  English  sentences  connected  perhaps 
by  no  Conjunctions  at  all,  or  by  and  (which  may  mean  anything) — e.g. 
(i)  ‘  The  king  refused  the  petition  ;  (2)  The  queen  7vas  delighted' — you  must 
ask,  first,  which  is  the  most  important  sentence  in  the  group  ?  secondly,  what 
is  the  relation  between  this,  the  most  important  sentence,  and  others  that  are 
less  important  ?  The  most  important  sentence  must  be  as  it  were  the  spine, 
of  the  sentence,  and  the  less  important  must  be  the  vertebrae,  and  must  be 
carefully  connected  with  the  spine.  A  Latin  period  is  vertebrate. 

But  how  are  we  to  connect  each  of  the  vertebrae  with  the  spine?  What  is 
to  be  our  connecting  particle  in  each  case?  The  English  will  not  help  us 
much  here  :  for  the  connecting  particles  in  English  are  like  the  vowel  points 
in  Hebrew — they  are  not  written,  but  must  be  deduced  from  the  context,  and 
must  be  expressed  by  the  voice.  For  example,  above,  the  relation  of  sen¬ 
tence  (2)  to  sentence  (1)  is  that  of  (a)  consequence  to  cause ,  and  this  may  be  ex- 

pressed  in  two  ways,  either  by  a  forward  link  :  *  Quod  quum  rex  nega¬ 
visset  se  facturum,  regina  prae  gaudio  exultabat,'  or  by  a  backward  link, 

‘  Quod  or  quse  resreginam  summo  gaudio  affecit  ’  or,  *  Regina  i  gitur ,’  or, 
<r“ 

*  Itaque  regina.’  But  alter  (2)  above,  and  you  must  alter  your  connecting 
particle. 


APPENDIX. 


179 


Thus,  for  'the  queen  was  delighted ’  write 


*  The  queen 


'(b)  was  still  patient’  (contrariety). 

(c)  had  not  shown  her  usual  tact  ’  [cause  of  the  king’s  re¬ 
fusal). 

/  (d)  left  the  room  in  anger’  ( immediate  sequence'). 

I  (e)  insulted  the  petitioners’  \  simultaneousness,  or  addition). 
(/)  saw  that  all  was  lost  (consequence  late  but  inevitablet 
tum  vero,  or,  tum  demum). 

\(g)  had  anticipated  this’  (precedence,  jam  antea). 


All  these  different  sentences  will  require  different  forward  or  backward 
links  :  some  of  these  are  : — 

FORWARD  LINKS:  quum,  quia,  quoniam,  quamvis,  ut 
(although),  quamquam,  ita  (ut),  tam— quam,  antequam,  prius¬ 
quam,  donec,  simul  ac,  dum,  partim,  non  solum,  quum 
(...tum),  simul  (...simul),  auf  (either),  et  (both),  si,  nisi,  &c. 

The  Participle  is  also  used  as  a  forward  link,  rogatus,  when  he  was 
asked ;  and  so  are  ut  and  qui  in  the  phrases  cujus  erat  stUltitise, 
ut  erat  semper  stultus. 

BACKWARD  LINKS:  Nam,  enim,  quippe,  itaque,  igitur j 
idcirco,  quocirca,  quamcbrem,  quare,  autem,  vero, 
verum,  sed,  at,  quanquam  (and  yet),  jam,  interim,  interea, 
confestim,  mox,  deinde,  postremo,  denique,  tum  demum, 
porro,  praeterea,  huc  accedebat  ut.  Above  all.  the  Relative  Pro¬ 
noun  is  thus  used,  e.g.  ‘  quse  quum  ita  sint,’  ‘  quibus  auditis,’  ‘  quod 
quum  intellexisset,’  and  ‘quod  si,’  which  last  is  almost  equivalent  to  our 
*  and  if.'  It  will  be  a  useful  exercise  to  classify  these  links  or  conjunctions 
according  to  their  meaning. 

Sometimes  a  backward  link  is  rendered  unnecessary  by  an  emphatic  word 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  referring  to  the  previou.  sentence,  e.g. 
‘  Nec  vero  ulla  vis  imperii  tanta  est  ut  premente  metu  possit  esse  diuturna. 
Testis  est  Phalaris,  &c.’  So  especially  idem  for  ‘he  also.’  See  Par.  46. 


IV.  Under  the  head  of  Omission  of  Connecting  Particles  comes  the  English 
use  of  implied  statement  or  innuendo  ;  e.g.  ‘  The  haughty  monarch  refused  to 
listen  to  the  remonstrances  of  his  ministers.’  Here  the  epithet  ‘haughty 
impl  es  the  reason  why  the  monarch  did  not  listen.  The  conversational 
English,  disliking  subordinate  sentences,  prefers  to  imply  the  reason  in  an 
epithet :  the  logical  Latin  prefers  to  express  it :  ‘  cujus  erat  semper  super¬ 
bi*,’  ‘ut  erat  natuia  superbus.’ 


ALPHABETICAL  INDEX. 


The  references  ( unless  the  page  is  specially  mentioned)  are  to  the 

Paragraphs. 


Par. 

A . 22 

Ablative,  meaning  of  .  .  .  28* 
,,  in  i  and  e.  Page  115* 

„  when  used  .  .  28-32 

,,  after  Deponents  .  13 

Abstract  Nouns  not  frequent  in 

Latin . 3  a 

Accusative,  before  and  after 
Infinitive,  ambiguous  ...  48 
Adjective^,  not  doubled  .  .  12 
Adverbs,  Adverbial  Phrases  24,  25 

After ,  Conjunction . 11 

Alius  .  .  .  ; . 7 

All,  ‘  all  that,  &c.’  ....  54 

A  Iso,  in  ‘  he  also  ’  =  idem  .  .  46 

Alter . 7 

And  he  —  qui . 46 

And  omitted. . 47 

A  nd  ‘  and  no  one,  nothing,  &c.‘  45 

A  nether  . . 7 

Antequam,  when  followed 
by  Subjunctive  .....  66 

Any  . . 7 

Apodosis,  meaning  of  .  .  .  .69* 

As...  as  .  .  .  .  ...  .  59 

As  long  as .  .......  11 

Ash.' I  ask  to'  ....  Page  89 

At,  ‘at  enim’ . 44 a 

Attribute,  the . 18 

Autem,  different  from  sed  .  44 a 

Auxiliary  Verbs . 12 

Because,  ‘not  because  .  .  .  but 

because ' . 68 

Before,  Conjunction  .  .  .  .  11 

But  omitted  .......  47 

But,  when  sed,  when  autem.  44 a 
But,  ‘there’s  no  one  but'  .  .  53 

Celo,  construction  of .  ...  14 
Come,  ‘  I  come  to  see  72 

Command,  *  I  command  him 

to  ’  _ . Page  89 

Command  in  oratio  obliqua  .  .  78^ 

Comparative  of  Adjectives 
in  -eus,  -ius,  -uus  Page  2it 
Comparison, expressed  byquam  6x 
Comparison,  expressed  by  the 

Ablative . 63 

Conditional  Sentences  ....  69 

Conjunctions . 43-72 

»5  Coordinate  ...  44 


Par. 

Coordinate  and 

•  43 

.  69 

.  72 

•  67 

•  45 

.  44 a 
.  48 

Page  164 


Conjunctions, 

Subordinate . 

Conjunctions,  of  Condition 
„  ofPuipose. 

,,  of  Reason  . 

,,  Negative  . 

,,  Enclitic 
„  Subordinate 
Connection  of  Sentences  . 

Could . Page  10 

Cum,  mecum,  <Vc.  .  Page  56 
Dative  after  Verbs  and  Ad¬ 
jectives  . 6, 

Dative  after  Verbs  of  Motion 
Dative  of  Design  (Double  Da¬ 
tive)  . 

Debui . 

Dependent  Interrogative  .  .  . 

Dignus  followed  by  Abl.  .  . 
Domum  ........ 

Dum  followed  by  Pres.  Tense . 

Each . 

Ellipse  of  Prepositions  .  .  . 

of  Verb  after  Conjunc¬ 
tions  .  . 


13 

15 
17 

13 

53 

32 

16 
11 

7 

42 


Emptiness,  expressed  by  Abl. 

Enclitics . 


70 

31 

44« 

Epithet,  implying  cause  .  .  Page  6 
Et  omitted  .  .  ...  44 

Et  non,  to  be  avoided  ...  45 

Ex,  ‘  ex  itinere  ’ . 39 

Extension,  expressed  by  Acc.  .  27 

Every . 22 

Fear,  I  (construction)  ....  49 


Fertur 


49 


First,  *  he  was  the  first  to  ’  Page  91 
Fit,  '  he  is  not  fit  to  &c.’  „  90 

For,  ‘ for  ten  minutes  ’  ...  27 
Fulness,  expressed  by  Abl.  .  .  30 

Future  Participle,  how  ex¬ 
pressed  in  Inceptives.  .  Page  98 
Genitive  after  accuso,  ab¬ 
solvo  . 

Genitive  after  Impers.  Verbs 
,,  Participial Adj. 

,,  „  other  Adj..  . 

„  of  Quality  .  .  . 

„  Objective  .  .  .  . 

„  after  Adjectives  and 

Participles  .  .34  5 


36 
13« 

34 

35 

37 

33 


INDEX. 


181 


Par. 

Genitive  after  Verbs  of  Ac¬ 
cusing,  &c.  .  36 

Gerund,  after  what  Preposi¬ 
tions  . 75 

Gerundive . 75 

„  used  impersonally  5 
Great.  ‘  this  great  calamity  ’  19 

Having,  '  having  said  ’  .  (end)  66 

Hvm  —  to  him . *3 

Him  —  se . 1°I 

Hope,  ‘  I  hope  to,  that '  .  Page  88 

Idem,  =  he  also . 46 

If.  'if  he  comes’ . 11 

,,  ‘  he  asked  if’ . 51 

„  so,’ ‘//not’ . 70 

Igitur,  where  placed  .  .  .  44* 

Impei  sonal  Verbs  .  .  .  13* 

In,  ‘twarger’ . 24 

Indignus,  followed  by  Abl.  .  32 
Infinitive  Future  .  Page  98 
„  and  ACC  ambig.  .  48 

Instead  of . Page  95 

Interest . 13* 

Interrogative,  Dependent  _ .  .  53 

„  in  ( >rat.  Obliqua  78 d 

Islands,  case  of,  after  verbs 

of  motion . 16 

It ,  ‘  it  was  John  that  &c.’  .  .  4 

,,  redundant . 5 

„  ‘  it  is  said  that  ’  __ . 5 

Ita  followed  by  Si  .  .  Page  83 

„  meaning  of . 71 

J am,  different  from  nunc .  .  25 

Jubeo,  Construction  of  Page  89 
Like,  ‘  a  man  like  Cato  ’  ...  60 

Locative  Case . 1 

Magis,  different  from  plus  .  25 

Magni . 29 

Mea  interest . 13a 

Measure  of  excess  >  .  .  .  , 

Metaphors . 

Minoris  ...... 

Modo  =  only . 

More ,  ‘  more  than  a  hundred  ’ 


42 

79 
29 
25 
63 

when  magiS,  when  plus  25 

15 

16 
42 
12 
12 
72 
10 
10 
22 
45 
14 


Motion,  Verbs  implying 
„  Verbs  of  .  .  . 

Multo  with  Comparative 

Must  .  . . 

Ne  in  Prohibition  .  .  . 
Ne  for  ut  .  .  .non 
Nemine,  avoid  .  .  . 
Neminis,  avoid  .  .  . 

Nemo  =  no  ... 
Neque,  not  et  non 
Neuter,  used  Adverbially 


Par. 

No,  ‘  no  poet  ’  .  .  ...  22 

Nostri,  Genitive,  when  used.  10 
Nostrum,  Genitive,  when 

used . 10 

Not ,  ‘  not  because  ’.....  68 

Now,  j  am,  nunc . 25 

,,  Conj.  turned  by  Rel.  .  .  46 
Nullius,  not  neminis  .  .  10 
Nutlo,  not  nemine  ...  10 
Nunc,  different  from  jam  .  25 


Object,  Indirect . 14 

Objective  Genitive  ...  33 
Of  after  Participles  .....  34 

Of  —  made  of . 37 

,,  redundant . 40 

One  .  . . 8,  9 

Once,  when  semel,  when 
forte,  when  quondam  .  25 

Only  .  \  .  .  ■ . as 

Oratio  Obliqua  ....  78« 

„  Recta . 78 

Other,  ‘the  other' . 7 

Ought . Page  10 

Parentheses . 77 

Participle  Pi'esent  (English)  23,  74 

Parvi . 29 

Passive  English  rendered  im¬ 
personally  . 6 

Passive  English  ambiguous  .  11 

Paullo  with  Comparatives  .  .  42 

Personifications,  not  so  frequent 
in  Latin  as  in  English  ...  79 

Persuaded ,  I  am  .....  6 

Pluris . 29 

Plus,  different  from  magiS  .  25 

Point  of  time . 28 

Postquam . 11,  66 

Potui . . 


Prepositions,  Alphabetical  Dic¬ 
tionary  of . 41 

Prepositions ,  between  two 

Nouns . 33 

Prepositions,  Ellipse  of  ...  42 

local  meanings  of  26 
Prepositions  implying  Rest  or 

Motion . 39 

Prepositions,  Verbs  com¬ 
pounded  with . 15 

Prepositional  phrases  ....  20 

Price ...  29 

Prius-quam,  when  followed 

by  Subjunctive . 6fl 

Prohibition . 12 

Promise,  ‘  I  promise  to’  .  Page  88 
Pronouns  .......  7-10 

,,  how  avoided ....  76 


INDEX. 


182 


Par. 


Protasis,  meaning  of  ...  .  69* 

Provided  that  ....  Page  83 

Quaxn . 61 

Quamvis . Page  84 

Qaanquam  ....  ,,84 

Quanti . 29 

Question,  Dependent  ....  53 
,,  in  Oratio  Obliqua  .  78 d 

Qui . 52 

Quidam  —  a . 22 

Quidem  to  be  separated  from 

ne . 45 

Quidquid  hominum  .  .  20 
Quilibet,  quivis,  when  used  7 
Quin  followed  by  luturum 

sit . 49 

Quisquam,  necquisquam  45 
,,  when  used  7,  Page  n 3t 

Quisque . 7 

,,  used  after  a  Super¬ 
lative  Adjective . 22 

Quivis . 7 

Quum .  .  ; . 66 

Refert . 13« 

Reflexive  Verbs  ....  13« 


Relative  Pronoun  ....  52-59 

,,  ,,  omitted  .  .  58 

Relative  precedes  Antecedent  54 
Relatival  Conjunetions  ...  59 

Rus . .  ....  16 


Se,  distinguished  from  ilium.  10« 
Sed  ,,  „  autem  44 a 

Sequence  of  Tenses  .  .  64 

Should . . 

Si . 69 

Sive  and  utrum  .  .  .  Page  85 

Solum — 4 only ’ . 25 

Subjunctive,  after  Relative 
Pronoun . 52 


Subjunctive,  when  used 
after  Conjunctions  of  Time  .  66 
Sum,  with  Double  Dative  .  .  17 

M  .  '  ,  •  _  • _ • 


Supine,  4  venio  visum  ’  .  .  75 

Supposing . Page  83 

SuuSj  ipsius  .  .  .  Page  102 

Tanti  .  .  .  . . 29 

Tantum  —  4  only’  ....  25 

Tenses . 11 

Tenses,  sequence  of  ...  64 

Than . 61-63 

That,  Conjunction  ...  48,  49 


,,  ‘  that  .  .  .  not '  =  ne  .  72 

„  4  there’s  no  doubt  that  ’  .  49 

,,  *  I  fear  that  ’  ....  40 

,,  4  it  is  said  that  ’  ...  49 

„  *it  seems  that'  ...  49 

That ,  Pronoun . 5 


Par. 

That,  distinguished  from  7 vho  .  52 
,,  4  the  most  beautiful  that*  54 

,,  after  repeatedAntecedent  56 

,,  for  when . *57 

,,  'that  .  .  .  not ’  =  quin  55 

The,  uses  of . 21 

The,  ‘  the  battle  of  Cannae  ’  .  20 

„  4  the  men  in  the  ship  .  .  20 

,,  4  the  river  Tiber  ’  ...  18 

4  the  timid  dove  ’  .  ...  18 

This, 4  this  great  calamity  ’  .  .  19 

Though . Page  84 

Till,  Conjunction . 11 

Time,  extension  of . 27 

Time,  point  of . 28 

To,  different  meanings  of  .  .  73 

Too,  'too— to' . Page  90 

Towns,  after  Verbs  of  Motion  16 
Tum  demum  ....  Page  85 

Ullus . 7 

Unless  ....  Par.  11,  Page  85 

Uterque . 7 

Utinam  . . 72 

Utrum,  used  in  Dependent 
Interrogatives  ....  51 

Verbal,  after  Prepositions  .  .  75 

,,  English  use  of  .  .  .  75 

Verbs,  Auxiliary . . ia 


followed  by  to 

,,  ,,  that ^  ... 

Verbs,  compounded  with  Pre¬ 
positions  .... 

„  followed  by  the  Abl. . 

„  „  two  Acc. 

»  >1  Hat.  6  13 

,,  „  Genitive 

„  ,,  Ut  Page  89 

,,  Impersonal.  .  .  .  13« 

Vereor  (construction)  .  .  . 
Vero  different  from  verum  . 
Vcrum  different  from  vero  . 
Vestri,  Genitive,  when  used  . 

Ve  s  t rum,  Genitive, when  use  d 
Videtur  .... 

What,  double  use  of  . 

When,  '  when  he  comes  ’ 

Whether,  when  utrum, 

sive . 

While,  followed  by  Eng 

Lat.  Pres . 

While,  (logical)  omitted 
,,  not  temporal  . 

„  4  while  walking  ' 

Who,  different  from  that 
With,  ‘  with  aneer’  . 

Without ,  With  Verbal 


when 


Past, 


73 

49 

15 

13 

14 

15 
13 


49 

44 

44 

10 

7 

49 

53 

22 

51 


11 

47 
87 
70 
5» 

„  24 

Page  96 


Would  13 


V 


BOSTON  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  HEIGHTS 
CHESTNUT  HILL,  MASS. 

V 

Books  may  be  kept  for  two  weeks  and  may  be 
renewed  for  the  same  period,  unless  reserved. 

Two  cents  a  day  is  charged  for  each  book  kept 
overtime. 

If  you  cannot  find  what  yon  want,  ask  the 
Librarian  who  will  be  glad  to  help  you. 

The  borrower  is  responsible  for  books  dra\gp 
on  his  card  and  for  all  fines  accruing  on  the  same. 


